The URL can be used to link to this page

31A-067 (12) Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College ,, Northampton,Massachusetts protected against entrance of dirt and moisture during construction. C' Ends of all conduits shall be reamed and all joints made waterproof. Connections to junction boxes shall be double locknut and bushing, using insulated bushings on conduit 1-1/4" or larger. Grounding bushings shall be provided at all panel connections. Conduit connections to motor frames shall have minimum of 18" of flexible steel conduit to eliminate vibrations and noise being transferred to other parts of the building, with cable jumper across greenfield and fittings. This flexible conduit shall also be installed at ceiling mounted lighting fixtures to facilitate alignment of fixtures. 3.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Receptacle boxes, unless otherwise noted, shall be approximately 18" above finished floor, aligned above or below closest block course, except at locations where wall mounted equipment precludes this mounting height. At such locations, receptacle height shall be as directed by the Architect. Switch outlets shall be 48" above finished floor, unless aligned above or below closest block course. The Electrical Contractor shall check with the Architectural and Structural Plans for interferences. B. Junction and outlet boxes,where exposed to the weather and wet locations, shall be of the threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket. C. Pull boxes shall be adequate size to accommodate the conductors installed therein without excessive bending of the conductors, which would damage the conductor insulation. D. All outlet boxes installed in masonry shall be so set that their outer edges are 1/4"back of finished surface. E. Outlet boxes shall not be supported by the conduit. Suitable means shall be provided to support the outlet box to take the weight of the fixture. F. Fixture outlet boxes used as junction boxes or outlets not used, shall be provided with covers. 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor and be included in his bid. 3.6 TESTING A. Balancing Loads: 1. Circuits shall be connected to the panelboards so that the total load is distributed equally between each line and neutral to within ten percent. Branch circuits shall be balanced on their own panelboards, and feeder loads balanced on the main distribution panel. Reasonable load testing shall be arranged for verification if requested by the Public Works Department. Electrical(CW) 16100-20 s9 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts A. The Electrical Contractor shall endeavor to layout and perform his work in such a manner as to cause no delay in the construction by other trades. B. The Electrical Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No allowance will be made for differences between actual measurements and those shown on plans. C. If, in laying out his work, the Electrical Contractor finds that the work of other trades might interfere with his,the Architect shall be notified. D. The locations of outlets, apparatus, and equipment are approximate only and the runs of feeders, mains, and branches are not necessarily to be made exactly as shown on the plans. The exact locations of such work shall be determined after full consideration has been given to work of other trades and without changes in the design of the systems. The entire installation shall conform to the latest issue of the Massachusetts Electrical Code and local inspection authorities. E. Electrical equipment, such as junction and pull boxes, control, and apparatus, shall be made accessible. F. All wiring shall be concealed in finished spaces,except as otherwise specified. 3.2 GROUNDING A. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non-current carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in non- metallic raceways and neutral conductor of the wiring system shall be grounded. The ground connection shall be made at the main service equipment. B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all material required for the grounding and/or bonding in the building of all equipment, power and lighting systems installed under this Contract. C. The Electrical Contractor shall make tight and proper all metallic components and equipment to one another and to ground, using a positive foolproof system of connections. Provide and install bonding and grounding conductors with approved termination where required, conforming with the latest Massachusetts Electrical Code and other applicable specification standards. D. A #12 AWG insulated equipment ground conductor shall be installed in each length of flexible metallic conduit connection to motors, recessed lighting fixtures and other equipment components for continuity. Positive ground connections with the ground wire shall be made at each outlet box, lighting fixture,motor and other equipment components by means of positively secured ground clamp in each. 3.3 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. All conduit shall be installed so as to provide the straightest possible run with not more than the equivalent of three 90°bends in a single run. Where more bends are necessary, the Electrical Contractor shall provide suitable pull boxes. B. Conduit shall be fished and cleaned and dry before pulling wires and shall be suitably Electrical (CW) 16100-19 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College -w Northampton,Massachusetts at TDR, and one at signal injector. h. Document all data obtained in cable certification process for each drop, including Outlet IO and Pass/Fail status. S. System Documentation: 1. Prepare and submit four(4) copies of operation and maintenance manuals,neatly bound as outlined in this Specification. 2. Manual to include: a. A system block diagram with all input/output terminations and patch points identified. b. A listing of the As-built cabling and components installed. C. A record of the dynamic test results,both data communication simulation and the real time photographs showing the Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR)measurements of the individual cable segments. d. Formalized As-built Drawings indicating the physical cable plant, component and node locations. e. A topology diagram depicting the network configuration for Owner's "" reference when additions, changes, or modifications are made to the original design. 2.14 EMERGENCY CALL-FOR-AID SYSTEM(Handicap Toilet) A. The building's Emergency Call-For-Aid System will be furnished and installed(including cabling)by the Electrical Contractor. B. Each Emergency Call Station shall consist of a single gang box with blank plate and a call switch. Call switch shall be Simplex 5001 series. C. The call station switch shall be long-life, positive acting mounted on a stainless steel plate marked "Emergency". The unit shall include a six foot(6)long nylon pull cord. D. The combination chime/light station shall be a single bulb dome lamp with soft chime tone; flame retardant ABS panel with snap-in lens. Provide lamps, chime, and all required transformers. E. Activation of system shall cause dome to illuminate and chime to tone. Signal cancellation must be made at the point of origin. PART 3 -INSTALLATION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS Electrical(CW) 16100-18 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 6. All wires shall be permanently identified at each wire end by marking with"E-Z" tape markers or equivalent. 7. Splicing of cables is not permitted between terminations at specified equipment. 8. Form, in a neat and orderly manner, all conductors in enclosures and boxes, wireways and wiring troughs,providing circuit and conductor identification. Tie as required using T&B "Ty-Raps" of appropriate size and type. Limit spacing between ties to 6", and provide circuit and conductor identification at least once in each enclosure. 9. Provide ample service loops at each termination so that plates, panels, and equipment can be unmounted for service and inspection. Q. Acceptance Testing 1, Acceptance testing shall be performed by the Architect/Engineer and Owner during a period designated by the Owner. The period of time required for acceptance testing is two (2) working days. Contractor shall furnish a minimum of one (1) technician for the acceptance testing period. This area shall be completed with all furnishings ready for occupancy. 2. Make additional mechanical and electrical adjustments within the scope of the work and which are deemed necessary by the Architect or Owner as a result of the acceptance tests. R Testing and Inspection 1. Test and inspect all parts of the work provided under this Section and as required by codes, standard or authorities having jurisdiction, and conduct all tests and inspections to the complete satisfaction of the Architect and all authorities. Notify the Architect and all involved authorities at least one (1) week prior to testing or inspection. Do not cover work prior to testing or inspection. 2. The Contractor shall certify all twisted pair cable drops with a time domain reflectometer (TDR) device in order to verify compliance with IEEE Specifications. The test results for all cable drops must meet or exceed the following Specifications when tested from each end. a. Compliance with EIA/TIA T569B wiring sequence. b. Distance: Less than 90 meters. C. Attenuation at 10.0 MHz: Less than 6.95 dB. d. Near end crosstalk(NEXT) at 10.0 Mhz: Greater than 44.1)Db. e. Cable Resistance: Less than 9.4 OHMS (18.81oopback). f. Noise: Less than 100 mv. g. TDR testing will be performed with 10 ft. Category V patch cables; one Electrical(CW) 16100-17 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts overwrap shall cover the entire legend. 3. All cables will be labeled at both ends,with room number and floor. N. Field Quality Control 1. Employ a Job Superintendent or Project Manager during the course of the installation to provide co-ordination of the work of the Division and of other trades and to provide technical information when requested by other trades. This person shall be responsible for all quality control during installation, equipment set-up and testing. ®. General Co-ordination(Date and Telephone Wiring) 1. Entire system shall conform completely with pertinent codes, laws, ordinances, regulations, standards, criteria, or other requirements, including, but not limited to, structural support, fire rating and health/safety requirements regarding all items. Such conformity shall have precedence over this Specification. 2. Secure equipment firmly in place, including boxes, conduit, and cables. Provide fastenings and supports adequate to support loads. 3. Install work neatly,with boxes, equipment, etc.,plumb and square. Adjust layout as necessary to preserve symmetry and aesthetics. Install equipment to provide maximum safety to future operators. 4. Clearly, logically, and permanently mark connectors, jacks, cables, and cable terminations. P. Wiring 1. Provide wire, conduits, and raceways according to standard broadcast practices. Do not exceed 30%fill in conduit. 2. Exercise care in wiring to avoid damage to cables and equipment. 3. Wiring shall not rest on ceiling material nor touch any heat sources. Conduits exposed to physical abuse shall be run in RSC,3/4"minimum. 4. Install all data wire and cable. Ensure proper. . a. Pulling tensions. b. Quantities. C. Types. d. Lengths. e. Routing. f. Wire group separation. g. Identification. 5. The interconnection of all equipment requiring shielded cable shall be by Belden type 9451,or equivalent,unless otherwise specified. Electrical(CW) 16100-16 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 3. Installation shall conform to the following basic guidelines: a. Use of approved wire,cable, and wiring devices. b. Neat and uncluttered wire termination. C. Cable marking materials shall be employed throughout the length of each cable run. The Contractor shall label each cable at the ends and at each splice/junction point. Contractor shall label cables in accordance with 2.13.M, "Labeling" of this section. 4. Provide fire stopping for electrical penetrations through fire rated floors, walls, and other partitions of building construction. 5. Where existing cables (outlets) are being relocated to an adjacent wall, Contractor shall cut off connector and pull cable to new outlet box location. Pull and label as specified. K. Testing of Data Cables 1. Each pair and the shield of each cable shall be tested for opens, shorts, grounds, and pair reversal. Grounded and reversed pairs shall be corrected by the Contractor. Open and shorted pairs shall be examined to determine if the problem is caused by faulty termination. If the termination is proper, the bad pairs shall be tapped at both ends and noted on the punch down sheets. 2. If any data cable contains any bad conductors or pairs, the entire cable shall be replaced at no charge to the Owner. 3. All terminated UTP cables shall conform to the Specifications for Category 5 cable. L. Grounding 1. All equipment racks,housings, and raceways shall be grounded. 2. Data system shall contain a single point ground. All cabinets, racks, etc. shall be connected to a single point ground which, in turn, will. be connected to the grounding systems conductors in that area. 3. All manufacturers grounding requirements shall be adhered to as a minimum. M. Labeling 1. Each cable shall be labeled: a. Where it enters a termination or patch panel. b. On the front of the patch panel or punch block. 2. Cables shall be labeled using pre-printed or write-on markers with a clear overwrap to protect the labeling. If pre-printed markers are utilized, the clear Electrical(CW) 16100-15 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts f. Characteristic Impedance: 100 OHMS+/- 15%. 2. Emquency Max.Attenuation Min. Crosstalk 1 MHz 6.3 dB/1,000 Ft. 62 dB/1,000 Ft. 4 MHz 13 dB/1,000 Ft. 53 dB/1,000 Ft. 10 MHz 20 dB/1,000 Ft. 47 dB/1,000 Ft. 16 MHz 25 dB/1,000 Ft. 44 dB/1,000 Ft. 20 MHz 28 dB/1,000 Ft. 42 dB/1,000 Ft. 100 MHz 67 dB/1,000 Ft. 32 dB/1,000 Ft. 3. PEysical Characteristics a. Maximum pulling tension: 41 lbs. b. Minimum bend radius: 2.00 in. C. Nominal diameter: .217 in. d. Cable shall be Belden No. 1583A or approved equal. 4. Wall Plates and Connectors a Furnish and install faceplates, boxes and inserts based on equipment as manufactured by Hubbell. 1.. Data-Category 5 5110 Series. 2. Voice-FTJ Type b. Data runs will be punched down (8 wires) to Category V RJ45 patch panels using EIA/TIA 568B standard. C. Voice station wires will be punched down to 110 Type blocks. d. Provide two (2) port faceplates for "Data Only" locations and three (3) port faceplates for combined voice/data locations. 5. Voice cable to be Category 3. J. Installation of Data and Telephone Cabling 1. Install materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions to comply with governing regulations and industry standards applicable to the work and as shown on approved Shop Drawings. a. Contractor shall rigidly adhere to manufacturer's published specifications for pulling tension, minimum bend radii, and sidewall pressure when installing all cables. 2. Arrange and mount all equipment and materials in a manner acceptable to the Architect/Engineer and Owner. Electrical(CW) 16100-14 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide new feeder (sized as shown on Plans) from existing switch gear as directed by the Owner. Connect to service entrance equipment. C. The system shall be properly grounded as required by the Massachusetts Electrical Code. Ground cable shall be secured to the water service with an approved clamp; bond water pipe sections as required by Section 250-81 MEC. 2.13 TELEPHONE/DATA SYSTEM A. The building's internal telephone/data system is existing, and will be modified to accommodate the new building layout as shown on the Drawings and directed by the Owner. B. Existing head end equipment, including fiber optic data and telephone equipment mounted on existing backboard in basement, shall remain and be sealed off with plastic covering during construction to avoid dust intrusion as much as practicable. C. New outlet locations,as shown on Drawings, shall consist of standard size outlet box, and cover plates (smooth phenolic ivory), with 3 ports; (1) for data, (1) for telephone, and(1) for future expansion; D. The work in this Section shall be performed by a Contractor who has been pre-qualified by the College. Acceptable Contractor is Hogan. E. Work of this Section shall include the installation,termination,and testing of all data and telephone wiring from the outlets indicated on the Contract Drawings to the Basement Data/Telephone Room as indicated on the Drawings. F. Each Telephone/Data outlet drop shall consist of one(1)data and one(1)voice drop, run from each outlet location to the Telephone Room. G. All data runs must be installed without cross-connects between wall jack and patch panel terminations in Telephone Room. H. Voice runs may be cross connected on 110 blocks. I. Data cabling shall be Category V, unshielded twisted pair, (UTP), with a blue sheath as manufactured by IBM,Belden,or AT&T. 1. The installed cabling must meet or exceed the following specifications: a. UTP (unshielded twisted pair), Category V rated, 24 AWG solid bare CU,PVC jacket,4 pairs. b. Nominal capacitance at 1 KHZ: 4 PF/FT. C. Nominal velocity of progragation: 67% d. Nominal Delay: 1.5 NS/FT. e. Nominal Condr/D.C.R. at 20 C: 27 OHMS/1000 FT. Electrical(CW) 16100-13 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts "° G. Panelboards shall be listed by UL and shall bear the UL label. Panelboard shall be Square D I-LINE. No Substitutions Accepted. 2.10 PANELBOARDS A. Furnish and install circuit breaker lighting and receptacle panelboards as required and where shown on the Plans. Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic molded case circuit breakers with frame and trip ratings as required. B. Circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break,thermal-magnetic, trip indicating, and have common trip on all multi-pole breakers. Trip indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking position between "On" and "Off' when the breaker is tripped. Connections to the bus shall be bolt-on. C. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breaker shall be the "distributed phase" or "phase sequence"type. All current-carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be plated. D. Terminals for feeder conductors to the panelboard mains and neutral shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified. Terminals for branch circuit wiring, both breaker and neutral, shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified. E. Panelboard circuit numbering shall be such that starting at the top, odd numbers shall be used in sequence down the left-hand side and even numbers shall be used in sequence down the right-hand side. F. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. The directory card shall provide a space at least 1/4" high by 3" long or equivalent for each circuit. The directory shall be typed to identify the load fed by each circuit. G. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than 10,000 amps. H. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories and bear the UL label. Panelboards shall be Square D, "NQOD" series for 120/208 volts. No substitutions will be allowed. 2.11 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (Furnished by Owner; Installed by Electrical Contractor) A. The Electrical Contractqrk,.shall► install a complete fire alarm system as shown on Drawings. All fire alarm equipment shall be furnished by the Owner and shall be a Simplex 4002 system complete with all peripherals, including auto dialer to Campus Security as directed by the Owner. B. All wiring in conduit shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor. C. The building shall be wired on a "zone per floor" basis unless otherwise indicated by the Owner. 2.12 ELECTRIC SERVICE A. Electric service shall be the existing 600 ampere,208V/120V, 3 phase,4 wire. - i Electrical(CW) 16100-12 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 3. Overload relays shall be the melting alloy type with a replaceable control circuit module. Thermal units shall be of one-piece construction and interchangeable. The starter shall be inoperative if the thermal unit is removed. a. All three phase magnetic starters shall have "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch, three-pole, three-phase of NEMA size applicable, with three melting alloy overload relays and three-position H-O-A switch in cover of general purpose enclosure. To be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 522. No substitutions will be allowed. b. All single phase magnetic starters shall be single pole magnetic contactor without overload protection, with "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch in cover of general purpose enclosure. To be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 509. No substitutions will be allowed. C. A control transformer shall be furnished and installed in each starter, fused,with 24 volt secondary. Starter coils shall be 24 volt. d. Furnish a minimum of one auxiliary contact in each starter for use by others for interlocking purposes. 2.9 DISTRIBUTION PANELS A. Furnish and install distribution/power panelboards where shown on the Plans. Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic, molded case circuit breakers of frame and trip ratings as required. B. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs shall have current ratings as required. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any connector or bus bar not to exceed 50°C above ambient. Heat rise tests shall be conducted in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The use of conductor dimensions will not be accepted in lieu of actual heat tests. Buses shall be copper. C. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated, braced and protected connectors. The front faces of all circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Large permanent, individual circuit numbers shall be affixed to each breaker in a uniform posi- tion. Tripped indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between "ON" and "OFF". Provisions for additional breakers shall be such that no additional connectors will be required to add breakers. D. Each panelboard,as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit rating equal to 42,000 amps. E. Panelboard assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be as specified in UL Standard 50 for cabinets. The size of wiring gutters shall be in accordance with UL Standard 67. Cabinets to be equipped with latch and tumbler lock on door of trim. Doors over 48" long shall be equipped with three-point latch and vault lock. All locks shall be keyed alike. End walls shall be removable. Front trim shall be hinged. F. The panelboard interior assembly shall be dead front with panelboard front removed. Main lugs shall be barriered on five sides. The barrier in front of the main lugs shall be hinged to be fixed part of the interior. The end of the bus structure opposite the mains shall be barriered. n' 16100-11 Electrical(CW) Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts C. All fixtures shall be installed complete with lamps of the stated type and size. T-8 lamps shall be 3500 K. Compact fluorescent PL lamps shall be 3,500 K. D. All fixtures to be independently supported from building structure. E. Fixtures are identified by letter on the Fixture Schedule and by corresponding letter on Drawings. Manufacturers' names and catalogue numbers are listed to show type and standard of quality. Complete schedule of lighting fixtures shall be submitted to and approved by the Architect and Owner. 2.8 MOTOR STARTERS AND SWITCHES A. Furnish and install motor starting,protecting, and controlling devices for motors. B. Furnish and install heavy duty fused safety switches as required. 1. All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the "Off'position with the door open. All current-carrying parts shall be plated to resist corrosion and promote cool operation. 2. Switches shall be quick-made and quick-break such that, during normal operation of the switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by the operating handle after the closing or opening action of the contacts has started. The handle and mechanism shall be an integral part of the u", box,not the cover,with positive pad-locking provisions in the "Off'position. 3. Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless NEMA 3R (rainproof) is required. Enclosures shall have gray enamel, electro- deposited on cleaned phosphatized steel. 4. Switches shall be horsepower rated for 240 volts AC. 5. Fuses shall be as required. 6. Switches shall be Square D, heavy duty type in NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R enclosure. C. Disconnect switches for 120 volt, single phase motors shall be single or double pole toggle switches as specified,or required. D. Motor starters shall be across-the-line magnetic type rated in accordance with NEMA Standards, sizes and horsepower ratings. Starters shall be mounted in general purpose enclosures unless otherwise indicated on the Plans. 1. Across-the-line magnetic starters shall be equipped with double break silver alloy contacts. All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring or removing starter from panel. 2. Coils shall be of molded construction, replaceable from the front without removing the starter from the panel. Electrical(CW) 16100 -10 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 1. Duplex Receptacles - 20 amp, 125 volt with grounding screw, side and back wired. To be Leviton Cat.No. 5352-I,or equal. 2. Ground fault interrupting receptacles shall be Leviton Cat. No. 6898-HGI, or equal. 3. Weatherproof cover for receptacles shall be lockable, vertical, UL Listed, with Lexan base and lid,4 screw attachment,Tay Mac Cat.No.20-3-5-0,or equal. 4. Duplex receptacles, isolated ground- 20 A, 125 V, side and back wired, Leviton Cat.No. 5362-IG,or equal. 5. Light Switches, Single Pole-20 amp, 120/277 volt,back and side wired,Leviton Cat.No. 1221-2,or equal. 6. Light Switches, 3 Way-20 amp, 120/277 volt,back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No. 1223-2, or equal. 7. Light Switches,4 Way- 20 amp, 120/277 volt,back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No. 1224-2,or equal. 8. Switch and Pilot Light - 20 amp, 120 volt, side and back wired, red handle, Leviton Cat.No. 1221-PLR, or equal. 9. Power receptacles shall be flush type, of NEMA configuration shown, with matching cord and cap,Leviton,or equal,as follows: a. Type"R" -50 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole,4 wire,Leviton Cat.No. 279. b. Type "D" -30 amp, 125/250 volt,3 pole,4 wire,Leviton Cat.No.278. 10. Clock hanger outlet with single receptacle and strong hook for hanging heavy clocks, Leviton Cat. No. 688-I, ivory finish, or equal. Clocks shall be Simplex, style as chosen by Architect. 11. Wall plates shall be smooth molded urea or phenolic plastic, ivory with matching screws. To be Leviton Cat.No. 86000 series, or equal. 2.7 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Furnish and install lighting fixtures on all light outlets shown on plans. All lighting fixtures to have label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fixtures to be complete in all respects with all required glassware and lamps. All lamps to be new. Furnish and install all required hardware to fit in all type ceilings. Fixtures are to be cleaned after lamps and diffusers are installed. Any chipped, cracked or otherwise defective material shall be replaced. B. Fluorescent ballasts shall be solid state electronic type, approvable for use on their system by the Massachusetts Electric Co. Fixture/lamp combinations for which electronic ballasts are not available shall be high power factor, energy efficient magnetic type, complete with automatic reset thermal protector,and shall be CBM certified. Electrical(CW) 16100 -9 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts E. Branch circuit wiring located above lay in tile ceilings or fished in stud partitions may be Type MC cable; single and multi-circuit home runs shall be raceway and wire as specified. F. Wire and cable for special systems shall be as specified in those specification sections. G. Wire and Cable to be by Cerro, Southwire,Triangle/PWC,or equal. 2.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized or sheradized pressed steel unless otherwise noted or required by the National Electrical Code,and shall be as required for their use. B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to weather and wet locations shall be of the cast aluminum, threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket. C. Outlet boxes shall be of sizes and types to accommodate: 1. structural conditions. 2. size and number of raceways and conductors or cables entering. 3. device of fixture for which required. D. Boxes occurring at plastered surfaces shall have a suitable plaster ring installed. E. Where multiple devices are located at one point,gang type boxes shall be used. F. Pull and junction boxes,whether surface or flush, shall be galvanized code gauge. G. Pull boxes and wireways shall be standard NEMA-1 enclosures with cover plates and screws,bonderized paint finished. H. Pull and splice boxes not indicated on the Drawings shall be provided as required by the National and the Massachusetts Electrical Codes. I. Outlet boxes and covers shall be as manufactured by Steel City electrical Company, General Electric Company,RacQ,or approved equal. 2.5 NAMEPLATES A. Furnish and install nameplates identifying all apparatus, controls, panels and safety switches. The nameplates shall be Seton style 2060 engraved plastic, or equal, screw attached. Submit schedule of nameplate lettering for approval. 2.6 WIRING DEVICES A. The Electrical Contractor shall install devices where shown on the plans. Where two or more devices occur at one location, they shall be provided with a gang plate. All unused boxes to be furnished with blank plates. Electrical(CW) 16100-8 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts manner. 1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1. PART 2—MATERIALS 2.1 RACEWAYS A. Rigid galvanized steel or intermediate steel conduit shall be used for all raceway runs concealed in concrete, run under slabs, run in trenches or pits, exposed below 6' above floor, and for service entrance conductor sweeps. Conduit shall comply with the latest applicable Federal Specifications. B. Electrical metallic tubing may be used for all homerun raceways run in walls or partitions,raceways run exposed inside the building, or run concealed in or above furred spaces unless otherwise specified above. Electrical metallic tubing shall comply with the latest applicable requirements of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. Couplings, connectors, and fittings for electrical metallic tubing may be of the set screw type. C. Electrical metallic tubing shall be used for all homeruns. D. Flexible Steel Conduit shall be used for final connections to motors, or other movable equipment to facilitate removal and connections. E. Raceway run underground outside the buildings may be scheduled 40 PVC with solvent welded fittings. 2.2 WIREWAYS A. Wireways shall be made to accommodate conductors as required in accordance with applicable rules of the National Electrical Code. To be of code gauge steel and supported as required by Code. Wireways shall be furnished and installed complete with the necessary complement of fittings, connectors, and accessory parts. Wireways shall be of the "lay-in" type with standard knockouts and with screw covers for full channel access. All sheet metal parts shall be coated with a rust inhibitor and finished in grey baked enamel. All hardware shall be plated to prevent corrosion. 2.3 CONDUCTORS A. Conductors shall be 98% conductivity copper, with 600 volt insulation, and shall be of types indicated below unless otherwise shown on the plans. Aluminum conductors shall not be used. B. Conductors#10 AWG and smaller,Type THWN, solid. C. Conductors#4 AWG through#8 AWG,Type THWN, stranded- D. Conductors#3 AWG and larger, Type THW, stranded. Electrical(CW) 16100-7 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 4. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 5. Panel schedules 6. List of recommended spare parts. 7. Copies of all service contracts. 8. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. 1.16 GUARANTEE A. The Electrical Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one(1)year after date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The Electrical Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1.17 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of electrical apparatus in the building, shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Plumbing Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor failing to co-ordinate,who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for conduit and equipment where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The Electrical Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Electrical Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved Electrical(CW) 16100 -6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. 1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the individual Contractor. B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs,plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the individual Contractor. L 14 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping, duct work, cable, and raceway shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms,closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms. B. Exposed runs shall be run straight and level, parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building. 1.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval,three(3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each Section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of Drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The manual shall include the following information: 1 Description of systems. 2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of equipment. 3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. Electrical(CW) 16100-5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts ..,, C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Electrical Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Electrical Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. 1.8 PERMITS,FEES,AND INSPECTIONS A. The Electrical Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Electrical Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1. 1.10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER A. The General Contractor will furnish and install temporary light and power as specified in Division 1. 1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Electrical Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. B. The Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Electrical Contractor shall not scale the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Electrical Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. Electrical(CW) 16100-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor installing such items. G. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. H. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I. Before submitting his bid, the Electrical Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work since the Electrical Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard thereto. J. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in product specifications and as approved by the Architect and Owner. B. The Electrical Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1.6 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted other-wise, all materials used shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements,listings,or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Electrical Contractor shall submit to the Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details,dimensions,capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished. B. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all changes which may be required. Electrical(CW) 16100-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 14. All existing electrical systems and equipment, which are to remain in operation, and which interfere with new construction shall be relocated and reconnected as required. 1.3 CODES,ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Massachusetts Electrical Code, and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. B. The Electrical Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Electrical Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Electrical Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Electrical Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Electrical Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Electrical Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Electrical Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The Electrical Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Electrical Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames,beams, supports, inserts,etc.,hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Electrical Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Electrical Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. Electrical(CW) 16100-2 _11014�, Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts SECTION 16100-ELECTRICAL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of Division 1,as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all electrical work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings,including,but not limited to,the following: 1. New Electric Servicedistribution from existing service located in Comstock House. 2. Branch Circuit Wiring and Conduit. 3. Feeders. 4. Panelboards. 5. Lighting Fixtures and Lamps. 6. Telephone/Data System 7. Fire Alarm System. 8. Emergency Call For Aid System 9. Wiring devices and plates. 10. Power wiring to motors and equipment furnished by other trades or Owner including final connections to equipment. 11. Arrange for inspections and perform tests. 12. Guarantee and instructions. 13. Disconnect and remove existing electrical equipment made obsolete by new construction. All removed equipment shall be the property of the Owner and delivered to such places as designated by the Owner. 16100-1 Electrical(CW) Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts each size installed on the project. Spare motors shall be delivered to the Owner. C. Fan Belts: This Contractor shall provide one(1)spare fan belt of each size fiunished. D. Furnish a typewritten certificate confirming the above and stating the Owner designated location to which the spare parts have been delivered. Delivery of parts shall be confirmed by the Owner's representative,who shall countersign the Certificate. END OF SECTION HVAC(CW) 15600-49 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts , B. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked and thoroughly cleaned including coils,plenums,under equipment and any and all other areas around or in equipment provided under this Section. Any filters used during construction shall be replaced with new filters during final clean-up. C. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked for painting damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. D. Any metal or especially covered areas that have been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas. 3.10 IDENTIFICATION A. All piping, valves, controls and equipment on the project shall be identified as specified herein. All marks of identification shall be easily visible from the floor or usual point of vision. B. All piping shall be identified as to the service of the pipe and the normal direction of flow. The letters shall be 1" high and the flow arrows shall be at least 6" long. The letters and flow arrows shall be made by precut stencils and black oil base paint with aerosol can or snap-on, pre-printed plastic labels. Install identification in each room and additionally so that markers are not over 50 feet on center. C. Each valve,except runout valves,but including control valves, shall be tagged with a brass disc 1-1/2" in diameter. The disc shall contain a number, and a valve list shall be provided under glass in the Boiler Room showing the location of the valve,the service and the valve and any pertinent remarks regarding the operation of the valve. Securely fasten the discs to the valves with brass"S"hooks or chains. D. All panel mounted controls and instruments, and all equipment shall be identified by engraved nameplates mounted just under the control or instrument. The engraved nameplates shall be engraved on "Lamacoid", or approved equal plastic which will be black and show white letters when engraved. Letters shall be 1/2"high. E. No identification shall be done until all paintingrequired under the Architectural section of these Specifications has been accomplished. 3.11 SPARE PARTS A. Filters: Each air handling unit, and cabinet type unit heaters shall be provided with three (3)extra sets of filters for each unit. One (1) set shall be installed by this Contractor after substantial completion is issued and the two (2) remaining sets shall be delivered to the Owner. B. Cabinet Unit Motors: This Contractor shall provide one (1) spare fan coil unit motor for HVAC(CW) 15600-48 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts use of trisodium phosphate shall be repeated. E. The HVAC Contractor shall not add any water treatment chemicals, or at any time "stop- leak"compounds to the system. 3.6 WATER AND AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS A. After completion of the installation of the heating, ventilating, and exhaust systems, aid prior to acceptance by the Owner, all systems and appurtenances applicable to the above systems shall be adjusted and balanced to deliver the water and air quantities as specified, indicated on the Drawings,or as directed. B. Balancing shall be performed by an independent contractor hired directly by the Owner. 3.7 INSULATION A. All pipe and duct insulation shall be installed by an independent insulation contractor regularly engaged in that business. B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls nor on branches running through radiator covers. Longitudinal seams on jackets shall be located so that they are not visible from the floor. Remove all stickers from covering. C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed with butt strips. Insulation shall run through all hangers, sleeves, and have an 18 gauge sheet metal saddle equal to three times the pipe diameter in length. All pipes over 2" in diameter shall be supported through insulation by fitting a protection saddle to the thickness of the insulation inside the vapor barrier jacket. D. All fittings, valves, etc. shall be insulated with the proper factory pre-cut insulation. The ends of the insulation shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edge adjacent to the pipe covering tufted and tucked into fully insulated pipe fitting. The one piece PVC fitting cover shall then be secured by taping the ends of the adjacent pipe covering. 3.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be fiunished by the HVAC Contractor and be included in his bid. 3.9 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP A. The entire Heating and Ventilating system shall be tested at completion of the building, and it shall be established that all controls are calibrated accurately and performing satisfactorily and that all units are heating and ventilating satisfactorily. The systems shall be checked for vibration and excessive noise and all such conditions corrected. HVAC(CW) 15600-47 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts Gauges used in the tests shall have been recently calibrated with a dead weight tester. C. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the system is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system under test. Make a check to verify that the stress due to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90% of specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9,Code for Pressure Piping,Building Services Piping. D. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes,examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate,and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. E. After system has been determined to be leak-free, the Engineer shall be notified and the test shall be repeated in his or his representative's presence. F. When delicate control mechanisms are installed in the piping system, they shall be removed during the tests to prevent shock damage. This does not apply to control valves. G. Leaks developing subsequent to these tests shall not be repaired by mastic or other temporary means. All leaks shall be repaired by removal of the valve, fitting, joint, or section that is leaking and reinstalling new material with joints as specified herein before. 3.5 CLEANING AND FLUSHING A. All water circulating systems for the project shall be tholoughly cleaned before placing in operation to rid the system of dirt,piping compound, mill scale, oil, and any and all other material foreign to the water being circulated. Clean all strainers. B. Extreme care shall be exercised during construction to prevent all dirt and other foreign matter from entering the pipe or other parts of the system. Pipe stored on the project shall have the open ends capped and equipment shall have all openings fully protected. Before erection, each piece of pipe, fitting, or valve shall be visually examined and all dirt removed. C. After system is complete, the Heating & Ventilating Contractor shall add trisodium phosphate in an aqueous solution to the system at the proportion of one pound per fifty gallons of water in the system. After the system is filled with this solution, the system shall be brought up to temperature and allowed to circulate for two hours. The system shall then be drained completely and refilled with fresh water. The Engineer shall be given notice of this cleaning operation and he or his representative shall be present to observe the cleaning operation, and, if he deems it necessary,the cleaning operation shall be repeated. D. After the system has been completely cleaned as specified herein, i shall be tested by litmus paper or other dependable method and shall be left on the slightly alkaline side Oh = 7.5 plus or minus). If the system is found to be still on the acid side,the cleaning by the HVAC(CW) 15600-46 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION A. All piping shall be run true and straight at proper pitch without strain and shall be frmly supported throughout. Provision for expansion and contraction shall be made with offsets or expansion loops. All pipe shall be cut off clean and threaded with sharp dies, reamed and burrs removed. B. Where screwed fittings are used, bushings shall not be used from branch connections or reducers. Connections to equipment shall be full size of tappings. Reductions in the run of pipe shall be made with eccentric or concentric reducers as required for draining and venting. C. All piping shall be run concealed throughout finished spaces either in furred spaces, shafts, chases,or above hung ceilings. D. Special care must be taken throughout the equipment rooms, vertical pipe shafts, above hung ceilings, and elsewhere throughout all floors to maintain maximum headroom and clearances for access to other equipment and to avoid conflict with electrical conduits, lighting fixtures,other piping,ducts,and equipment of other trades. E. Connections to equipment shall be made with unions or flanges to permit future replacement,removal and servicing of equipment. Flexible connections where required to isolate movement of equipment from piping system or of piping system from equipment, shall be as specified. F. Before any part of the various piping systems is placed in operation, blow out piping with compressed air and/or water to remove all chips and scale and flush and drain until all traces of dirt, scale and other foreign matter have disappeared. Refer to other sections for additional requirements. G. Vent all high points and drain all low points throughout the system. H. Connections and tie-ins to existing piping systems shall be coordinated with the Owner. The HVAC Contractor is responsible for draining, flushing, re-filling (adding glycol if required) and air removal of the existing system. System shall be fully restored and operational. 3.4 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS A. All piping installed on the project, unless specifically shown otherwise, shall be hydraulically tested as specified herein. The HVAC Contractor shall provide all equipment required to make the tests specified herein. Piping may be tested a section at a time in order to facilitate the construction. B. The HVAC Contractor shall fill the section of pipe to be tested with water and bring the section up to pressure with a test pump. These tests shall be conducted before any insulation is installed and any insulation installed prior to these tests shall be removed. HVAC(CW) 15600-45 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts J. Service and Guarantee: 1. The complete installation, including all equipment, shall be guaranteed free from defects in workmanship and material for a period of 12 months from date of acceptance in writing by the Owner. Provide at no cost to the Owner, all necessary service,adjusting,and checking during the 12 month guarantee period. 2. During warranty period,the ATC Contractor shall update and implement all latest revisions of software offered by the Contractor that applies to this Project. PART 3-INSTALLATION 3.1 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM A. No air handling units shall be run for temporary heating, ventilating, testing, or otherwise without filters in place and permission from the Owner. B. Upon completion of construction and before testing, the interior of all air handling units and plenums shall be vacuum cleaned to remove all construction dirt, dust, etc. before the units are turned on,and clean filters shall be installed. 3.2 CUTTING,PATCHING AND DRILLING A. Drilling of all holes 2" diameter and smaller required for the installation of heating and ventilating piping and equipment shall be performed by the HVAC Contractor. Cutting and patching shall be performed by the General Contractor in accordance with the General Conditions. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Location for chases, openings, etc. shall be checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other Divisions shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor, who shall make the corrections as his own expense. B. Work shall include furnishing and locating inserts required before the floors and walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves and inserts were not installed,or where incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment shall be performed by the General Contractor. C. As the work nears completion, all pipe cutting and threading, etc. shall be done in a location approved by the Engineer. D. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain as finished or be painted later. Should use of such an area be necessary, the HVAC Contractor shall cover the working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. .. HVAC(CW) 15600-44 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts air shall be displayed set and adjusted at console. Room temperature sensors shall automatically reset discharge temperature to control the coil valve through micro- processor controller to satisfy occupied cycle summer mode setpoints. I. Adjustment and Calibration: 1. On completion of the job,the ATC Contractor shall completely calibrate,test, and adjust, ready for use, all electronic controls, thermostats, valves, damper motors, and relays provided under his contract and be present for functional tests on systems. The Building Management System shall be completely checked, test run,and adjusted. 2. Before the Engineer is asked to witness the functional tests, the entire control and management system must be complete, controls calibrated. The controlled devices will be physically inspected and checked to assure that these terminal devices are, in fact, under proper control and working smoothly over their entire range of operation. 3. The adjustment procedure shall include the following steps: a. Preliminary set up and calibration per Specifications and Shop Drawings. b. Physical checkout of all components for completeness and accuracy, simultaneously with mechanical system balancing. C. Review of system with Engineer. CL Functional test for Owner's benefit,instruction,and acceptance. e. Not less than 30 or more than 60 days after systems have been in full operation, review problems with Owner, recheck all adjustments, and recalibrate as required. 4. The Control Manufacturer shall provide a complete instructional manual covering the function and operation of all control and management system components on the job, which shall include a trouble-shooting and operating procedure. This manual shall be furnished to the Owner's operating personnel and shall show the total integrated control system. Competent technicians shall be provided for instruction purposes. The Control Manufacturer shall furnish schematic systems control diagrams to be delivered to the Owner on AutoCAD disks. 5. Control and management systems shall neither be considered complete nor acceptable until all conditions of the Sequence of Operation have been attained, all temperatures are maintained within specified limits of all operating conditions, and all systems damper leakage of controlled within specified limits. HVAC(CW) 15600-43 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts demanded for heating drops, the coil valve shall be modulated closed to finally a closed position. When space demands for ventilation increases, the outdoor and exhaust dampers shall be modulated open past the minimum percentage and the return damper shall close correspondingly. The low temperature sensor shall open the face damper full to the coil and close the outside air damper if it senses a temperature below its set point. A duct type smoke detector (furnished by the Electrical Subcontractor) located downstream of the unit filters shall shut down the unit fans on sensing smoke. System AHU-1, through its microprocessor, shall energize the roof mounted condensing unit (CU-1)to provide Dx cooling when chilled water is not available. A duct mounted hot water reheat coil shall be used for the dehumidification cycle. The heating coil valve shall modulate to the discharge air setpoint. C. Unoccupied Cycle: The AHU-2 system shall remain off, except that space sensor shall cycle unit fans with outside air damper closed, and shall cycle zone hot water pump to maintain reduced temperature. AHU-1 and its respective fan shall run continuously as described in the occupied cycle. d. For systems AHU-1 and AHU-2, a space humidity sensor set between 35% and 50% relative humidity shall energize ventilation cycle of outdoor damper and exhaust fan to introduce 100% outdoor air and exhaust high humidity air. Increased space heating load as sensed by space temperature sensor shall automatically reset zone discharge temperature through microprocessor controller to open heating coil valve, and open steam valve on steam injection humidifier. Space humidity requirements shall be maintained as described above. Injection humidifiers shall be interlocked with an airflow-proving switch and high limit discharge sensor. e. Occupied Cycle(Summer Mode) Fans shall run continuously with outdoor air and exhaust air dampers open to minimum position. Percentage of outdoor HVAC(CW) 15600-42 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts (1) Room sensor through microprocessor controller shall modulate the coil valve in a reverse acting fashion to add chilled water on a rise in space demand. Fan shall be under control of three speed manual switch furnished on the fan coil unit. d. Summer Unoccupied Cycle: (1) Room sensor through microprocessor controller shall modulate the coil valve in a reverse acting fashion, however, no chiller water will be available. Fan shall be de-activated. Should room temperature exceed 80 degrees. The coil valve shall open in the fan run. 3. Radiators and Unit Heaters a. Each radiator and unit heater shall be subject to a 2-way electric activated control valve. On a call for heat the control valve shall open and when temperature set point is satisfied the valve shall close. 4. Air Handling Units: The systems shall be indexed between occupied, warm-up, and unoccupied cycles of operation by Energy Management System. a.Warm-up Cycle: The unit supply fan shall be started from the time clock and shall run continuously. Units AHU-1, 2 and 3 and AHU-4 and 5 (Dinind Room )shall run continuously. The return air fans shall remain off during the warm-up cycle with the return air exhaust damper closed. The outside air damper shall remain closed,the coil face and bypass dampers shall operate in "occupied" mode, and the exhaust fan shall remain off. The unit shall remain in the warm-up cycle until the return air temperature reaches 68T at which time it shall revert to the occupied cycle. b. Occupied Cycle(Winter Mode): Supply and return fans shall run continuously with outdoor air and exhaust air dampers open to minimum position. Room sensor shall automatically reset discharge setpoint to control heating coil valve through microprocessor controller. Where face and bypass dampers are called for, the integrated controls shall be as follows: above 40 degrees F., the face and bypass dampers are wide open and the valve shall modulate; below 40 degrees F., the valve shall be wide open and the face and bypass dampers shall modulate. Note: Apply PID control to these sequences to provide closer control when spaces go through rapid occupancy changes. As space is HVAC(CW) 15600-41 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts House(one spare) and pumps P-3 and P-4 for Wesley House(one spare). C. The steam to water heat exchanger shall be controlled as follows: (1) (IX-1 )Sensors located in the water supply and water return shall have its set point automatically and inversely reset from outdoor temperature by modulating each steam control valve to maintain the following schedule: Hot Water 0 degrees= 160 degrees HCS 65 degrees= 90 degrees HCS d. Occupied Pump Control: The temperature control system shall control pumps in the following manner. (1) In the occupied mode, only one (1) pump shall run unless the energy management system decides both pumps are necessary in order to maintain temperature. A variable frequency drive unit shall control pump in response to load. e. Unoccupied Pump Control: (1) The hot water and hot water/chilled water pumps shall remain off (both pumps) when outside temperature is above 58 degrees. When outside temperature falls below 58 degrees,one pump shall cycle on/off subject to the night sensor. When outside temperature falls below 40 degrees, one pump shall run continuously and the second pump shall cycle subject to the night sensor. In the cooling mode, one pump shall cycle on/off to maintain higher setting. 2. Cabinet Heaters: a. Winter Occupied Cycle: (1) Room sensor through microprocessor controller shall modulate the coil valve in a direct acting fashion to maintain heating requirement for room. Fan shall be under control of three speed manual switch famished on the fan coil unit. b. Winter Unoccupied Cycle: (1) Room sensor through microprocessor controller shall modulate the coil valve in a direct acting fashion to maintain lowered set point of room. Fan shall be de-energized. C. Summer Occupied Cycle: HVAC(CW) 15600-40 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts following system information: General area maps shall show locations of controlled buildings in relation to local landmarks. Floor plan maps shall show heating and cooling zones throughout the buildings in a range of colors which provide a visual display of temperature relative to their respective setpoints. The colors shall be updated dynamically as zones' comfort condition change. Locations of space sensors shall also be shown for each zone. Setpoint adjustment and color band displays shall be provided. Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical system components serving any zone through the use of a pictorial representation of components. It shall also provide a current status of all I/O points being controlled and applicable to each piece of equipment including analog readouts in appropriate engineering units at appropriate locations on the graphic representation. 2. Each category of software shall consist of interactive software modules. Each module shall have an associated priority level and shall execute as determined by the program controller as defined in the real time operating system. 3. The central site shall allow receipt of alarms and messages while in a functional mode other than energy management, i.e, incoming alarms shall be displayed while the operator is in a word processing, spreadsheet, or other operating mode. The system must automatically switch from a non-energy management mode, respond to an alarm, and return to the exact position left in the previous functional mode. 4. The building operator shall be able to communicate and direct all control functions through the use of a 2-button"mouse" operator interface to monitor and control all functions and sequences within the system. H.' Sequences of Operation: Following are the typical sequences of operation for HVAC equipment provided by Automated Logic's System 20/20. Within each section, each paragraph describes a specific control sequence for a component of the equipment start/stop, status, etc. Each specific control sequence will require appropriate I/O points, which are scheduled on the Drawings. 1. Pump Control a. Each building, Comstock and Wilder shall be served by two base mounted pumped distribution and for heating only. b. Heat distribution shall be supplied by pumps P-1 and P-2 for Comstock HVAC(CW) 15600-39 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts greater, at 60 Hz. The contact operating life shall be 10 million operations or greater. The ambient temperature range of SSRs shall be 20°F-140°F. Input impedance shall be greater than 500 ohms. Relays shall be rated for the application. Operating and release time shall be 10 milliseconds or less. Transient suppression shall be provided as an integral part of the relays. j. Freezestat shall be capillary type equal to Johnson Control, Model A70HA-1C. k. Control valves shall be DDC modulating type. All two-way valves shall be Spartan two position valves. All three-way valves shall be Barber Colman with Belimo Actuators,Model AF24-S. 1. All control dampers shall be opposed blade type with edge and jam seals and internal linkage. Damper operators shall be provided for all dampers equal to Belimo AF24-S with AV10-18 or 2G-JSA shaft extensions where required. 5. Local Site Communication Network a. The modules shall communicate within their respective network with a token passing technique. This network shall be consistent with the IEEE RS-485 standard, including a minimum baud rate of 9,600 BPS maintained at a minimum of 10,000 feet. The Contractor shall provide all wiring required for the local site network. F. Software 1. The Contractor shall provide all software required for efficient operation of all the functions required by this specification. Software shall be modular in design for flexibility in expansion or revision of the system. The software shall, as a minimum,include: a. Complete database entry b. Configuration of all application programs to provide the sequence of operation indicated C. Graphics of each system as shown on the UO Summary Tables d. Alarm limits and alarm messages for all critical and non-critical alarms e. Configuration of all reports and point summaries indicated G. Systems Software 1. The central site shall display graphically, in up to 256 different colors, the HVAC(CW) 15600-38 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 1) Differential Pressure and Pressure Sensors. Sensors shall have a 4-20 MA output proportional signal with provisions for field checking. Sensors shall withstand up to 150% of rated pressure, without damaging the device. Accuracy shall be within +2% of full scale. Sensors shall be manufactured by MANIAC No. PR- 272-2-XX-B-1-2-2. 2) Pressure Switches. Pressure switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of+ 2% of range and withstand up to 150% of rated pressure. Sensors shall be diaphragm or bourdon tube design. Switch operation shall be adjustable over the operating pressure range. The switch shall have an application rated Form C, snap- acting, self-wiping contact of platinum alloy, silver alloy, or gold plating. Switches shall be manufactured by Johnson Controls, Model P-74FA-5-C. C. Flow Switches: Flow switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of+ 1% of their operating range. Switch actuation shall be adjustable over the operating flow range. Switches shall have snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the specific electrical application. d. Watt-hour Transducers: Watt-hour transducers shall have an accuracy of +0.25% for kW and kWh outputs from full lag to full lead power factor. Input ranges for kW and kWh transducers shall be selectable without requiring the changing of current or potential transformers,and shall have dry contact pulse accumulation. e. Voltage-to-Digital Alarm Relays: Relays shall monitor status of boiler or chiller safeties and overloads and shall be sized and connected so as not to impede the function of the monitored contacts. Switch shall have self- wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application, equal to Veris Industries,Inc.Hawkeye 735. f. Humidity Sensors: Sensors shall have an accuracy of+5% over a range of 20%to 95%RH,Visala Mod.HMW-40U. g. Current Sensing Relays: Relays shall monitor status of motor loads. Switch shall have self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application. The setpoint of the contact operation shall be field adjustable. h. Control Relays: Control relay contacts shall be rated for 150% of the loading application, with self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts, enclosed in dustproof enclosure. Relays shall have silver cadmium contacts with a minimum life span rating of one million operations. Relays shall be equipped with coil transient suppression devices. i. Solid State Relays (SSR): Input/output isolation shall be greater than 10 billion ohms with a breakdown voltage of 15 V root mean square, or HVAC(CW) 15600-37 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts Independent VAV operation. h. Each T-Line and TNI shall have LED indication for visual status of communication,power,and all outputs. i. Each TNI shall be software programmable for communicating at 9600 baud to 38.4 Kbps. Circuits shall be optically isolated. 3. Terminal Control Devices-T-Line a. Digital outputs: These outputs shall be 24VAC or VDC maximum, 3 amp maximum current. Each configurable as normally open or normally closed,and either dry contact or bussed. b. Universal inputs: Thermistor, dry contacts or 0-5VDC with 0-100K Ohm input impedance. C. Enhanced Zone Sensor Input: The input shall provide one thermistor input, one local setpoint adjustment, one timed local override switch and an occupancy LED indicator. 4. Instrumentation and Control a. Temperature Sensors: Sensors shall be of the type and have accuracy ratings as indicated and/or required for the application and shall permit accuracy rating of within 1% of the temperature range of their intended use. 1) Sensors used for mixed air application shall be the averaging type and have an accuracy of+1'F. Kele Precon Model ST-FZ. 2) OA temperature sensors shall have a minimum range of-52°F to 152°F and an accuracy of within+1°F in this temperature range. Kele Precon Model ST-O. 3) Room temperature sensors shall have an accuracy, of+ 0.25°F in the range of 45°F to 96°F, ALC Model BA-10K-2-RSO-RLC Type 3 with network connector, warm/cool adjustment, override switch and LED Occupied/Unoccupied indicator. 4) Chilled water sensors shall have an accuracy of+0.25°F in their range of application. 5) Hot water temperature sensors shall have an accuracy of+0.75°F over the range of their application. b. Pressure Instruments HVAC(CW) 15600-36 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts f Each Cmnet shall support up to 100 controllers. g. Multiple LANgates can be added to the Lgnet if the projects require more than 100 controllers. h. Up to a total of 60 LANgates can be added to the Lgnet, each supporting up to 100 controllers(total capacity exceeds 500,000 points perLgnet). i. The LANgate shall provide two RS232 ports which can be connected to Central Site Workstations,portable computers,or modems. j. LANgate shall provide full arbitration between multiple users, whether they are communicating through the same LANgate or different ones. 2. Terminal Control Modules-T-Line a. Terminal Control Modules shall be capable of providing the Direct Digital Control of single zone terminal HVAC units; air handling unit4 fan coil units,exhaust fans,unit ventilators,etc. b. Each T-Line controller shall communicate with the Cmnet through the Tnet Interface Module (TNI). The TNI shall provide one RS485 port for a Cmnet connection and one RS485 port for the Tnet connection. In addition, a direct connect RS485 port shall also be provided for connection of a laptop computer. C. In the event of a loss of communication with the TNI, each T-Line controller shall store a default algorithm which maintains the space temperature until communication with the TNI is restored. d. Each TNI shall execute application programs, calculations, and commands via a microcomputer resident in the TNI. The database and all application programs for each T-Line shall be stored in read/writable non- volatile memory within the TNI. All non-volatile memory shall have a battery backup of at least five years. e. The TNI shall contain both software and hardware to perform full DDC/PID control loops. T-Line shall be able to provide normal binary type output. f. Each T-Line shall be able to support various type of zone temperature sensors, such as: temperature sensor only, temperature sensor with built- in local override switch,with setpoint adjustment switch. g. Each T-Line for VAV application shall have a built-in air flow transducer for accurate air flow measurement in order to provide the Pressure HVAC(CW) 15600-35 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 5. Wiring of all electro-mechanical devices required to be located on or in temperature control panels. 6. All wiring to the temperature control panels shall be by the ATC subcontractor from sources provided by the Electrical Contractor specifically for that purpose. 7. All wiring shall comply with national, state, and local electrical codes. All power wiring will be installed and terminated by the Electrical Contractor. Power wiring shall be defined as follows: a. Wiring of all devices and circuits carrying voltages greater than 120 volt (except for power to the temperature control panels). b. ,Wiring of power feeds to disconnects,starters,and electric motors. C. Wiring of 120V AC power feeds to all temperature control panels where required. d. Installation of and wiring of line power to fused disconnects for each air compressor. e. Power wiring to 120V single phase motors. f. Wiring from disconnects to compressor motor starters and from compressor motor starters to compressor motor. E. Field Hardware: Field hardware must be of a modular design to ensure reliability and system performance. 1. Global Network Controller-LANgate a. The LANgate shall be a microprocessor-based communications device which acts as a gateway between the System Control Module Network (CMnet)and the Global Network(Lgnet). b. Both the Cmnet and the Lgnet shall be "peer-to-peer" networks which allow all control modules to communicate with equal authority. C. Each LANgate shall support a Cmnet on which may reside any combination of up to 100 zone controllers,rooftop unit controllers, and/or Control Modules. d. The LANgate shall be responsible for routing global information from the various Cmnets which may be installed throughout a building. e. The Lgnet may configure as RS485 (38.4 Kbps), ARCnet (2.5 Mbps), or Ethernet (10 Mbps), or Token Ring (16Mbps) all of which may be implemented over fiber optic,twisted pair,or coaxial cable. HVAC(CW) 15600-34 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 3. All Drawings shall be reviewed after the final system checkout and updated or corrected to provide "as-built" Drawings to show exact installation. The system will not be considered complete until the "as-built" Drawings have received their final approval. The Contractor shall deliver three(3) sets of"as-built" Drawings, and one(1)CADD disk of these Drawings. 4. Before final configuration, the Contractor shall provide I/O Summary forms that include: a. Description of all points. b. Listing of binary and analog hardware required to interface to the equipment for each function. C. Listing of all application programs associated with each piece of equipment. d. Failure modes for control functions to be performed in case of failure 5. Provide an accurate graphic flow diagram for each software program proposed to be used on the project as part of the submittal process. Revisions made as a result of the submittal process, during the installation, start-up or acceptance portion of the project, shall be accurately reflected in the "as-built" graphic software flow diagrams herein required by this specification. 6. The Contractor shall be able to simulate the operation of all software application programs to ensure they are free from design errors and that they accurately accomplish the application sequence of operations. The simulation must show each output value and how it varies in relation to an artificial time clock. The time clock may run at normal time increments, increased increments (fast motion) or decreased increments(slow motion). D. Wiring: All temperature control wiring will be installed and terminated by the ATC Contractor. Control wiring shall be as follows: 1. All circuits which are activated or deactivated by temperature control system components, such as, but not limited to, PE's and high and low limit protective devices. 2. All circuits which activate or deactivate temperature control system components, such as solenoid air valve. 3. All temperature control panel wiring to terminal strips and field wiring from terminal strips to field mounted devices. 4. All wiring to the "Auto" side of hand-off auto switches on units being controlled by the ATC Contractor. 15600-33 HVAC(CW) Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts b. All sensing devices and necessary transducers to perform the functions listed in UO Summary Tables. C. All relays, switches, indicating devices, and transducers required to perform the functions listed in 1/0 Summary Tables. d. All monitoring and control wiring and air tubing. e. All modems and accessories. 7. Provide all software identified in Part 3 of this Specification. The database required for implementation of these specification shall be provided by the Contractor, including: point descriptor, alarm limits, calibration variables, graphics,reports and point summaries. 8. The system as specified shall monitor, control, and calculate all of the points and perform all the function as listed in 1/0 Summary Tables attached to the end of this specification. 9. Codes and Regulations. All electrical equipment and material and its installation shall conform to the current requirements of the following authorities: a. Occupational Safety and Health Act(OSHA) b. National Electric Code(NEC) C. National Fire Code d. Uniform Building Code e. Uniform Mechanical Code f. Uniform Plumbing Code g. UL916 h. Note: Where two or more codes conflict,the most restrictive shall apply. Nothing in these plans and specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to applicable codes. C. Submittals,Documentation and Acceptance 1. Shop Drawings. A minimum of six (6) copies of Shop Drawings shall be submitted and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. Shop Drawings shall also contain complete wiring, routing, schematic diagrams, tag number of devices, software descriptions, calculations, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system will function properly. Drawings shall show proposed layout and installation of all equipment and the relationship to other parts of the work. 2. Shop Drawings shall be approved by the Engineer and the College before any equipment is installed. Therefore, Shop Drawings must be submitted in time for review so that all installations can be completed per the project's completion schedule. HVAC(CW) 15600-32 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 4. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated Logic, i.e. Yankee Technology, Inc., of Ludlow, MA. The system shall be a properly integrated system installed by competent mechanics regularly employed in the profession of temperature control. Unless specified to the contrary, all equipment shall be fully proportioning. The control system shall be complete in all respects, including room thermostats, immersion thermostats, switches, relays, valves, cabinets and other accessory equipment, and a complete system of control wiring for integration into existing remaining reused controls where specified, all connected and properly integrated to the control system. 5. The temperature control system shall be DDC and shall utilize electric/electronic power for the control dampers and valves. The control systems Lans connection shall be extended from the existing system. 6. All wiring, conduit, junction boxes, fittings, etc., necessary for the temperature control system shall be furnished and installed by the ATC Contractor and shall conform to all standards and codes as described under Section 16000 - Electrical Work. Wiring shall be in metal raceways where required by prevailing codes. 7. Provide nameplates for all control devices. Devices on panels to have 'Lamicoid" nameplates,isolated control valves,relays,etc.to be marked with stamped tape. B. Scope of Work 1. All temperature control work shall be performed by Yankee Technology, Inc. of Ludlow, MA. It is the responsibility of this Contractor to co-ordinate all HVAC work with the Temperature Control Contractor prior to submitting a bid. 2. The Contractor shall famish and install all necessary hardware,wiring,pneumatic tubing,computing equipment and software as defined in this specification. 3. All material and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured and available and not custom designed especially for this project. All systems and components, except site specific software, shall have previously been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use prior to installation on this project. 4. The system architecture shall be fully modular permitting expansion of application software,system peripherals,and field hardware. 5. The system, upon completion of the installation and prior to acceptance of the project, shall perform all operating functions as detailed in this Specification. 6. Provide the following system hardware: a. Central Site(s)and Control Modules HVAC(CW) 15600-31 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts casing for proper drainage the coil shall be tested at 250 psig air pressure under water. Coils shall be of the steam distributing, "non-freeze" type. F. All units furnished with DX coils shall have drain pans pitched for even flow of condensate with side drain connections on both sides of unit. Provide copper tube "P" trap with cleanout in condensate drain piping, "P" traps shall be equal to unit pressure. G. Provide, where noted on schedules, internal face and bypass dampers with full size coils. H. High capacity mixing section shall be furnished with properly located access doors equipped with handles. Internal slides shall be provided for filter racks. Filters shall be removable from either end of Section. I. Bag filter and pre-filter sections shall be provided with all units. Each unit shall be furnished with three(3) sets of pre and final filters. 2.25 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish and install access panels at all valves, volume dampers, tee. installed above plastered ceilings,in walls,and all other non-accessible spaces. Access panels in plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL(12"x 12"); access panels in walls shall be Karp type DSC-211 "Universal"(12"x 12"). 2.26 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL A. General Requirements 1. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated Logic. 2. The controls shall be a direct expansion of the Campus' existing energy management system as manufactured by automated Logic System 20/20,and shall be extended from the existing communication lines located in The Physical Plant. It is mandatory that the installed system be properly interfaced with the existing central site (CS) computer hardware ALC 20/20 configuration and the existing master central site software library, located at the HVAC Department Building. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to develop site specific operating parameters, building name, general area maps, floor plans, mechanical system graphics,thermal graphs, all to be displayed graphically at the central site(CS)via the existing software programs. 3. All components of the direct digital controllers shall be manufactured by Automated Logic, or equal, with peripheral electric/electronic devices manufactured by Barber Colman. HVAC (CW) 15600-30 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts B. Strainers for steam and condensate systems over 50 psig.shall be 250 lb. class. Strainers for other systems shall be 125 lb. class. Strainers shall be Illinois, Barnes and Jones, Armstrong, or equal, and shall be so installed as to permit ready removal of basket. Each strainer 2-1/2" and larger shall be provided with hose end globe valve on blow-off. 2.24 AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU) A. Furnish and install, where shown on the Drawings, central station draw-through units of the types, sizes, and capacities as scheduled on the Drawings. All units shall be factory-assembled and tested and shall be as manufactured by the Trane Company,York International or McQuay. No substitutions will be allowed. B. Units shall consist of modular fan and coil sections, filter section, internal face and bypass sections where called for, adjustable motor bases for high efficiency, totally enclosed NEMA frame motors, and OSHA approved belt guards. Casing shall be of complete frame with removable panels, modular, flush mounted into the unit framework with properly located access panels. Casing shall be double wall insulated with a 1 in. minimum thickness fiberglass insulation with a density of not less than 1-1/2 lbs. accordance with NFPA Bulletin No. 90A. Insulation shall be secured to casing with waterproof adhesive and permanent fasteners. All cabinet surfaces shall be galvanized. ►, C. Fans shall be centrifugal type, double inlet, double width. They shall be of the forward curved, low speed type on all sizes. Fan housing shall be equipped with adjustable cut-off. All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and tested at rated speed after being installed in factory assembled units. Bearings shall be self-aligning, grease lubricated ball bearings sized to provide minimum average bearing life of 200,000 hours. Lubrication fittings shall be extended to the exterior cabinet. Fan shafts shall be solid, cold finish steel, turned, grout ground, and polished to insure trouble-free operation and tolerances within the recom- mendations of bearing manufacturers. Fan motors shall be mounted to an adjustable pivot base in optional position external to the unit. Fan V-belt drive shall be of the variable pitch type. Fan belt guard shall be furnished by the unit manufacturer, easily removable, and made of solid steel with tachometer openings. Inlet vanes shall be furnished where so called for on the schedule. D. Coil sections shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel with removable panels and shall be arranged for the removal of the coil from either end of the unit. Combina- tion hot water/chiller coils shall consist of 5/8 in. o.d. copper tubing on 1-1/2 centers arranged in a staggered pattern with respect to circulation of airflow. They shall be bonded to the tubes by hydraulic expansion of tubes and the coils tested with 300-lbs. pneumatic pressure under water. E. The heating coil shall be of the continuous aluminum plate fin and copper tubes type, assembled in a zinc coated steel frame. The coil shall be pitched in the unit HVAC(CW) 15600-29 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 19. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials. 20. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B 16.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised- face for steel flanges,unless otherwise indicated. 21. Note: Grooved piping will NOT be allowed. 2.22 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Provide packless expansion joints where indicated for piping systems, with materials and pressure/temperature ratings selected by Installer to suit intended service. Select packless expansion joints to provide 200%absorption capacity of piping expansion between anchors. B. Expansion Compensators: Pressure rated for 60 psi for low pressure systems, 2-ply phosphor bronze bellows, brass shrouds and end fittings for copper piping systems, or 2- ply stainless steel bellows, carbon steel shrouds and end fittings for steel piping systems. Provide internal guides and anti-torque devices, and removable end clip for proper positioning. C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide expansion canpensators of one of the following: Flexonics Div.; UOP,Inc. Hyspan Precision Products,Inc. Keflex,Inc. Metraflex Co. Vibration Mountings and Controls,Inc. D. Provide pipe alignment guides on both sides of expansion joints, and elsewhere as indicated. Construct with 4-finger spider traveling inside guiding sleeve, with provision for anchoring to building substrate. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe alignment guides of the following: Hyspan Precision Products,Inc. Metraflex Co. 2.23 STRAINERS A. Pipeline strainers shall be full size,iron body, "Y"pattern and shall be installed on the inlet side of each steam trap, and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings. Strainers 2" and smaller shall have screwed ends; 2-1/2"and larger shall have flanged ends. HVAC(CW) 15600-28 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 3. Yoloy Steel Pipe: ASTM A714;Class 4; Grade IV. 4. Steel Flanges/Fittings ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing of the following material group, end connection and facing except as otherwise indicated,Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping,Class 300 for Schedule 80. a. Material Group: Group 1.1 b. End Connections: Buttwelding co Facings: Raised-face 5. Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings ANSI B 16.9, except ANSI B 16.28 for short- radius elbows and returns;rated to match connected pipe. 6. Yoloy Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ASTM A714. 7. Forged Branch Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide type as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements, Bonney "Weldolets" or'Threadolets",or equal. 8. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1-1/2"and where pipe size is less than 1-1/2",and do not thread nipples full length (no close-nipples). 9. Copper Tube: ASTM B88;Type as indicated for each service;hard-drawn temper for water piping; soft temper for oil piping. 10. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B306. 11. ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B280. 12. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings ANSI B 16.22. 13. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings ANSI B 16.23. 14. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings ANSI B 16.29. 15. Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B43. 16. Cast-Bronze Threaded Fittings: ANSI B 16.15. 17. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.. Comply with Section H,Part C,ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials. 18. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated,provide soldering materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. HVAC(CW) 15600-27 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts a. Runouts up to 2 in.: 1-1/2 in. b. Runouts 1 in.and less: 1-1/2 in. C. Runouts 1-1/4 in.to 2 in.: 2 in. d. Runouts 2-1/2 in.to 4 in.: 2 in. 2.21 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. General 1. Reference is made to specifications of recognized authorities to establish quality. Latest editions of their publications at time of bidding shall be in force. 2. All piping shall have manufacturer's name or trademark rolled into each and every length of pipe. 3. All threads for screwed joints shall be National Taper Pipe Thread conforming to ANSI B2.1-1968. 4. Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME B31.1, or ASME B31.9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping work. -■*a, B. Application 1. Hot and Dual Temperature Water Supply and Return and Steam Supply and Condensate Return: Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, size 2" and smaller threaded, 2-1/2"and larger welded,or Type"L"copper for hot and dual temperature water. 2. Boiler Trim: Brass Pipe, Schedule 40,threaded,cast bronze fittings. 3. Refrigerant: Type ACR copper, wrought copper fittings, AWS class BAgl silver solder. 4. Condensate Drain(from cooling coils): Type M or DWV copper tube with cast or wrought drainage fittings in lieu of copper PVC drains may be used in fan room equipment and connection to existing lines. C. Materials 1. Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A53,A106 or A120; except comply with ASTM A53 or A106 where close coiling or bending is required. 2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings. ANSI B 16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated. Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping,Class 300 for Schedule 80. HVAC(CW) 15600-26 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts F. Pipe Insulation 1. All insulation including covering shall be fire resistant and fire retardant and shall have a flame spread rating not exceeding 25, smoke developed rating not exceeding 50,all complying with NFPA 225 and/or U.L.723. Adhesives used for applying and sealing jackets shall also conform to these same fire retardant and smoke ratings. 2. On exposed insulation, all longitudinal seams shall be kept at the top of the pipe and circumferential joints shall be kept to a minimum. Raw ends of insulation shall be concealed by neatly folding in the ends of the jackets. Fittings, valve bodies, and flanges shall be furnished with the same jacket materials used on adjoining insulation. 3. Covering shall not be applied until all parts of the work have been tested by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. 4. A vapor barrier shall be installed on all new hot water/chilled water piping. It shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to maintain the integrity of the vapor barrier. 5. Attention is called for to the fact that on all hot water/chilled water, refrigerant, and condensate drain piping, oversized pipe hangers shall be furnished and pipe insulation shall be applied continuous along the pipe passing inside the hanger. 6. Pipe insulation shall be closed cell Armaflex insulation as manufactured by Gustin-Bacon,Manville,or other approved equal. 7. All hot water, chilled water, condensate drains, refrigerant piping, and make up water piping shall be insulated with Armaflex, closed cell pipe insulation, or approved equal. The insulation shall have an average thermal conductivity not to exceed.25 BTU in.per sq. ft.per F.per hour at a mean temperature of 75 degrees F. Thickness of the insulation shall be as scheduled below. The insulation shall be applied over clean dry pipe with all joints firmly together. Longitudinal jacket laps and the butt strips shall be smoothly secured with Benjamin Foster 85-20 adhesive. Note: All refrigerant piping run outdoors shall be covered with an aluminum jacket and secured with stainless steel bands. 8. Insulation of all steam and condensate piping shall be fiberglass with jacketed cover,thickness to be as listed below. G. Insulation thickness shall be as follows: Minimum Pipe Insulation Required: 1. Hot Water/Steam Condensate Return: HVAC(CW) 15600-25 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, Fee & Mason,or equal. B. For all pipe 2-1/2" and larger-Grinnell Figure No.20,at 10'intervals. C. For all other suspended piping-Grinnell Figure 70 at 6'intervals for tubing 1-1/4" or less, 10'intervals for piping at 1-1/2"and larger. D. All hangers directly in contact with non-ferrous pipe or tubing shall be copper plated or plastic coated. E. Hangers or supports shall be placed within F of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of pipe not over 5' in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 12" from the elbow on the connecting horizontal run. F. Install Figure 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation on all Aping; hangers to be installed outside pipe insulation. G. Vertical risers shall be supported with Grinnell Figure CT-121C plastic coated riser clamp to be installed immediately below a coupling. 2.20 INSULATION A. All air supply,return, and fresh air ducts shall be insulated. Insulation for concealed ducts shall be 1-1/2 in. thick, 1-pound density glass fiber (flexible) duct insulation with factory applied reinforced aluminum foil jacket equal to Manville Type FSK. Secure to duct with Benjamin Foster No. 85-20 adhesive. Lap jacket 2 in. at all seams and secure flaps with staples and adhesive to provide complete vapor barrier. In addition, this concealed duct insulation shall be tied 18 in. o.c. with 18 gauge aluminum or copper wire where ducts exceed 24 in. in width. B. All concealed air ducts from the fresh air intakes to the air handling units shall be insulated in the same manner as for the ductwork for concealed supply ducts. C. All exposed fi-esh air ducts from the fresh air intakes to flee air handling units and all exposed supply and return air ducts, or where so noted, shall be insulated with 1 in. thick, 6 pound density, rigid glass fiberboard with Manville Type EAF vaporseal facing. Attach board to ducts with double prong stick clips. Seal at joints to maintain vapor barrier. All edges and angles shall be reinforced with corner beads. Finish shall consist of tackboard of Benjamin Foster No. 30-36 Sealfas, embedded Manville Duramesh 205, and a heavy finish coat of Benjamin Foster No. 30-35 Sealfas, all applied according to manufacturer's recommendations. D. Acoustical Insulation: Duct lining acoustical insulation shallbe shop installed by the Sheet Metal Contractor. Liner shall be 1-in. thick, 3-pound density, non-combustible glass fiber with U.L. approved neoprene coating on air side. Acoustical lining shall be installed where shown on Drawings. All lined ductwork shall be insulated as listed above unless otherwise noted. HVAC(CW) 15600-24 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts B. Air removal fitting shall be in-line type, welded steel, with internal circuiting causing entrained air to be separated from the water. To be Spiro Vent "Air Separator", line size, with drain valve and strainer. No substitutions will be allowed. C. Air Vents: Air vents shall be provided where shown and at all other high points, where shown or not. Vents shall be of the manual type and shall be full line size,butte no case shall they be less than 2 in, steel pipe. Chambers shall be a minimum of 12 in.high. Drain tubing shall be extended in such a manner that the globe valve and end of drain line are readily accessible. Air vents for radiation shall be installed in the return side of each loop of radiation before piping drops down to return main. These vents to be key or screw type equal to Dole or Taco. D. Automatic Make-Up Water Valve: Provide with three valve bypass for water system shall be Bell&Gossett, Cash,Taco, or Watts equal to Bell& Gossett No. B-3 Reducing Valve set for approximately 60 psig inlet and 21 psig outlet, field adjustable. Install backflow preventer piped to drain in inlet to automatic valve. Bypass to be 1 in. size with globe valve and one check valve in series. Strainers shall be as specified in other paragraphs of this Section of the Specifications. E. Furnish and install all temperature-pressure relief valves for all hot water heater systems. All to be ASME rated and similar to that manufactured by WATTS. 2.16 STEAM TO WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS A. Furnish and install where shown on the Drawings, steam to water, shell and tube U-bend removable tube bundle, steam in shell,water in tube exchangers. The heat exchanger shall include a cast iron bonnet,copper tubes,steel shell and baffles and be ASME stamped. B. HX-1 Comstock/Wilder House-Shall be capable of heating C. Heat exchanger shall be as manufactured by ITT Bell&Gossett or approved equal. 2.18 STEAM TRAPS A. Furnish and install float and thermostatic steam traps where indicated on the Drawings. B. The trap shall be of the mechanical lever ball float type having a ductile iron body with horizontal inline screwed connections and shall incorporate a balanced pressure thermostatic air vent. Valve mechanism shall be stainless steel and attached to a removable cover for easy maintenance. The cover shall be 180 degrees reversible to permit flow in either direction. C. Steam traps shall be as manufactured by Tunstall Associates. No substitutions will be allowed. 2.19 HANGERS HVAC(CW) 15600-23 III IN 'I Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts A cast iron inlet strainer with vertical self-cleaning bronze screen and large dirt pocket shall be mounted on the receiver. The screen shall be easily removable for cleaning, requiring no additional floor space for servicing. L. The centrifugal water pumps shall be flange mounted on the receiver. Pumps shall be close coupled vertical design, permanently aligned, bronze fitted and be equipped with stainless steel shaft, enclosed bronze impeller, and renewable bronze case ring. Carbon/ceramic mechanical seals shall be rated for 25(PF for maximum life. Each pump shall be close coupled to a vertical drip proof motor. Pump capacities, motor HP and RPM,electrical characteristics,and receiver shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. C. The unit manufacturer shall furnish, mount on the unit, and wire a NEMA 2 control cabinet with drip lip and piano hinged door enclosing the following: • (2) Combination magnetic starters (each having 3 overload relays) with fused disconnect and cover interlock for each motor. • (1)Electrical alternator. • (2)"Auto-Off Hand" selector switches. • (1)Numbered terminal strip. • (1) Fused control circuit transformer for each motor when the motor voltage exceeds 230 volts. All control cabinet components shall be UL listed or recognized and NEMA rated. The control panel assembly shall be listed by Underwriters'Laboratories,Inc. Each pump control circuit shall be completely independent of the other. The electrical alternator shall change the operating sequence automatically after each cycle. Simultaneous operation under peak load conditions, and operating of the second pump, should the first pump or its control fail, shall be provided by the lag float switch. D. All factory installed wiring shall be numbered for easy identification and the numbers shall coincide with those shown on the wiring diagrams. All interconnecting wiring between the pump,control panel shall be enclosed in liquid tight flexible conduit. The unit shall be factory tested as a complete unit. The pump manufacture shall furnish complete elementary and connection wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, installation and operation instructions. Unit shall be Domestic Series CC as manufactured by Bell&Gossett or approved equal. 2.15 HOT WATER SPECIALTIES AND VALVES A. Expansion tanks shall be ASME pre-charged diaphragm tanks, stamped 125 psi working pressure. Tanks shall be supplied with a heavy-duty butyl diaphragm, ring base, lifting rings, and an NPT system connection. An air charging.valve connection shall be provided to facilitate adjusting pre-charged pressure to meet system conditions. HVAC(CW) 15600-22 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts A. Gauges shall be Ashcroft, Marsh, U.S. Gauge Company or Trerice equal to Ashcroft "Quality" line gauges, Grade A, 1% accuracy. Each gauge shall be installed with a pulsation damper (Ashcroft #1106B) and a brass lever handle gauge cock (Ashcroft #1095). B. Model number, size and range to be as follows: 1. Ashcroft-#1018, 3-1/2" dial,red tipped pointer with scale range such that normal operating pressure is approximately at mid-scale. 2.12 UNIONS A. Unions shall be of the same class and material as the pipe and fittings of the system in which they are installed. In black steel piping systems, they shall be 200 lb. black malleable iron with brass ground joint equal to Dart Figures 0832, 0834, 0835, 0836 or 0838. In copper and brass piping,they shall be 125 lb.bronze or brass with ground joint. B. Flanged unions for welded pipe shall be weld neck, 150 lb. raised face. Flanged joints shall be packed with impregnated asbestos gaskets placed inside the bolt circle with graphite applied to both faces. C. Dielectric unions shall be provided between ferrous and non-ferrous piping to prevent galvanic corrosion. The dielectric unions shall meet the requirements for tensile strength of pipe fittings in accordance with Federal Specification WW-U-531 and shall be suitable for temperatures and pressures encountered. The ends shall be threaded, flanged, brazed, or soldered to match adjacent piping. The metal parts of the union shall be separated so that the electrical current is below 1 percent of the galvanic current,which would exist with metal to metal contact. 2.13 PIPE SLEEVES A. Standard IPS steel or wrought iron sleeves shall be provided wherever exposed pipes pass through masonry walls or partitions. Pipe sleeves are to be two pipe sizes larger than line size. Insulated piping sleeves shall be sized to allow insulation to pass through the sleeve without gouging. 2.14 DUPLEX CONDENSATE PUMPS A. Furnish and install according to plans and manufacture's instructions a duplex condensate units as shown on the Drawings. The unit shall consist of(1) cast iron receiver, (2) water pumps,(2)float switches and all accessories as hereafter specified. The condensate receiver shall be of close grained cast iron construction and shall be equipped with (2) externally adjustable 2-pole float switches, water level gauge, dial thermometer, (2) pressure gauges for pump discharge, (2) bronze fitted isolation valves between pumps and recover,and(2)lifting eye bolts. HVAC(CW) 15600-21 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts Stockham Figure G-93 T. 4. Ball Valves: Watts Series 600-SS-SH. E. All shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and larger shall be Watts Series G-4000, cast ironbody, 316, steel disc and shaft,Nordel EPT seat,designed for bubbletight shutoff. Valves to be fitted with lever operator for two position operation. F. Gate and/or globe valves shall not be used as substitutes for the following valves when used as balance valves. G. Balance and/or shut-off valves 4 in. and larger-Tour&Anderson Series STAF,neoprene seat, semi-steel body, with stainless steel or bronze top and bottom bushings, 150 psig working pressure, 125 pound ANSI flanges,Figure 101F or 118F, G6-H12. Provide open position stop on all valves. Provide hand operators for all valves which are 6 ft. or more above the floor. H. Balance and/or shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and 3 in. sizes - Tour & Anderson Series STAF, lever operated,faced plug,neoprene seat,semi-steel body with stainless steel or bronze top and bottom bushings, 150 psig working pressure,Figure 118. Provide open position stops for all valves. 1. For 2 in. and smaller-Balancing valves shall be Tour&Anderson Figure STAD or STA- D, semi-steel body, bronze plug with neoprene or Teflon resilient face, bronze top and bottom bushings, complete with lever. Provide open position stop and plastic cap on all valves, which are labeled "Balance Valves" on the Drawings. All valves at fan coil unit shall be furnished with drain kit. J. Pump discharge check valves shall be Muessco,Williams&Hager,or Smolensky equal to Muessco 105-DT silent type, steel body, stainless steel trim and spring, renewable seat, 150 psig ASME rated. 2.10 THERMOMETERS A. Thermometers shall be Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice or Weiss, equal to Taylor 30EJ31009 with aluminum case, industrial glass,red reading mercury, 9" scale length, ZF subdivisions. Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response but in no case less than 3-1/2" nor less than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each thermometer shall be provided with a brass,monel, or stainless steel separable socket of matching length, and with lagging extension when installed in insulated pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type,positioned as required to be easily seen and read from normal operator's position. B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following: 1. Hot water heating system: 25-240°F 2.11 PRESSURE GAUGES HVAC(CW) 15600-20 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts Bars). Pump flanges shall be ANSI B 16.1, 125-lb. flat face. C. The pump housing, motor stool, and shaft coupling shall be constructed of close-grained cast iron. The impeller,impeller seal ring, and pump shaft shall be constructed of stainless steel. The impeller shall be secured to the splined pump shaft end by means of a stainless steel lock nut and locking washer. The seal faces shall be if tungsten carbide/carbon with other mechanical seal parts constructed of stainless steel. D. Motor shall be nominal integrated variable frequency drive totally enclosed fan cooled 1750 rpm and shall be especially selected for quit operation. The horse power of the motor shall be of such size as to insure non-overloading of the motor throughout the pump curve without the use of motor service factor. Pump motors shall be premium efficiency. Provide steel base. E. Pumps shall be Grundfos Series L. No substitutions will be allowed. 2.09 VALVES A. All valves shall be of the same make except as noted below for special valves and shall be Crane, Watts, Walworth, or Tour & Anderson manufacture based on the following Stockham valves. All ball valves shall be Watts,and all balancing valves shall be Tour and Anderson. No substitutions will be allowed. B. All water valves installed in copper tube piping shall be, in general, solder end pattern,all bronze with iron hand wheel,rated for not less than 200 pounds non-shock water pressure. In general,all line service valves are to be gate valves,manual vents are to be globe type. C. Solder end valves are as follows: 1. Gate Valves-Stockham Figure B-109. 2. Globe Valves- Stockham B-14T. 3. Check Valves- Stockham B-309. 4. Drain Valves-Watts No.B-6000 ball valve with hose adapter,cap and chain. 5. Ball Valves-Watts Series B-6001-SS-XH. D. Screw end and flanged valves shall be as follows: 1. Gate: 2-1/2 in. and smaller- Stockham Figure B-120, 3 in. and larger- Stockham Figure G-620 or G-623. 2. Globe: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-120 or 752; 3 in. and larger - Stockham Figure G-609 or G-613. 3. Check: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-319; 3 in. and larger - HVAC(CW) 15600- 19 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts fasteners with vandal proof heads. Cabinets and fronts shall be phosphatized and painted inside and outside with one coat of grey primer. Complete cabinets and convector elements are to be manufactured by the same company. A horizontal channel stiffener shall be installed on the inside of the front panel of all units'36" or longer. D. The convectors shall be securely attached to the building structure and shall be set dead level in both directions. All convectors shall be mounted one block course (8" ) above finished floor. E. The convectors shall be finished with factory baked enamel finish in color to be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. All fasteners shall be tamper- proof. F. Convector A - Type SW-A: Type SW-A cabinets shall be constructed from not less than 14 gauge CRS front and top and No. 16 gauge CRS back and sides. The front shall wrap around the sides of the cabinet and shall fasten at sides with vandal proof screws. Air outlet louvers of venetian type shall be in slope top. Type SW-A air inlet shall be through open bottom. Back shall be provided with holes for mounting on wall. G. Dampers: Provide factory installed Allen Head operated dampers for all convectors. The damper operator shall have two free wheeling clutches for automatic engagement at the beginning (closing or opening) position and shall position the damper blade at any intermediate point between full closed and full open; at the full open and full closed position,the clutch shall disengage allowing the die-formed, unbreakable nylon damper knob to be turned beyond the full closed or open position without jamming or distorting the damper assembly. The operator is to be 5/8 in. machined aluminum screw and zinc die-cast iron and escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate shall be fastened through the enclosure to a 3/32 in.back-up plate with countersunk sheet metal screws. H. Access Doors: Convectors shall be provided with one access door. Access door shall be 5-1/8 in. by 4-1/8 in. and shall be located in the inlet louver area. Access doors shall be hinged on side with straight shaft type hinge and shall fasten with cam-type locking device with Allen Head operator. I. End Pockets: Where noted, convectors shall be provided with 4 in. end pockets, both ends. End pocket shall consist of the cabinet extended in length as noted with No. 20 gauge CRS baffle spot welded to back of cabinet extruding from heating element to air outlet louvers. 2.08 CIRCULATING PUMPS A. The pumps shall be of the centrifugal in-line coupled type, especially designed and constructed for quiet operation. Capacity shall be as shown on the Drawings. B. Pump end shall be of the in-line, single stage design with close-coupled motor. The pump models shall be furnished as shown on the plans and installed in accordance with the manufacture's recommendations. The pump shall be capable of operating continuously at temperatures from 5°F to 250° (-15°C to 121°C) and working pressures of 175 PSI (12 HVAC(CW) 15600- 18 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts A. The utility vent set shall be of the centrifugal fan type completely assembled with fan, fan scroll, motor, belt drive, motor mount and motor housing. The capacity shall be as shown on the Drawings and certified performance tests by AMCA shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings. B. The fan shall be mounted and supported as shown by the detail on the Drawings. The mounting shall be complete with vibration isolators as recommended by the manufacturer. The unit shall be provided with weather protection. C. Fan housing shall be constructed of steel sheet and all parts shall bebonderized and then coated with baked primer-finisher especially formulated to meet stringent corrosion resistance standards. The fan scroll shall be attached to the side plates by means of continuous lock seam or welded seam construction. Intermittent spot welded type construction will not be acceptable. D. The fan wheels shall be of the backwardly inclined non-overloading type. E. The shaft shall be constructed of C 1040 ground and polished steel. F. The bearings shall be of the ball bearing type and shall be especially constructed for quiet operation. Bearings shall be of the self-aligning grease pack, pillow block type, selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours. .. G. Motor and drive shall be belt drive with adjustable motor sheave. Motor nameplate horsepower shall exceed brake horsepower by a minimum of 5%. Belts shall be of the oil resistant type. Motor shall be especially designed for quiet operation. H. A factory wired non-fused disconnect switch shall be located under the housing of the unit. Provide spring vibration isolators for each fan. I. Fan shall be Greenheck Model SWB or equal by Loren-Cook or Jenn Air. 2.7 CONVECTORS A. Convectors shall be of the wall mounted or semi-recessed type as shown on Drawings for heating with hot water. Unit shall have a capacity as shown on the drawings and shall be rated in accordance with Code CS 140-47 of the National Bureau of Standards. B. Convector elements shall be of suitable type for use with hot water and shall consist of round seamless copper tubes, non-ferrous fins, cast iron headers, steel element end supports and fin tube supports all suitably protected against corrosion. All tubes shall be mechanically expanded into fin collars. Tubes shall be expanded and rolled into headers with contact strengthened by tapered brass bushings so inserted as to prevent tubes from loosening or pulling out by continued expansion. No soldered or welded joints or compression couplings shall be permitted. C. All cabinets shall be reinforced where necessary to provide stiffness. Cabinets shall be constructed of 16 gage quality steel. Fronts shall be secured in place by quick opening 15600- 17 HVAC(CW) Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts a. Fitting Composition: Brass compression fittings consisting of nut, ferrule and insert with a ring for connecting PEX or copper tubing to manifold. b. Fitting Types: Manifold to PEX tubing sizes 3/8", 1/2", 5/8" 3/4" Manifold to 1/2" copper tubing Hose Bib Manifold Cap C. Required Features: Well fitting, easily installed. Copper tubing should not require soldering. D. System Requirements 1. Installations: Radiant tubing systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. All relevant information shall be included relating to the following: a. tube handling b. tube measuring C. tube cutting d. tube bending e. tube repairing f. tube connections g. tube solvent sensitivity h. tube UV light sensitivity i. tube capacity and pressure drop j. tube loop layout patterns k. tube fastening procedures 1. manifold assembly instructions m. manifold location n. fitting assembly instructions o. insulation practices P. installation method by construction type q. control applications r. system start-up procedures 2. Drawings: All drawings or design plans of the radiant tubing system shall be in accordance with manufacturer recommended procedures for the products utilized. 3. Components: All product components of the radiant tubing system shall be supplied by one company, including: PEX tubing, fittings, manifolds, and other recommended and required hardware to assure a compatible and a complete radiant tubing system. 2.6 UTILITY FAN HVAC(CW) 15600- 16 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts Additional Marking 1. Date of manufacturing. 2. Oxygen diffusion protection to DIN4726. 3. Length indications in five (5) foot intervals, for ease of measuring the tubing. 2. Manifolds: Manifolds used in PEX tubing installation shall consist of individual loop control and adaptation utilizing modular Polyacrylamide thermoplastic components ready for assembly. The manifold should also include the following features: a. Modular Design: This eliminates the need for multiple manifold configurations and allows for future expansion. b. Venting: Each supply and return vent/temperature module shall have an automatic integrated air vent. C. Temperature Measurements: Each supply and return manifold shall have a thermometer integrated to indicate supply and return water temperatures. Temperature readouts will assist in the diagnostics and set up of a radiant heating system. d. Flow Measurements: Each loop return block shall have incremental adjustment and flow rate indication. Temperature and flow readouts will assist in the diagnostics and set up of a radiant heating system. e. Balancing Valves: Each return block will provide a balancing valve and a visual flow meter for proper balancing of the radiant heating system allowing different loop lengths and tube sizes to be connected to the same manifold. Each valve shall be able to fully close to allow complete loop isolation. f. Supply/Return Indication: Each loop supply module shall be red to indicate incoming hot water, and each return loop module shall be blue to indicate cooler return water. g. Loop Isolation: Each loop supply and return module shall have a means of fully isolating the loop from the rest of the system. h. Piping Inlet/Outlet Size: All manifold inlets/outlets shall be 1-1/4" NPT female,to fit maximum size plumbing and greater system adaptability. 3. Fittings HVAC(CW) 15600- 15 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 5/8" 190 165 3/4" 190 165 i. Burst Pressure: The minimum burst pressure for PEX plastic tubing shall be as given. Nominal Tube Minimum Burst Pressure Minimum Burst Pressure Size psi @ 180°F psi @ 180°F 3/8" 275 235 1/2" 215 185 5/8" 210 180 3/4" 210 180 j. Environmental Stress Cracking: "There shall be no loss of pressure in the tubing when tested in accordance with 7.9" (paragraph of ASTM F876). k. Degree of Crosslinking: "When tested in accordance with 7.9, (paragraph of ASTM F876), the degree of crosslinking for PEX tubing- material shall be within the range of 65%to 89%inclusive." 1. Stabilizer Migration Resistance: "When tested in accordance with 7.10 (paragraph of ASTM F876), the time t2 02 = time to failure of boiled sample) shall be at least 50% of the time, t," (t, = time to failure of unboiled sample). m. Bend Radius: The minimum bend radius for cold bending of the tube shall not be more than six (6) times the outside diameter for up to a 90 degree bend. For 180 degree bends, the minimum bend radius shall be as follows: 3/8" tubing 3.0" radius 1/2"tubing 3.75"radius 5/8"tubing 4.5" radius 3/4" tubing 5.75" radius n. Marking: All PEX tubing shall be marked at intervals of not more than five(5) feet in accordance with ASTM F876 as follows: 1. Nominal tubing size. 2. Type of plastic tubing material. 3. Standard dimension Ratio, SDR9. 4. Pressure rating for water and temperature for which the pressure rating is valid. 5. ASTM designation,ASTM F876. 6. Manufacturer's name and production code. HVAC(CW) 15600- 14 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 1. Dc Tube Composition: Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) in accordance with ASTM F876. b. Manufacturing Method: All PEX tubing shall be manufactured using the "electron beam method of crosslinking, performed at ambient temperature and pressure. c, Working Pressure/Temperature: The minimum continuous working pressure rating of the PEX tubing shall be 100 psi @ 180 F working temperature and 80 psi @ 200 F working temperature. d. Physical Properties: As supplied by Embassy Industries, Inc., all PEX tubing shall conform to ASTM F876 "American Society of Testing and materials, Standard Specification F876 entitled, "Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing", and German Standard DIN 4726 for "Oxygen Permeation" as related to the following paragraphs: e. Tubing: The tubing shall be homogeneous throughout and essentially uniform in color, opacity, density, and other properties. The inside and outside surfaces shall be matte or glossy in appearance. the tubing walls shall be free of cracks, holes, blisters, voids, foreign inclusion, or other defects that are visible to the naked eye and that may affect the wall integrity. f. Dimensions and Tolerances Nominal Average Outside Minimum Tubing Size Diameter Wall Thickness 3/8" 0.500" 0.070" 1/2" 0.625" 0.070" 5/8" 0.750" 0.083" 3/4" 0.875" 0.097" g. Density: The crosslinked polyethylene tubing material shall have a density in the range from 0.926 to 0.949 Mg/m'. h. Sustained Pressure: Nominal Tube Minimum Burst Pressure Minimum Burst Pressure Size psi @ 180°F psi @ 180°F 3/8" 250 210 1/2" 195 165 15600- 13 HVAC(CW) Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts bars parallel to floor or nearest wall. All volume control dampers shall bekey operated. Finish for all diffusers, grilles, and registers to be factory finished with color selected by the Engineer. B. Ceiling Exhaust Register (CER) - Titus Model 350FL/AG-15 aluminum deflected blade register,off-white finish,with opposed blade damper. C. Top Exhaust Register(TER) -Titus Model 271FUAG-15 aluminum construction, double deflection,white finish,with opposed blade damper. D. Top Supply Registers(TSR)-Titus Model CT-980 Fixed Aluminum Bar with 1/4" spacing and type-11 border. E. Bottom Return Register(TRR)-Titus Model 33 RFL 30°reflection register with opposed blade damper. F. floor supply register (FSR) —Titus Model 1707 directional blade floor register with type "C" border and opposed blade damper. 2.4 LOUVERS A. All wall louvers shall be extruded aluminum construction, equal to the followingRuskin Mfg.Co.model. 1. Type"A"-No.ELF375D with box frame,extended sill, 1/2" aluminum mesh bird screen,and Kynar 500 finish. 2.5 RADIANT HEATING SYSTEM A. Scope of Work 1. This Specification is to provide relevant product data for a radiant tubing system consisting of PEX tubing with oxygen permeation protection, distribution manifolds and associated fittings. B. References 1. American Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification F876, entitled"Crosslinked Polyethylene(PEX)Tubing". 2. American Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification F877 entitled, "Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot and Cold Water Distribution Systems". 3. German Standard DIN 4726, "Pipelines of plastic materials used in warm water floor heating systems". C. Materials '` HVAC(CW) 15600- 12 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts under which the damper fire rating was obtained. Angles shall completely close the wall opening and provide anchorage to the dampers. Damper blade stack shall not reduce duct free area. P. Where called for on Drawings, final connections to diffusers and registers shall be made with flexible ductwork,UL listed,Class 1. To be Thermaflex S-LP-10 for exhaust/return, M-KA for supply, or equal. Joints shall be sealed with duct tape and Thermaflex duct straps. Connection to rigid ductwork shall be made with spun conical taps. Q. Flexible Air Duct: 1. Flexible air duct shall be Wiremold,Thermoflex,Cleveflex, or equal, and shall be equal to Wiremold Type CRK Vanguard Duct. 2. Flexible duct shall be manufactured from fully annealed aluminum and formed into a multiple corrugated construction, then encased with 1 inch, 3/4 lb. density fiberglass blanket and sheathed with a vinyl vapor barrier. The duct shall have an inside-bending radius of not more than 3/4 inch I.D. It must comply with the latest NFPA Bulletin 90A and be listed as Class 1 air duct, UL Standard 181. Duct shall have published pressure ratings of not less than 10 ft. S.A. positive pressure, .5 inch W.A. negative pressure. Duct shall also be UL rated for velocities up to 6,500 F.P.M.E. R. Flexible Connections: Provide, in each duct connection to every air handling unit and fan, 30 ounce double neoprene coated woven glass fabric flexible connection not less than 4" long securely held to retaining clamps. S. All exhaust ducts serving shower shall be aluminum. 2.2 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS A. Layout and details shall clearly indicate compliance with the above Specifications. Any variations in design details, fittings, or accessory items for which approval is requested shall be specifically marked on the Drawings, as shall any major variations from the Drawing (minor variations are assumed to be field conditions). Drawings for Fan Room shall be at 3/8 in.= 1 ft.0 in. scale. B. The Drawings shall not be submitted to the Engineer for approval until the ductwork has been coordinated with all other trades. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall assume the responsibility for and bear the cost of any alterations required after approval because of inaccurate Shop Drawings or lack of proper coordination, and also for any changes in sheet metal erected prior to approval of Shop Drawings. 2.3 AIR DIFFUSERS,GRILLES,AND REGISTERS A. Diffusers, grilles, and registers shall be Anemostat-Waterloo, Titus, or Barber Colman, equal to those specified in the Following paragraphs. See Drawings for sizes, cfrn's, locations, and qualities of various types. In general, all units shall be installed with face 15600- 11 HVAC(CW) Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts except where specified otherwise. Button punching shall not be used except for pre- " erection attachment of fittings. 1. Provide hinged galvanized steel access and inspection doors opposite each manual damper, reheat coil, steam injection humidifier at each fire damper, and at every duct mounted control device. Doors shall be equal to Buensod-Stacey Type S-2 of rigid construction with cast type rotary latches. Where space limitations do not allow for full swing of the access door,two rotary type latches shall be used. Doors located in insulated ducts shall be furnished with extended flames to serve as a stop for insulation. Insulate doors located in insulated ductwork. All doors shall be gasketed. Door shall be 12" by 12" minimum except where limited by duct width and shall be larger where necessary for access to fire damper fusible links or other devices. J. Hangers for all rectangular ducts 4 sq. ft. in area or above shall be round bar type fastened to 1-1/4" x 1-1/4"x 1/8" angles under the ducts. Ducts less than 4 sq. ft. in area shall be hung with black 1"x 1/16" strap iron bent V under bottom side of the duct and fastened to the duct with sheet metal screws, using not less than two screws per side and as many more so that they are not greater than 6"centers. K. Hangers are to be placed on not greater than 8'-0" centers or closer where required so that the ductwork can support the weight of a man at any point. L. Wherever sound insulation lining is called for, the sheet metal duct size shown on the Drawings must be increased to provide the clear inside dimensions or cross sectional area shown on the Drawings. M. Duct joint sealing,reinforcing,flanges,etc. for rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be based on maintaining airtight ducts at 2" WG Maximum static pressure with maximum leakage of 5% of total fan capacity; 1/2 of 1% for round and oval ducts. All joints in ductwork shall be sealed with U.L.classified United Duct Sealer,or equal. N. Duct systems shall have sufficient volume dampers, whether or not shown, to control and adjust the total volume of each system, each zone, in each branch and at each diffuser or grille. The HVAC Contractor shall consult with the College's Balancing Contractor for the proper placement of volume dampers prior to installation. Volume dampers shall be of the butterfly type with 18 gauge galvanized iron blade. All dampers shall be equipped with Duro-Dyne Type UNXLD locking quadrant. All dampers shall be provided with damper bearings on each end of shaft mounted on a 2" x 3" x 1/8" plate held to duct with sheet metal screws. Maximum width of single blades shall be 14". Splitter dampers shall not be used. O. Provide where shown or indicated on the Drawings fire and/or smoke dampers with a UL label for not less than 1-1/2 hour fire protection rating in accordance with UL-555 continuing inspection service. Blades and frame shall be galvanized steel construction with blades of an interlocking design, having two folded guides which serve as stops. Fusible links shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 1351, 20 pounds, issue A. Dampers shall be installed according to latest edition of NFPA-90A, mounted with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" returning angles on both sides of partition, wall, or floor, and sleeves as per the UL test HVAC(CW) 15600- 10 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts to the above all revised areas shall be clearly marked with a revision bubble. PART 2-MATERIA S 2.1 SHEET METAL WORK A. All duct runs shall be checked for clearances before installation of any ductwork. Above hung ceilings,duct locations and elevations must be co-ordinated with work of other trades to avoid conflicts with structure,piping,conduit and light fixtures. B. All sheet metal ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet of bend forming quality. C. Duct construction shall be in accordance with best practices and latest ASHRAE or SMACNA requirements for metal gauges,joints, reinforcing and supports. All exposed ductwork shall be constructed and hung to provide a neat, smooth, fmished appearance. Cadmium plated sheet metal screws shall be used on all exposed ductwork. Ducts shall be free from thumping or rattling when fans are turned on or off. D. Duct sizes shall be strictly followed and no changes in shape or dimensions shall be made by the HVAC Contractor without first obtaining approval from the Engineer, except that duct shall be offset as required to clear structural members and to co-ordinate with other trades and any duct changes must meet the latest ASHRAE and SMACNA standards. E. The center line radius of all duct elbows where shown on the Drawings shall be at least one and one-half times the width of the duct. Where building conditions do not allow for this radius or where square turns are shown, manufactured double walled duct turns equal to Aero-Dyne or Tuttle & Bailey shall be used in the supply or exhaust air ducts and "Sonotru" acoustical attenuating turns as manufactured by South Control Products Co. shall be used in any air ducts where acoustical insulation is included. F. Duct sections 1'-6"wide or less shall be butted together and jointed with flat drive cleats 2- 1/8" wide. Top and bottom cleats shall be cut flush with duct and side cleats bent over to make a tight joint. Standing bar slips as specified for ducts over 18" may be used at the HVAC Contractor's option. G. Ducts from 18"to 30"wide shall be jointed with 1/2" standing bar slips made of metal the same as or heavier than duct sheets. Joints in ducts with either dimension over 30" shall have 1 standing bar slips on those sides over 30". Where sides are over 42",the standing bar slips will be reinforced with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" angles. Additional angle stiffeners not over 60" apart shall be provided between joints. Ducts over 60" in width shall be jointed with 1-1/2" x 1/8" angle irons riveted to ductwork on all sides with 1/8" rivets at not more than 4-1/2" on centers, sections bolted with 3/16" stove bolts at not over 6" centers,sheets turned over angles into joint at least 1/4". H. Sheet metal screws 3/4" #10 may be used to attach stiffener angles to ductwork to secure seams, spaced not over 12" on centers and not less than two per side of 12" or more, 15600-9 HVAC(CW) Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts B. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after being placed in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned, and reconnected at no additional cost to the Owner. C. During the course of construction, all ducts and pipes shall be capped to insure adequate protection against the entrance of foreign matter. D. Keep the job site free from the accumulation of waste material and rubbish. Upon completion of all work under the Contract,the Contractor shall remove from the premises all rubbish, debris, and excess materials left over from his work. Any oil or grease stains on floor areas caused by the Contractor shall be removed and floor areas left clean. 1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of plumbing in the building, shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports Oe. beams or joists)is not allowed without written approval by the Engineer. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor failing to co- ordinate,who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4"in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the HVAC Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1. B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions of concealed work, fire dampers, volume dampers, control dampers and control valves, and for piping installation, valve numbers shall be added to these Drawings prior to submittal to the Engineer. In addition HVAC(CW) 15600- 8 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 7. Valve chart. 8. List of recommended spare parts. 9. Copies of all service contracts. 10. Performance curves for pumps,fans,etc. 11. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. D. See the "Automatic Temperature Control' paragraphs of this Section for additional requirements. 1.16 PROTECTION A. Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and material of all other Sections from damage by work or workmen, and shall include making good all damage thus caused B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected,tested, and accepted; protect work against theft, injury, or damage; and carefully store material and equipment received on site which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing or foreign material. C. Work under each Section includes receiving, unloading, uncrating, storing, protecting, setting in place, and connecting-up completely any equipment supplied under each Section. Work under each Section shall also include exercising special care in handling and protecting equipment and fixtures, and shall include the cost of replacing any of the equipment and fixtures which are missing or damaged by reason of mishandling or failure to protect on the part of the HVAC Contractor. D. Equipment and material stored on the job site shall be protected from the weather, vehicles, dirt, and/or damage by workmen or machinery. Insure that all electrical or absorbent equipment or material is protected from moisture during storage. 1.17 CLEANING A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and flush all piping, ducts, and equipment of all foreign substances inside and out before being placed in operation. Thoroughly flush all piping of any oils, burrs, solder, and flux. Replace strainers and filters at completion of cleaning. HVAC(CW) 15600-7 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts E. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above grade. 1.14 GUARANTEE A. The HVAC Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after date of substantial completion, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The HVAC Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Contractor shall video tape the instruction procedures and deliver three (3) copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Furnish the Engineer, for approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover the words OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL,the name and location of the equipment or the building,the name of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The manual shall include the following information: 1. Description of systems. 2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of equipment. 3. Winter/summer changeover procedures. 4. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 5. Lubrication chart. HVAC(CW) 15600-6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The HVAC Contractor shall assume all responsibility in scaling measurements from the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings,it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The HVAC Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, famishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions,at no additional cost. E. The HVAC Contractor shall consult the College's Temperature Control and Balancing Contractor to co-ordinate work of these trades and to have a full comprehension of the work to be done as well as to determine the conditions affecting the location and placement of all equipment and materials. 1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery: The HVAC Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. Delivery and storage of materials and equipment must be co-ordinated with the Smith College Physical Plant, and is limited to areas designated by the College. B. Storage and Handling: The HVAC Contractor shall, at all times,fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss, which may occur, shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until thebuilding is accepted by the Owner. 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Subcontract shall be provided by the HVAC Contractor. B. The HVAC Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric power from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs,plugs,sockets,etc. C. All broken or waste material,rags,packing,etc.,resulting from his work shall be removed by the HVAC Contractor. 1.13 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping and ductwork shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms,unless specifically noted otherwise "* on the Drawings. 15600-5 HVAC(CW) Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts manufacturer for each class or category of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings,or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the HVAC Contractor shall submit to the Engineer six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details,dimensions,capacities,etc.of all materials to be furnished on the project. In addition to the above, one(1) set of Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the College's HVAC Department for review and approval. B. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Engineer for review, making any and all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the HVAC Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Engineer. 1.8 PERMITS,FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The HVAC Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The HVAC Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1. 1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The HVAC Contractor shall refer to all the Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Subcontract requirements. HVAC(CW) 15600-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts as above,he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The HVAC Contractor shall lay out all his work at the site and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes,conduit,and cable runs shall be performed by the Contractor installing such items. G. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. H. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Engineer before proceeding with the work. J. Before submitting his bid,the HVAC Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work since the HVAC Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard thereto. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements. No substitution will be allowed for the Trane, York, or McQuay air handling units and condensing unit, Trane, McQuay or International fan coil units, Watts ball valves, Grundfos pumps,Tour and Anderson balancing valves,Tunstall steam traps. B. The HVAC Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1.6 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials shall be new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of HVAC(CW) 15600-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 12. Instructions. 13. Record Drawings. 14. Demolition, removal from site and legal disposal of all existing heating and ventilating systems and equipment, made obsolete by new construction. All piping and equipment shall be the property of the College and shall be delivered to such places designated by the College. 1.3 CODES,ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Engineer rules otherwise. B. The HVAC Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The HVAC Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a ' regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The HVAC Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the HVAC Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Engineer after construction work begins. C. The HVAC Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the .� execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising a4 to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the HVAC Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the HVAC Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Engineer whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The HVAC Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The HVAC Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, flames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the HVAC Contractor to give proper information HVAC(CW) 15600-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts SECTION 15600-HEATING, ENT TTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of Division 1,and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements,which affect work under this, Section whether or not,such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all HVAC work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings,including,but not limited to,the following; 1. Steam to water heat exchanger. 2. Unit heaters and radiators. 3. Pex tubing system and manifold. 4. Piping systems for hot water, steam supply and condensate return, including pumps,heat exchanger valves,and specialties. 5. Duct systems for make up air and exhaust, including fire dampers, registers, louvers,and terminal boxes air handling units. 6. Exhaust fans. 7. Insulation for piping,ductwork,and equipment. 8. Energy management (building automation) system. All temperature control work shall be by Yankee Technology,Inc. 9. Installation of and connection to equipment furnished by dhers. 10. Air and water balance,tests, start-up. All water and air testing and balancing shall be preformed by "Wings Testing and Balancing, Inc and billed directly to the College." 11. Guarantee. HVAC(CW) 15600- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts D. After disinfection, flush treated water from system through its extremities. Continue flushing until samples of water are satisfactory to local authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat flushing if samples taken daily over next three (3) days indicate that quality of water is not being maintained. Do not draw samples from hydrants and undisinfected hose. E. Submit test results to Owner. 3.11 WATER SERVICE A. The Plumbing Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to have a new water meter installed by the Northampton Water Department. The Plumbing Contractor shall order the new meter,and the College shall be billed direct for all charges. END OF SECTION Plumbing(CW) 15400-19 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed. SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and set all sleeves required. All water piping passing through masonry walls shall be provided with standard weight steel pipe, or Schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeves, inside diameter to be slightly larger than pipe passing through same. Center pipe in sleeve. B. Provide chromium plated escutcheons where un-insulated pipes pass through walls. 3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTS A. Tests for Plumbing Systems: Soil, waste, vent and water piping shall be tested by the Plumbing Contractor and approved before acceptance. Underground piping shall be tested prior to backfnlling. Equipment required for tests shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. All tests shall be witnessed and approved by the Local Plumbing Inspector, and shall be performed as required by the Plumbing Code. 3.8 CLEANING UP A. After all the fixtures have been set and ready for use, and before leaving the job, thoroughly clean all fixtures installed under this Contract,removing all plaster, stickers, rust stains, and any foreign matter or discoloration of fixtures, leaving every part in perfect condition and ready for use. 3.9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and be included in his Bid. 3.10 DISINFECTION A. Flush out entire system. B. Introduce chlorine or solution of calcium hypochlorite or sodium hypochlorite. Fill lines slowly and apply agent at rate which will produce 50 parts per million of chloride as determined by residual chlorine tests at end of lines. Open and close valves and hydrants while system is being chlorinated. C. After twenty-four(24)hours, test for residual chlorine. If more than 5 ppm are present, flush out system until all traces are removed. Plumbing(CW) 15400-18 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts with the directions of the manufacturer. C. Plastic Pipe: Install plastic piping in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. At minimum, envelope all PVC pipe in 6" of screened gravel. Clear interior of conduit of dirt and debris as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. D. Joint Adapters: Make joints between PVC pipe and other type of pipe with standard manufactured PVC adapters and fittings. E. Lay conduit beginning at low point of system, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. 3.3 WATER PIPE FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS A. Mains, Branches and Runoffs: Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building by the Plumbing Contractor and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to weaken structural portions of the building. Above ground piping shall be run parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top, bottom or side of main, using such crossover fittings as may be required by structural or installation conditions. Supply pipes, valves and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit not less than 1/2"between finished covering on the different services. B. Expansion and Contraction of Pipe: Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of pipe. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of plumbing shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. B. Cutting of openings larger than those that can be drilled will be performed by the General Contractor. C. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment,will be performed by the General Contractor. 3.5 INSULATION A. Insulation shall be applied by an independent Insulation Contractor regularly engaged in that business. B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls. Covering shall be applied before OPW masonry proceeds. Plumbing(CW) 15400-17 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts Awftl 2.11 DEMOLITION A. Removal of all obsolete fixtures, drains,piping, etc.,not to be re-used shall be removed by this Contractor and shall become the property of the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for delivering and/or properly disposing of all obsolete equipment to such places as designated by the Owner. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 SOIL,WASTE,DRAIN AND VENT PIPING A. Installation: 1. Drainage and Vent Pipes: Horizontal soil, rain leaders and waste pipes shall have a minimum grade of 1/4" per foot for piping 3" and less and 1/8" per foot for piping larger than 3". Horizontal waste lines receiving the discharge from two or more fixtures shall be provided with end vents unless separate venting of fixtures is noted. 2. Fittings: Changes in pipe size on soil,waste, and drain lines shall be made with reducing fittings. Changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of 45° wyes, long or short sweep 1/4 bends, 1/6, 1/8, or 1/16 bends, or by a combination of those or equivalent fittings. Single and double sanitary tees and 1/4 bends may be used in drainage lines only where the direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. 3. Union Connections: Slip joints will be permitted only in trap seals or on the inlet side of the traps. Use of bushings will not be permitted. B. Joints: Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Threaded joints shall have American National taper pipe threads conforming to National Bureau of Standards Handbook H28, with graphite or inert filler and oil, with an approved graphite compound,or with polytetrafluorethylene tape applied to the male threads. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE A. Bedding for the pipe shall provide full and stable support, with recesses excavated for pipe bells. All pipe shall be laid to the specified line and grade, with a firm bearing throughout each length and with the bell ends uphill. B. Pipe Joints: The flexible water tight rubber gaskets shall be installed in accordance Plumbing(CW) 15400-16 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 1. Woodford Model B65 Series concealed type, automatic draining with anti- siphon vacuum breaker, 3/" hose thread nozzle, one piece valve plunger to control both flow and drain functions, loose tee key to be furnished with each hydrant. No substitutions shall be made O. Hose Bibb(P-9) 1. Woodford Model No.24P,with vacuum breaker and loose key. P. Floor Drain(P-10) 1. Wade Model No. 1100 w/FC7 Strainer. Q. Floor Drain(P-l0A) 1. Mechanical room floor drains to be Zurn 415 with type"B" strainer. R Laundry Tub(P-11) 1. Basin-Fiat Model L-2 single tub with base unit. 2. Faucet-Chicago Model 895-317, 8" center with E-12 aerator. 3. Trim-Fiat Model 327A strainer and tail piece. S. Drinking Fountain and Cuspidor(P-4A) 1. Fountain: Halsey Taylor Model 8800 fully recessed, stainless steel, self- closing pushbutton valve,removable brass strainer plate, all exposed fittings to be chrome plated, cuspidor flushing jet operates when drinking fountain is actuated. 2. Drain and Trap: Halsey Taylor perforated drain,tailpiece and trap assembly. T. Drinking Fountain(P-12A) 1. Fountain: Halsey Taylor Model HACBFS-Q, single wall hung barrier free water cooler with front and side activation bars. Integral air cooled compressor rated at 500 w., 5.4 FLA, 1/5 HP motor with a capacity of 8 gph water at 50 degrees F. Color to be selected by Architect. This Contractor shall furnish and install a water filter unit to serve this fixture. Filter to be Aqua-Pure"Gold" Model AP-500. Saddle valves will not be allowed. 2. Drain and Trap: Halsey Taylor perforated drain,tailpiece and trap assembly. Plumbing(CW) 15400-15 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts Contractor shall be responsible to install shower drains and perform all piping. .. , Note: This contractor shall protect shower basins throughout the course of construction and shall be responsible for all,or any, damage to showers. 2. Shower Valve — Symmons Safetymix Shower System Model 1-100-X, pressure-balancing mixing valve with lever handle and adjustable screw stop to limit handle turn. Consisting of Valve 4-500, Super shower head with Nu-Arm head bracket No. 4-131-M-301. J. Shower Stall&Drying Stall(P-4A) 1. Shower Stall — Aquarius Model No. B3636SPF single compartment shower receptor with one(1) drains set in place and flashed by the General Contractor. Shower doors shall be Universal-Rundal Model No. "Tritons" No. 9645 complete with ''/<" thick laminated white glass and full length S/S hinge. This Contractor shall be responsible to install shower drains and perform all piping. Note: This contractor shall protect shower basins throughout the course of construction and shall be responsible for all,or any,damage to showers. 2. Shower Valve, — Symmons Safetymix Shower System Model 1-100-X, pressure-balancing mixing valve with lever handle and adjustable screw stop to limit handle turn. Consisting of Valve 4-500, Super shower head with Nu-Arm head bracket No. 4-131-M-301. K. Mop Receptor(P-5) 1. Basin-Fiat No. 2424 molded stone, 24" x 24" x 10" high mop basin. 2. Faucet — Chicago Faucet Model 540-LD-897S-WXF, 8" centers, with vacuum breaker spout, 369 handles, WXF non-adjustable inlet centers, polished chrome plate only,ADA compliant. 3. Trim - Fiat No. 87A drain, No. 889CC mop hanger, No. 832AA hose and bracket, and No. 1453-BB strainer. L. Double Bowl Sink (P-6)- Sink to Elkay Model LR 3321 with Delta Model No. 2476 faucet with spray and Aqua Pure Model No. AP-DWS 1000 water filter. Furnish and install a garbage disposal in-sink-erator model SS-125 1 '/< HP 120V, 1 phase K. Single Bowl Sink(P-6A)- Same as P-6 above. M. Washing Machine Connection(P-7) 1. Symmons Laundry-Mate No. W-602-X supply and drain unit with ''/z" supplies and 2" drain with integral stops and recessed wall plate. N. Wall Hydrant(P-8) Plumbing(CW) 15400-14 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts risers, Sanitary Dash No. 8370-17 polished chrome plated trap with cleanout plug. F. Lavatory(P-2A)Handicapped 1. Basin — laminated lavatories are to be furnished and installed by the General Contractor. Furnish and Install the supply and waste piping and fittings. 2. Supply Fitting — Faucet-American Standard "Monterrey" Model No. 5500.140, 4" center,blade handle and grid strainer, Brass Craft No. CS400A stops and risers. 3. Fittings — Provide chrome plated offset "P" trap with cleanout and tailpiece offset with loose key stops, and insulate all drains and stops with "Truebro Handi Lav-Guard" molded vinyl insulation. G. lavatory(P-2B) 1. Basin- American Standard "Lucerne" 0350.235, vitreous china, wall mounted. 2. Faucet-American Standard "Monterrey" Model No. 5500.140 with blade handle and grid strainer, Brass Craft No. CS400A stops and risers. 3. Fittings—Provide chrome plated offset "P" trap with cleanout and tailpiece offset with loose key stops, and insulate all drains and stops with "Truebro Handi Lav-Guard" molded vinyl insulation. H. Bath Tub/Shower(P-3) 1. Tub basin — American Standard "Americast" Princeton Model 2392.202 or 2393.202,recessed bath,white non-slip. 2. Control Valve — Symmons Temptrol Valve and Shower Head, Model No. S- 96-600-B30-L-V, Pressure balancing mixing valve with combination integral diverter and volume control and adjustable stop screw to limit handle turn. Consisting of tub spout and Clear-Flo shower head with arm and flange, wall/hand shower with flexible metal hose and 30" slide bar. 3. Fittings—Gerber Model No. 41-812 waste and overflow. I. Shower Stall&Drying Stall(P-4) 1. Shower Stall — Aquarius Model No. B3672SPF double compartment shower receptor with two (2) drains set in place and flashed by the General Contractor. Shower doors shall be Universal-Rundal Model No. "Tritons" No. 9645 complete with '/" thick laminated white glass and full length S/S hinge. This Plumbing(CW) 15400-13 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts A. General Requirements: Reference made herein to numbers of plumbing fixtures to ...,� establish type and quality of materials. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the faucets, or concealed type of lock shield, loose key pattern stops for supplies shall be furnished and installed with fixtures. Exposed traps and supply pipes for all fixtures and equipment shall be chrome plated and connected to the rough piping systems at the wall. Wall escutcheons shall be chromium plated or nickel plated brass with polished, bright surfaces. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish all supports, brackets, bolts, etc. for proper installation of all fixtures requiring support. They shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and, if necessary, shall be built into place as the building progresses. This Contractor shall be held responsible for the stability and proper support of all plumbing fixtures. C. Water Closet(P-1) 1. Closet — American Standard "Madera" Model 2234.015, elongated vitreous china, siphon jet action with 1 '/2" top spud and 1.6 gallon flush. 2. Flush Valve - Sloan "Royal" 111-YO with 1" angle stop, vacuum breaker, wall and spud flanges. 3. Seat- Church Model 9400KNSSC white solid plastic, extra heavy, open front seat, less cover, with self-sustaining hinge. 4. Mounting to be floor mounted with bee's wax seal D. Water Closet(P-1A)Handicapped 1. Closet — American Standard "Madera" 17" H Model 3043.102, elongated vitreous china, siphon jet action with 1 '/2" top spud and 1.6 gallon flush. 2. Flush Valve - Sloan "Royal" 111-YO-ADA with 1" angle stop, vacuum break- er,wall and spud flanges. 3. Seat-Church Model 9400KNSSC white solid plastic, extra heavy, open front seat, less over, with self-sustaining hinge.. E. Lavatory(P-2) 1. Basin — laminated lavatories are to be furnished and installed by the General Contractor. Furnish and Install the supply and waste piping and fittings. 2. Faucet — American Standard "Monterrey" Model 5500.140, 4" centers with lever handles. 3. Fittings -Provide grid strainer and tailpiece,BrassCraft No. CS400A stops and Plumbing(CW) 15400-12 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 80700 with aluminum case, industrial glass, dial type, 4-1/2" diameter, 2°F subdivisions. Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response,but in no case less than 3-1/2" nor less than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each thermometer shall be provided with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket of matching length, and with lagging extensions when installed in insulated pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as required to be easily seen and read from normal operator's position. B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following: 1. Hot water: 30°F- 180°F. C. Provide at inlet and outlet hot water heater and at mixing valve. 2.7 PRESSURE GAUGES A. 4-1/2" dial, double-spring with soft copper tubing loop and pet cock. Operating range shall be in the center of the scale. To be U.S. Gage Co.,or approved equal. B. Provide at water entrance,on both sides of pressure reducing valve. 2.8 WATER METER A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install a 1 %s " Rockwell "Census" water meter in accordance with the City of Northampton Water Department requirements. 2.9 WATER HAM ER ARRESTERS A. Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. SC-Series type shock absorbers, sizes as shown on Drawings, or as required. N1_4 substitutions will be allowed 2.10 ACCESS PANELS A. Access panel doors for all concealed inaccessible valves, balancing fittings, or cleanouts in masonry walls, plastered or gypsum wallboard walls or ceilings, shall be famished by the Plumbing Contractor and installed by tradesmen of wall or ceiling finish. Access panels in plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL (12" x 12" min.); in walls, shall be Karp type DSC-214M "Universal" (12" x 12"); for drywall ceilings, shall be Karp Sesame Slim Trim Access Hatches, Type KSTDW/CAD (12" x 12"min.)with screw driver type lock. B. Access panels shall be Karp Associates, Inc., Inryco, Inc., Milcor Division, Birmingham Ornamental Iron,or equal. 2.11 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRINMNGS Plumbing(CW) 15400-11 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter& Paterson, Fee & Mason,or equal. B. For cast iron pipe - Grinnell Fig. 260, one to each length of cast iron pipe; at twelve foot(12')intervals for threaded piping. C. For hot, cold, and return water piping - Grinnell Fig. 70 at six foot (6) intervals for copper tubing 1-1/4" or less; ten foot (10') intervals for piping at 1-1/2" and larger. Install Fig. 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation. Hangers to be in- stalled outside the insulation. Hangers for gas piping shall be installed at eight foot(8') intervals. D. Hangers or supports shall be placed within one foot (1) of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of pipe not over five feet (5') in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 1/2" from the elbow on the connecting horizontal run. 2.4 CLEANOUTS A. Where cleanouts occur in finished floors throughout the building, they shall be Zurn ZN-1405-2, nickel-bronze for concrete finish floor; Zurn ZN-1405-7 nickel-bronze recessed for resilient floors; Zum ZN-1405-7 for ceramic tile floors; ZN-1405-14 for carpeted floors; or equal by J.R. Smith or Wade. 2.5 INSULATION A. All water piping shall be insulated with Armaflex closed cell pipe insulation with self- sealing lap, 1" thick for hot water, and return hot water 1/2" thick for cold water. Insulation shall be one piece snap-on type. All exposed piping within 10'-0" of finished floor shall be insulated as noted above and shall be fully jacketed with a PVC cover. B. Fittings shall be insulated with mitered cut insulation applied over fittings with joints taped. Cold water piping shall also have mastic applied to all overlapping surfaces to form a vapor barrier. C. Insulation and fitting jackets shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Any gaps or fishmouths shall be remade. D. Install a twelve (12") inch length of wood blocking at each hanger; insulation shall run continuous through the hanger. Jacket shall match adjacent insulation jacket. E. All exposed drain and water piping at handicapped lavatories shall be insulated with Truebro "Handi Lav-Guard", or equal,molded insulation kit. 2.6 THERMOMETERS A. Thermometers shall be Jay,Moeller,Palmer,Taylor,Trerice,or Weiss,equal to Trerice Plumbing(CW) 15400-10 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 1. Where indicated on the Drawings, all gate valves 4" and larger, shall be Class 125 iron body bronze mounted with body and bonnet conforming to 200 psi wog non-shock cast iron, flanged ends,with Teflon packing, two-piece packing gland assembly,Hammond Figure.1R1138, Stockman,or equal. 2. Valves 3" and smaller where indicated on the Drawings shall be Class 125. Body and bonnets shall be of ASTM B62 cast bronze composition, solid disc, copper silicone alloy stem,brass packing gland, Teflon packing, and malleable handwheel, solder end, Stockham Figure B-104,Hammond 1R1138,or equal. 3. Valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Hammond, American Valve, or equal. E. Balancing Valves: 1. Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install balance circuit setter,with calibrated scale, with bronze body and disc and connections for differential pressure meter. 2. Balancing valves shall be Tour&Anderson. F. Check Valves 1. Check valves shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the Drawings. Checks up to 2" shall be Class 125. Solder ends, body and caps shall be ASTM B62 cast bronze composition, swing type disc, Stockham Figure B-309. 2. Check valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be iron body, bronze mounted with body and cap conforming to ASTM A126, Class B cast iron, flanged, swing type disc, Stockham Figure G-931. 3. Check valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Jenkins, Lunkenheimer, or equal. G. Vacuum relief valves shall be Watts Model 36A-3/4". H. Globe valves shall be as manufactured by Hammond IB-418 or IB-440. I. Pressure Reducing Valves 1. Pressure reducing valves (PRV) shall be as manufactured by Watts Regulator Co.,Model U5B-GG with thermal bypass. No substitutions shall be allowed 2. Furnish and install, where indicated on the Drawings, Ametek/U.S. Gauge Co.'s Figure P500, 2" diameter,0 lb. to 100 lbs. w► 2.3 HANGERS Plumbing(CW) 15400-9 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Project Closeout, Section 01700. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. All soil, waste, and vent piping in accessible areas 2-1/2" and larger, shall be cast iron "no hub", ASA Group 022 pipe and fittings, joined with cast iron clamps as manufactured by "Clamp-All". No substitutions will be allowed. All soil, waste, and vent below slab shall be service weight, cast iron pipe with oakum and lead, sealed gas and watertight. In lieu of lead and oakum joint piping, below slab may be service weight with push-on rubber rings. B. In lieu of cast iron piping,pipe sizes 3" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper pipe with solder fittings. C. All waste lines 2" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper. All vent lines 2" and smaller shall be type "M" copper. D. All hot and cold water piping within the building shall be hard copper Type "L" seamless drawn tubing, assembled with sweat fittings. All solders used shall be lead free, cadmium free, "Silberbrite-100", or equal, complying with the latest issue of ANSI A-5.8 publications. All exposed runs to all toilet fixtures and sinks shall be chrome plated. E. All gas piping shall be Schedule 40 threaded black steel pipe with fittings. All pipes 2-1/2" and larger shall be Schedule 40 pipe with threaded or welded joints. 2.2 BALL VALVES A. On water lines inside the building,ball valves shall be as manufactured by Watts Series B6001. No substitutions will be allowed. Valves shall be provided with stainless steel ball, reinforced teflon seats and seals, bronze body, 400 psi wog, positive 100% shut- off. All valves to be furnished with valve handle extension sized to match pipe insulation thickness. B. Drain valves at all low points shall be 1/2" or 3/4" solder by 3/4" hose end with attached cap and chain. C. Provide gas cocks for sizes 1" and smaller, and provide gas rated ball valves on gas piping 1-1/4" and larger with tee handles. D. Gate Valves: Plumbing(CW) 15400-8 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 1.16 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Subcontractor shall video tape the instruction procedures an deliver two(2)copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. the manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The Manual shall include the following information: 1. Description of systems. 2. Description of start-up,operation, and shutdown. 3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 4. Lubrication chart. 5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 6. Valve chart. 7. List of recommended spare parts. 8. Copies of all service contracts. 9. Performance curves for pumps, etc. 10. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. 1.17 GUARANTEE A. The Plumbing Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. Plumbing(CW) 15400-7 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts „1 P-ROTECTION A. The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. 1.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of plumbing in the building, shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Plumbing Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the Plumbing Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The Plumbing Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Plumbing Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 1.15 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping,hangers and supports shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms,closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms. B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above grade, unless specifically so shown on the Drawings. When pipes are indicated to be installed in exterior walls, the Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that wall and pipe insulation is properly installed to protect them from freezing. Plumbing(CW) 15400-6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts A. The Plumbing Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. B. The Specifications complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Plumbing Contractor shall not scale the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Plumbing Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Delivery: The Plumbing subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. All delivery and storage must be co-ordianted with the Smith College Physical Plant Department. The Plumbing Contractor shall take delivery of all pre-purchased plumbing fixtures and equipment, and shall be responsible for the proper handling, storage, and protection of these materials from that point on. Any damage or loss of these materials after delivery shall be the responsibility of this Contractor. B. Storage and Handling: The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs,plugs,sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the Plumbing Contractor. Plumbing(CW) 15400-5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturer for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Plumbing Contractor shall submit to the Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings,giving all details,dimensions,capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Plumbing Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Plumbing Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Plumbing Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. 1.8 PERMITS,FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Section 01500. 1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS Plumbing(CW) 15400-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts question. D. The Plumbing Contractor shall co-ordinate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Plumbing Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Plumbing Contractor to give proper information as above,he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Plumbing Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items. G. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. H. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I. The Plumbing Contractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in the product specification, and as approved by the Architect and Owner. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1.6 PRODUCTS Plumbing(CW) 15400-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 8. All final connections to all items of equipment furnished by others requiring water,gas,drain, and waste connections. 9. The disconnecting and removal of all existing piping systems, fixtures, and equipment interfering with, or made obsolete by,new construction. All piping, fixtures, and equipment (i.e. copper and brass piping, fittings and valves, flush valves, mixing valves, heat exchangers, and controls) to be removed is the property of the Owner and shall be delivered to such places designated by the Owner. Removal from the site of all obsolete material after the Owner's review shall be by this Contractor. B. Refer to appropriate Division - 2 Sections for trenching and backfill required in conjunction with plumbing piping;not work of this Section. 1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations,the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Plumbing Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Plumbing Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Plumbing Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Plumbing Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in Plumbing(CW) 15400-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts SECTION 15400-PLUMBING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of Division 1, as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor,materials,plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all plumbing work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings,including,but not limited to,the following: 1. Water service entrance and pressure reducing station connecting to existing water supply line in the Wilder basement. The existing water meter shall remain. 2. Sanitary waste and venting systems inside the building, connecting to drainage systems within the building or on the site. Furnish piping, traps, flanges, seals, cleanouts, fixtures,drains, supports, and roof terminals. 3. Water service and sanitary sewer connecting to existing lines within the building or on site. Provide valve, boxes, fittings and all required components for a complete installation. 4. Hot, cold and return hot water distribution systems. Furnish piping, fittings, insulation, supports and valves. 5. Plumbing fixtures and supports. 6. Arrange for inspections and perform cleaning and testing. 7. Gas piping system connecting each and every fixture, device, and item of equipment requiring gas within the building. The system shall be installed with all incidentals necessary for a complete operational system and shall include all piping, valves, stops, drips, meters, pressure reducing valves, vents to atmosphere, gauges, structural supports (hangers), and such other standard 1, specified accessories as are necessary for a complete approved system. Plumbing(CW) 15400-1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts valve, provide permanently marked identification signs indicating the portion of the system controlled by each valve. C. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in the vertical position in proper direction of flow including the bypass check valve and retard chamber drain line connection. Install valve trim in accordance with the valve manufacturer's appropriate trim diagram. Test valve for proper operation. 3.€ FINAL CLOSEOUT A. Identification: Apply signs to control, drain, test, and alarm valves identifying there purpose and function. Provide lettering size and style selected by Architect/Engineer from NFPA's suggested styles. B. Adjustments: Place the system in operation with controls functioning. Adjust controls and apparatus for proper operation. Test thermometers and gauges for accuracy over the entire range. Remove and replace items found defective. Fire Protection (CW) 15300-24 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts D. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 and larger connections. E. Hangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Hanger and support spacing and locations for piping joined with grooved mechanical couplings shall be in accordance with the grooved mechanical coupling manufacturer's written instructions for rigid systems. F. Make connections between underground and above ground piping using an approved transition piece strapped or fastened to prevent separation. G. Install sleeve at pipe penetrations in basement and foundation walls. Refer to Division 15 Section, "Basic Materials and Methods". H. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA 13 complete with shutoff valve. Test connections may also serve as drain pipes. I. Install pressure gauge on the riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide gauge with a connection not less than 1/4" and having a soft metal seated globe valve arranged for draining pipe between gauge and valve. Install gauges to permit removal and where they will not be subject to freezing. J. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join pipe, fittings,and valves as follows. K. Flanged Joints: Align flanged surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer. L. Mechanical Grooved Joints: Cut or roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally compatible with the couplings. M. End Treatment: After cutting pipe lengths,remove burrs and fins from pipe ends. 3.4 VALVE INSTALLATIONS A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves, fittings, and specialties in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions,NFPA 13 and 14, and the authority having jurisdiction. B. Gate Valves: Install supervised open gate valves so located to control all sources of water supply except fire department connections. Where there is more than one control Fire Protection (CW) 15300-23 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safmg at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, and machine rooms. B. Safmg Insulation I. Fire safmg insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors,Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation 1. At all fire rated assemblies,prepare all penetrations for pipes and perimeters. E. Application 1. Install approved fire safmg insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safmg insulation with sealing compound. 3. Install fire safmg around all pipe penetrations and sleeves passing through fire walls,ceilings,floors, etc. 3.3 INTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction,branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. C. Install unions in pipes 2" and smaller adjacent to each valve. Unions are not required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved mechanical couplings. Fire Protection (CW) 15300-22 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts q. Gamewell dry pipe kit shall include all necessary equipment as shown in Gamewell Bulletin 6010, typical piping diagram for dry pipe watchman's kit, Model No. M2700-13. Shall include S-1, S-2, S-3 switches, air maintenance compressor, and supervisory panel, Model M2011-14. r. Spray nozzels shall be Viking Model M window spray nozzle with directional spray pattern diverter. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 CLEANING AND TESTING A. Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water feed mains, lead-in connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire sprinkler-piping instal- lation has been completed and before piping is placed in service, flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove foreign substances, under pressure as specified in ANSI/NFPA 13. Continue flushing until water is clear, and check to ensure that debris has not clogged sprinklers. B. After flushing system,test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for period of 2 hours, at not less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum static pressure is in excess of 150 psi. Check system for leakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system of zone being tested. Test dry-pipe hydrostatically except, in freezing conditions, test with air at pressures not less than 50 psi, for period of 2 hours. Check system for leakage. Leave differential dry-valve clappers open during test,to prevent damage. C. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with ANSI/NFPA standards for "little or no leakage", and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods. 3.2 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including,but not limited to the following: 1. Fire safmg at all penetrations through fire barriers, including all penetrations through existing plaster ceiling for the installation of Attic sprinklers. 2. Fire safmg at all penetrations through smoke barriers. Fire Protection (CW) 15300-21 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts f. Horizontal sidewall sprinkler heads shall be Star Model "E" with white finish, temperature 165°F unless noted otherwise 9. Dry horizontal sidewall shall be equal to Central Model H-1, 1" NPT, 165°F. h. Dry pendent sprinkler shall be equal to Central Model A-1 recessed type with white cover, extended dry pendent, 1"NPT, 165°F. i. Tamper switches shall be equal to Potter Electrical Signal Company, Model OSYS-B, small case, and shall be installed on all control valves for the sprinkler system. j. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire protection specialties of the following Grinnell Fire Protection Systems, Co., Inc.,Viking Corporation, or equal. k. Dry Pipe alarm valve shall be equal to Reliable"Model E" system complete with alarm valve, solenoid valve, 1/2 H.P. air compressor, and air maintenance device accelerator and air maintenance compressor mounted on riser. 1. Flush mounted Fire Department pumper connection shall be wall mounted cast brass body, dual drop clappers, brass plugs with chains, all with rough chrome-plated finish and lettering on escutcheon reading, "Automatic Sprinkler", equal to Potter-Roemer. Hose connection sizes and threads shall match Northampton Fire Department standards. m. Automatic ball drips, as manufactured by Potter-Roemer shall be Fig. 5982, size 3/4", of straight design in case brass. Install in horizontal position only. n. Swing Check valve shall be equal to Central, Model "80" with tapping for automatic ball drip, size as required. o. Double check valve assembly w/metered bypass as noted on plans, to be furnished and installed by the Sprinkler Subcontractor, DEP approved for backflow prevention, Watts Model 709DDC. Provide test kits Model TK-7-BFP, and two repair kits. p. Swing check valve shall be equal to Central, Model "80" with tapping for automatic ball drip size as required. Fire Protection (CW) 15300-20 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts a. 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, 175 psi, iron body bronze mounted, renewable composition disc and bronze seat ring,bolted cover, flanged ends. Fairbanks: 0711 Jenkins: 729 Stockham: G-940 Walworth: 8883-LT 4. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. 5. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable. F. Fire Protection Specialties 1. Provide fire protection specialties, UL listed, in accordance with the following listing. Provide sizes and types, which mate and match piping and equipment connections. a. Upright sprinkler heads shall be Viking Corp., Model "M" standard upright sprinkler head,rough brass. Temperature rating 165°F or as re- quired by the insurance underwriter. b. Semi-recessed dry pendant sprinkler heads shall be Viking Model "M" chrome plated head with Type "F-1" recessed escutcheon, rated at 165°F unless otherwise noted; to be installed in all occupied spaces. C. Spare sprinklers shall be provided in one 12-head cabinet equal to Viking, Model A-1 cabinet. Each cabinet shall have an assortment of heads as used on the job and also an approved type sprinkler head wrench; mount cabinet in alarm check valve area. d. Head guards shall be equal to Central Model 1 for upright sprinklers in areas specified on drawings. e. Drain and test connections shall be equal to AGF Model 1000 with sight glass, and test orifice. Fire Protection (CW) 15300-19 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts 9. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed to ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not exceeded. 10. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments. E. Valves 1. Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide end connections, which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option. a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size. b. Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter-turn. 2. Gate Valves a. Threaded End, 2" and Smaller: FM, UL-listed, 175 psi, bronze body, solid wedge,outside screw and yoke,rising stem. Crane: 459 Fairbanks: 0222 Hammond: IB681 Jenkins: 275U Stockham: B-133 Walworth: 904 b. Flanged End, 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, UL listed, 175 psi, iron body bronze mounted, solid wedge,outside screw and yoke,rising stem. Crane: 467 Fairbanks: 0412 Hammond: IRl 154 Jenkins: 825-A Stockham: G-634 Walworth: 8713-F 3. Check Valves Fire Protection (CW) 15300-18 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. a. Top Beam C-Clamps: MSS Type 19. b. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20. C. C-Clamps: MSS Type 23. d. Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 27. e. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30. 4o Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hangers and supports of one of the following: B-Line Systems Inc. Carpenter and Patterson,Inc. Corner&Lada Co., Inc. Elcen Metal Products Co. Fee&Mason Mfg. Co. ITT Grinnell Corp. 5. Install building attachments at required locations on structural steel for proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated on MSS SP-69. Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. 6. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacing complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. 7. Support sprinkler piping independently of other piping. 8. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. 15300-17 Fire Protection (CW) Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co. Producers Specialty&Mfg. Co. Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co. C. Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure escutcheon to pipe so escutcheon covers penetration hole,and is flush with adjoining surface. D. Supports,Anchors,and Seals 1. Provide factory-fabricated piping hangers and supports complying with MSS j SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size. a. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1, for piping larger than 4". b. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7, for piping 4" and less. C. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8. 2. Provide factory-fabricated hanger-rod attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturers published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger rods. a. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13. b. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15. C. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16. d. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17. 3. Provide factory-fabricated building attachments complying with MSS SP-58,of one of the following types listed, selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published Fire Protection (CW) 15300-16 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts prepare for application of specified coatings(if any). J. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test each natural section of each piping system independently, but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressures exceed valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time. 1. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following: a. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs. b. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below grade, or in exterior walls, caulked between sleeve and pipe. C. Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls, floors, ceilings and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except as detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect. Install sleeves so that piping will have free movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping run. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves 1/4" above level floor finish, and 3/4" above floor finish sloped to drain. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of con- crete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves. d. Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the following: Fill and pack annular space between sleeve and pipe with oakum,caulk with lead,on both sides. 2. Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside diameter or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe sleeve and extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas;prime paint finish for unoccupied areas. a. Pipe Escutcheons for all areas: Provide chrome plated sheet steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged. b. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe escutcheons of one of the following: Fire Protection (CW) 15300-15 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 5. Type "L" seamless drawn hard copper tubing with solder joint pressure fittings, where noted on the drawings. Co Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve permanently leak proof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections,within 1/16" misalign- ment tolerance. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping. D. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of building. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid parti- tions, except as indicated. E. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults, Elevator Machine Room, and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures unless unavoidable. Install drip pan under piping that must be run through electrical spaces. Any piping intended to be run through electrical spaces shall be reviewed by the Architect prior to installation. F. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compounder pipe joint tape(Teflon)where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed. G. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gaskets. H. Grooved Pipe Joints: Comply with fitting manufacturer's instructions for making grooves in pipe ends. Remove burrs and ream pipe ends. Assemble joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I. Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and Fire Protection (CW) 15300-14 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts during assembly with nuts and bolts. (7) Fittings: Grooved or shouldered end design to accept grooved mechanical couplings. Malleable Iron:ASTM A 47. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536. (8) Flanges: Conform to Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel bolt hole alignment. Malleable Iron: ASTM 47. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536. (9) Grooves: Conform to the following: Standard Steel: Square cut. Lightweight Steel: Roll grooved. (10) Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grooved piping products of the following: ITT Grinnell Corp. Victaulic Co. B. Piping above ground and within the building shall conform to all requirements of NFPA 13 and shall be as follows: 1. Exposed sprinkler piping, subject to vandalism (stair halls and similar areas), shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe, welded, suitable for 175 psi. working water pressure. 2. All concealed piping and all exposed sprinkler piping in Mechanical Equipment Rooms 1-1/2" and smaller, shall be at the option of the Fire Protec- tion Subcontractor, either Schedule 40 black steel pipe with screwed fittings or standard weight roll grooved pipe with grooved fittings. 3. All exposed sprinkler piping, 1-1/2" and smaller, shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with screwed fittings. 4. Schedule 40 seamless red brass pipe with brass screwed fittings suitable for 175 psi.working water pressure. Fire Protection (CW) 15300-13 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 53 or A 106 where close coiling or bending is required. a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 40. b. Fittings: Class 125, cast-iron threaded, ANSI B16.4, or flanged, ANSI B16.1. C. Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; cut-groove type for piping 2-1/2" and larger only. (1) Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135. (2) Pipe Weight: Schedule 10 for 5" and smaller; 0.134" wall thickness for 6". (3) Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; roll- groove or mechanical locking type. d. Grooved Piping Products(for use on pipes 2-1/2" and larger) (1) Coupling Housings: Malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47. (2) Coupling Housing: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536. (3) Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type, which engages grooved or shouldered pipe ends, encasing an elastomeric gasket which bridges pipe ends to create seal. Cast in two or more parts, secure together during assembly with nuts and bolts. Permit degree of contraction and expansion as speci- fied in manufacturer's latest published literature. (4) Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure responsive so that internal pressure serves to increase seal's tightness, constructed of elastomers having properties as designated by ASTM D 2000. (5) Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A 183, minimum tensile 110,000-psi. (6) Branch Stub-Ins: Upper housing with full locating collar for rigid positioning engaging machine-cut hole in pipe, encasing elastomeric gasket conforming to pipe outside diameter around hole, and lower housing with positioning lugs, secured together Fire Protection (CW) 15300-12 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 3. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass valve tags with printed enamel lettering, with piping system abbreviation in approximately 3/16" high letters and sequenced valve numbers approximately 3/8"high, and with 5/32"hole for fastener. Provide tags on all valves and control devices. a. Provide 1-1/8" sq.brass tags with black lettering. b. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. C. Submit valve schedule for piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves, which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses,by special "flags", in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals as specified in Division 1. d. For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display fi-ame, with screws for removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum, with SSB-grade sheet glass. e. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in rooms where indicated or,if not otherwise indicated,where directed by Architect. f. Furnish complete chart and flow diagram of entire system listing the valve number, fluid controlled, and zone reference location for all valves corresponding to the tag numbers. The chart shall be framed under glass and hung in the Fire Protection Equipment Room where directed. Furnish two(2)extra copies of the chart to the Architect. g. Furnish and install a laminated red phenolic plate with engraved white lettering for each zone control flow switch and isolation valve. Nameplates shall be located adjacent to all exposed and concealed valves, approximately 12"below finished ceiling. 2.2 PIPE,TUBE,AND FITTINGS A. Interior Piping 1. Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53,A 106 or A 120: except comply with ASTM A Fire Protection (CW) 15300-11 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts Architect, and all costs incidental to such changes shall be paid by this Subcontractor at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2-MATERIALS 2.1 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes,types,pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections;provide fittings of materials, which match pipe materials used in fire protection piping systems. Where more than one type of material or product is indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. Basic Identification 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical identification materials of one of the following: Allen Systems,Inc. Brady(W.H.)Co., ; Signmark Div. Industrial Safety Supply Co.,Inc. Seton Name Plate Corp. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid, snap-on, color-coded pipe markers,complying with ANSI A13.1. a. For external diameters less than 6",provide full-band pipe markers, extending 3600 around pipe at each location,fastened as follows: Snap-on application of pre-tensioned, semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. b. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature, which best describes piping system in each instance, as selected by Architect. C. Locate pipe markers as follows: (1) Near each valve and control device. (2) Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment. (3) Branch piping need not be marked. Fire Protection (CW) 15300-10 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions shall be indicated of concealed work, fire protection lines, valves, and zone flow switches. All changes must be clearly marked with a bubble drawn around the area of work effected by the change. C. Co-ordination of Trades 1. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall give full co-operation to the Subcontractors of other trades, and shall furnish any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay. 2. In areas where conflicts may occur, if so directed by the Architect, this Subcontractor shall prepare composite sketches at a suitable scale,not less than 1/4"= F-0", clearly showing how his work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades. 3. Piping and other equipment shall not be installed in congested and possible problem areas by this Subcontractor without first coordinating the installation of same with other trades and the Architect. This Subcontractor, at his own ex- pense, shall relocate all uncoordinated piping and other equipment installed should they interfere with the proper installation and mounting of electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, hung ceilings, and other structural finishes installed by other trades. 4. This Subcontractor shall co-ordinate the elevations of all piping and equipment in hung ceilings for the installation of recessed lighting fixtures, duct boxes, etc. Conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for a decision before the piping and/or equipment of other trades is installed. 5. In areas where, due to construction conditions, more than one trade is required to use common openings in chases, shafts and sleeves for the passage of conduits, raceways, piping, ductwork and other materials, this Subcontractor must plan and locate the positions of equipment to be furnished under this Section so that all items including piping and/or equipment of other trades may be accommodated within the space available. Location and positioning shall be done prior to installation of same and to the satisfaction of the Architect. 6. This Subcontractor, before installing his work, shall see that it does not interfere with the clearances required for finished columns, pilasters, partitions or walls, as shown on the Contract Architectural or Structural Drawings showing foundations,floor plans,roof plans, and details. 7. Piping work that is installed under this Contract which interferes with the architectural design or building structure, shall be changed as directed by the Fire Protection (CW) 15300-9 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The Manual shall include the following information: 1. Description of systems. 2. Description of start-up,operation, and shutdown. 3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 4. Lubrication chart. 5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 6. Valve chart. 7. List of recommended spare parts. 8. Copies of all service contracts. 9. Performance curves for pumps, etc. 10. Lists of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. 1.16 GUARANTEE A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one(1)year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Refer to Division 1 for Record Drawings. Fire Protection (CW) 15300-8 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts D. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, fiunishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. 1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and equipment to the building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. 1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the Fire Protection Subcontractor. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets,etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the individual Subcontractor. 1.14 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping shall be installed exposed except where piping is to be installed above new acoustic ceilings. Where ceilings are installed sprinklers shall be installed above and below the ceiling. B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above grade. 1.15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall Fire Protection (CW) 15300-7 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 3. The review of shop drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Fire Protection Subcontractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in shop drawings shall remain with the individual Subcontractor. 4. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which shop drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Fire Protection Subcontractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. 5. Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work, which indicates that work has been tested in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13, and also that system is operational,complete, and has no defects. 1.9 PERMITS,FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1.10 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1. 1.1 l PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his Bid. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. B. The Specifications and Plans are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall not scale the drawings. Fire Protection (CW) 15300-6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items. All piping shall be installed concealed in finished spaces. H. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. J. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications and shall field verify all existing conditions before ordering any F materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. 1.7 PRODUCTS t A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Fire Protection Subcontractor shall submit to the Architect eight (8) sets of catalogue cuts or manufacturers' data sheets, giving all details, dimensions,capacities,etc.of all materials to be furnished. B. Submit hydraulic calculations and scaled layout drawings for fire protection pipe and fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, locations, elevations and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate equipment. 1. Shop Drawings are subject to review and will require approval by Owner's insurer's rating organization (IRI Incorporated) and the Northampton Fire Department prior to submitting to the Architect for approval. 2. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check the shop drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review,making any and all changes,which may be required. Fire Protection (CW) 15300-5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials'instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. Review proposed system with said officials_prior to commencing work. 1.6 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Fire Protection Subcontractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Fire Protection Subcontractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Fire Protection Subcontractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Fire Protection Subcontractor to give proper information, as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. F. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. In no case shall piping be installed laterally in thickness of slab or deck. G. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and _Wk Fire Protection (CW) 15300-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts culations or the installation of revised heads, provided the revised heads are UL listed and F.M. approved and meet NFPA 13, Northampton Fire Department, and (IRI) Insurance Underwriter's criteria. Additionally, all heads shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 recommendations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire protection piping systems products, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five(5)years. B. NFPA Code: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler System". C. FM Compliance: Comply with Factory Mutual "Approval Guide". D. FM Labels: Provide sprinkler products bearing FM approval labels. E. UL Labels: Provide fire sprinkler piping products, which have been approved and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. F. Local Fire Department/Marshall Regulations: Comply with governing regulations pertaining to fire sprinkler piping. Review proposed system with said officials prior to commencing work. G. Final installation of system is subject to approval by Owner's insurer's rating organization and local Fire Department. H. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in the product specification. I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1.5 CODES,ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes,rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. Fire Protection (CW) 15300-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton,Massachusetts 8. Submit plans and calculations to the colleges Insurance Underwriter (IRI Insurance company C/o HSB Industrial Risk Insurers, 85 Woodland Street, PO Box 5010, Hartford,CT. (Attn: Mr. David M. Goush) for review and approval. B. Related work, to be performed under other sections of his Specification shall include the following: 1. Wiring of flow switches, tamper switches, electric bell and control panel back to the fire alarm panel shall be by the Electrical Subcontractor, coordinated and as directed by the Fire Protection Subcontractor. 2. Cutting and patching. C. All systems and equipment furnished under this section which employ computers, micro-processors, or chips shall be "Year 2000 compliant" i.e., the changing of the calendar time from 1999-2000 shall not result in any malfunction or degradation of the system's or equipment's function. Manufacture's written certification of compliance shall be included with the system or equipment shop drawing submittal. 1.3 SYSTEM DESIGN A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform a water flow test, and with this information, shall calculate pipe sizes and sprinkler head configuration and orifice sizes in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Sprinkler head and pipe run locations, as shown on the drawings, are to be interpreted as diagrammatic only. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall produce a design based on actual available water pressure and submit it to the Architect for approval before beginning fabrication and installation. C. Design Criteria: Pipe sizing and sprinkler head layout shown on the drawings is provided to indicate a suggested pipe routing, zoning, and sprinkler head location, and shall not be used for estimating purposes. Location of piping and heads shall be co- ordinated with all other trades. Actual pipe sizing, types of heads, and layout shall be based on a hydraulically designed system in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13, the Northampton Fire Department, and the Insurance Underwriter (I.R.I.). Location of sprinkler heads, in relation to the ceiling light hazard occupancy. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall prepare working drawings and hydraulic calculations per NFPA 13 and shall obtain Northampton Fire Department and the Colleges Insurance Underwriter approval prior to start of work. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform water flow tests or obtain water flow data in writing from local authority. Co- ordinate work of this Section with all trades to avoid interference with ductwork, HVAC and plumbing, piping, electrical work, structure, etc. Final sprinkler head locations shall be subject to Architect's approval. The number of heads and pipe sizes may be increased or reduced due to hydraulic cal- Fire Protection (CW) 15300-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts SECTION 15300-FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of Division 1, and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work under this, Section whether or not, such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, appurtenances and services necessary for, and reasonably incidental to, the complete installation of all fire protection work specified herein and/or indicated on the drawings,including,but not limited to,the following: 1. Fire protection service piping from the existing service line located in the existing basement of Wilder House. 2. Complete dry pipe automatic sprinkler system. System shall be installed in all spaces, unless otherwise noted, including renovation to existing building sprinkler system. 3. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall furnish all labor and materials required for his own hoisting, rigging, and scaffolding during the entire course of the project. 4. Provide and install double check valve backflow preventer assembly per DEP requirements on the existing service line located in Wilder House. 5. Dry pipe alarm check valve stations complete with, but not necessarily limited to, line size valve, retarding chamber, electric and hydraulic alarms, full indicating,control,drain trim,and air compressor. 6. Disconnect and remove all existing sprinkler heads and piping made obsolete by or interfering with new construction. 7. Disconnect and remove all existing heads and install new chrome plated, quick responses heads in all spaces. Fire Protection (CW) 15300-1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA 3.6 HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATOR SCHEDULE 1. Type: Holeless single-acting, beside-the-car, single cylinder. 2. Rated Load: 2500 lb. 3. Rated Speed: 125 ft./min.. 4. Car Enclosures: As follows: a. Inside Dimensions: As follows: 1) Width: 84 inches. 2) Depth: 51.50 inches. 3) Height: 96 inches. b. Front Walls: Stainless steel with integral car door frames. C. Side and Rear Walls: Plastic laminate. d. Door Faces(Interior): Stainless steel. e. Ceiling: Aluminum Eggcrate f. Handrails at side and rear walls: Stainless Steel g. Floor prepared to receive carpet(specified in Division 9 Section"Carpet") 5. Hoistway Entrances: As follows: a. Size: 42 by 84 inches. b. Type: Single-speed side slide. C. Frames: Baked enamel. d. Doors: Baked enamel. 6. Additional Requirements: As follows: a. Provide local code inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with stainless-steel frame. b. Provide protective blanket hooks in each car and one complete set of full-height blankets. END OF SECTION 14240 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240- 8 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA F. Install piping above the floor,where possible. G. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, if any, as recommended by manufactur- ers. H. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, delay installation of sills and frames until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimen- sion at each landing. I. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch, up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel. J. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landings. Fill space under sills solidly with non- shrink, nonmetallic grout. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing: Upon nominal completion of elevator installation, and before permitting use(either temporary or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and rec- ommended by the"Code" and by governing regulations and agencies. B. Advise Owner,Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times tests are to be performed on elevators. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper use, operations, and daily maintenance of elevators. Re- view emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of failure in operation and other building emergencies. Train Owner's personnel in procedures to follow in identifying sources of operational failures or malfunctions. Confer with Owner on requirements for a complete elevator maintenance program. B. Make a final check of each elevator operation with Owner's personnel present and just prior to date of Substantial Completion. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Temporary Use: Do not use elevators for construction purposes . 1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect ele- vators. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so that no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to elevator manufac- turer and Installer, that ensure elevators are without damage or deterioration at the time of Sub- stantial Completion. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240- 7 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA 2.8 PASSENGER HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hollow-metal, sliding, door-and-frame hoistway en- trances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Match car doors for size, number of panels, and door movement. Provide frame size and profile to coordinate with hoistway wall construction. B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide selections indicated; provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 1. Satin Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed stainless-steel sheet, ASTM A 167, Type 302 or 304, with No. 4 satin finish. 2. Satin Stainless-Steel Panels: Flush construction, fabricated from ASTM A 167,Type 302 or 304 stainless steel, with No. 4 satin finish. 3. Aluminum Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thickness, mill fin- ish. 4. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongas- eous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for grouting door sills and similar applications. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of elevator work. Examine hoistways, hoistway openings, pits, and machine rooms, as constructed; verify critical dimensions; and ex- amine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Install plunger-cylinder units plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel; anchor securely in place, supported at the pit floor. C. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, in- spection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for work- manship and for qualifications of welding operators. D. Coordination: Coordinate elevator work with work of other trades for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays. Use established benchmarks, lines, and levels to ensure dimen- sional coordination of the Work. E. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts de- signed to effectively prevent transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby, eliminate sources of structure-borne noise from elevator system. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240- 6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA I, Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide hall push-button stations at each landing for each elevator. 1. Provide units with flat faceplate designed for mounting on wall with body of units re- cessed in wall: 2-button stations at intermediate landings; 1-button stations with direction indication at terminal landings. J. Hall Lanterns: Provide units with illuminated arrows, but provide single arrow at terminal landings. Match materials, finishes, and mounting method of hall push-button stations. 1. Place lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance, unless otherwise shown. Mount at minimum of 72 inches above finished floor. 2. With each lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down. K. Hall Position Indicator: Provide illuminated-signal type or digital-display type, located above each hoistway entrance at ground floor. Match materials, finishes, and mounting method of hall push-button stations. 2.6 DOOR SAFETY DEVICES A. Infrared Array: Provide safety device with a uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor- controlled infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more of the light beams shall cause the doors to stop and reopen. 1. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for a predetermined adjust- able time period, through activating detection device or door edge device, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to close at reduced rate of speed. 2.7 PASSENGER ELEVATOR CAR ENCLOSURES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard car enclosures of the selections indicated Include ventilation, lighting, access doors, doors, power door operators, sills(thresholds), trim, accesso- ries, and wall and ceiling finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard flush-panel horizontal- sliding doors of type indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard protective edge trim system for door and wall panels, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Floor finish is specified in another Section. B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide selections indicated for each car enclosure surface; provide manufacturer's standards,but not less than the following: 1. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car. 2. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment. 3. Luminous Ceiling: Fluorescent light fixtures and ceiling panels of translucent acrylic or other permanent rigid plastic complying with flammability requirements. 4. Handrails: Provide manufacturer's standard stainless-steel handrails on side walls and back wall, unless otherwise indicated. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240- 5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA 1. Keyswitch operation feature with car and hall push buttons activated and deactivated by security keyswitches. 2.5 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide signal equipment for each elevator or group of elevators complying with re- quirements indicated below. 1. Illuminated hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate of acrylic or other permanent translucent plastic. 2. Except for buttons and illuminated elements, fabricate signal equipment with exposed surfaces as follows: a. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel. b. Hall Fixtures: Satin stainless steel. B. Car Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard semirecessed car control station in each car. Include call buttons for each landing served and other buttons, switches, and controls re- quired for specified car operation. Provide operating device symbols as required by the"Code." Mark other buttons and switches with manufacturer's standard identification for required use or function. Mount in return panel adjacent to car door, if not otherwise indicated. 1. Mount controls as shown or scheduled and at heights complying with ADA Accessibility Guidelines. C. Emergency Communication System: Provide hands-free audio and visual 2-way emergency communication between each car and a 24-hour monitoring service. System automatically dials preprogrammed number of monitoring service and identifies elevator location to monitoring service. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet complete with identification, instructions for use, and battery back-up power supply, and complies with ADA regulations. D. Manufacturer: Communications Equipment and Engineering Co, Inc., 1580 N.W. 65`h Ave., Plantation, FL 33313 E. Model: SSP-379-D-ADA with braille plate S/N 33693-33694 . F. Car-Top Alarm: Provide switches on top emergency exits that will cause alarm to sound when cover is opened. G. Car Position Indicator: For passenger elevator cars, provide either illuminated-signal type, digital-display type, or segmented type, located above the car door or above the car control sta- tion. Also provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or pass- ing each of the floors served. 1. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car control station. H. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide 1 hall push-button station at each landing for each elevator or group of elevators, but not less than 1 station for each 4 elevators in a group. For each group of passenger elevators,at location most convenient for approaching passengers. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hydraulic elevators by one of the following: 1. Schindler Elevator Corp. 2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Where components are not other- wise indicated, provide standard components, published by manufacturer as included in stan- dard preengineered elevator systems and as required for a complete system. B. Hydraulic Machines and Elevator Equipment: Provide hydraulic plunger-cylinder units of type indicated below, with electric pump-tank-control system equipment in machine room as indi- cated. I. Hydraulic Machines: Holeless single-acting, beside-the-car, hydraulic plunger-cylinder units. 2. Pump Unit: Positive displacement pump with a maximum of 10 percent variation be- tween no load and full load and fan-cooled squirrel cage induction motor. a. Provide motor with wye-delta starting. C. Power Supply: 208 V, 60 Hz,3 phase. D. Piping: Provide size, type, and weight piping recommended by manufacturer, and provide iso- lation couplings to prevent sound/vibration transmissions from power unit. E. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for in- stalling guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work where installation of de- vices is specked in another Specification Section. F. Car Frame and Platform: Welded steel units. 2.3 OPERATION SYSTEMS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system for each elevator or group of elevators of the type of operation indicated. Provide non-proprietary controls which will allow fair competitive bidding for maintenance contracts. B. Single Elevator--Passenger: Provide "Selective-Collective Automatic Operation" as defined in ASME Al7.1. 2.4 AUXILIARY OPERATIONS A. Security Features: In addition to above operational features, provide the following security features for passenger elevators, except where otherwise indicated. Security features shall not affect emergency firefighters'service. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA B. Product Data for each elevator including capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety '"""► features, controls, finishes,and similar information. C. Shop Drawings for each elevator showing plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details in- dicating service at each landing, coordination with building structure, and relationships with other construction. Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and locations of signals. Include maximum and average power demands. D. Samples of exposed finishes for car, hoistway doors, and signal equipment; 3-inch square sam- ples of sheet materials; and 4-inch lengths of running trim members. E. Maintenance manuals for each different hydraulic elevator, including operation and mainte- nance instructions, parts listing with sources indicated, recommended parts inventory listing, emergency instructions, and similar information. Include all diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel. Submit for Owner's informa- tion at project closeout as specified in Division 1. F. Inspection and acceptance certificates and operating permits as required by governing authori- ties for normal, unrestricted elevator use. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage the elevator manufacturer or an experienced Installer approved by the elevator manufacturer who has completed elevator installations similar in material, de- sign, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service per- formance. B. Regulatory Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, comply with the applica- ble provisions of the following: 1. ASME Al 7.1, "Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators,"referred to as the"Code." a. Seismic Zone: Comply with code requirements for seismic risk zone 2. 1.6 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The elevator warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under re- quirements of the Contract Documents. B. Standard Elevator Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by manufacturer agreeing to re- pair,restore, or replace defective elevator work within the specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA SECTION 14240-HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS P,A,KT 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hydraulic passenger elevators. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in concrete. 2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in masonry. 3. Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications"for hot-rolled steel subsills and entrance frames. 4. Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications"for pit ladders. 5. Division 9 Sections for finish flooring in elevator cars. 6. Division 15 Sections for ventilating hoistways and machine rooms. 7. Division 16 Sections for electrical service to elevators, including fused disconnect switches, standby power source, and transfer switch. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Hydraulic Elevators: Elevators in which cars are hoisted either directly or indirectly by action of a hydraulic plunger and cylinder (jack); with other components of the Work, including fluid storage tank, pump, piping, valves, car enclosures, hoistway entrances, operation systems, sig- nal equipment, guide rails, electrical wiring, roping(roped hydraulic applications), buffers, and devices for operations, safety, security, required performance at rated speed and capacity, and for complete elevator installation. B. Defective Elevator Work: Operation or control system failures; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe condi- tions;the need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual,un- expected, and unsatisfactory conditions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Divi- sion 1 Specification Sections. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA 1.4 INSTALLATION A. Install window shades in accordance with manufacturer's installation procedures and accepted shop drawings. B. Assure adequate clearance to permit unencumbered operation. C. Position units plumb and rue,and securely anchor in place with brackets,clips, and fasteners. D. Adjust clearances and overlaps to insure free operation. E. Replace damaged items with new material F. Repair surfaces damaged by improper installation G. Remove protective coverings and devices H. Clean soiled components and leave work site free of debris. END OF SECTION 12500 SHADES 12500-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA SECTION 12500- SHADES PARTI -GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01300 Submittals for submittal provisions and procedures. Approval by the Architect must be obtained prior to delivery of materials to the site. B. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings for all work. Provide details of shade installation, bracket location,and anchorage. C. Samples: Submit samples of the following materials to the Architect for approval. 1. Full size window shade unit, complete with roller, shade, mounting brackets, and accessories. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers: All shades shall be made in the United States and shall be the products of Draper,Graber,Joanna, or approved equal. B. Requirement of Regulatory Agencies: Cloth used in shades shall comply with flame resistance requirements of the Massachusetts Basic Building Code. C. Shade roller shall be manufacturer's standard spring-roller type sized to meet the width and height of window. D. Shade cloth shall be flame resistant opaque vinyl coated fiberglass. Shades shall be Dura- Shield, Plain Hem, Beige, textured, as manufactured by Colony Shade, Danielson, CT 06239, 1-800-447-4757. E. Hem slat shall be smooth straight grained pine. F. Brackets shall be cadmium plated stamped steel of size and type to suite mounting requirements. G. Pull cord shall be No. 4 braided nylon, minimum 200 lb. breaking strength. Provide manufacturer's standard bright finished metal pull ring for each pull down cord. 1.3 EXECUTION A. Cut shade cloth square and true, hemmed at bottom and top with lock stitching, of such width that the sides are within '/4" from roller ends. Secure cloth to roller with metal window shade tacks. B. Insert slat into operating hem and secure to cloth with metal eyelet. SHADES 12500- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA E. Solid Wood: Clear, dry, sound, and free of defects selected from First Grade lumber as defined by NHLA. F. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4,Class 1,tempered. 2.3 CASEWORK HARDWARE A. General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with ANSI A156.9,of type,material,size,and finish as selected from manufacturer's standard choices. 1. Provide 4"wire pulls for drawers and doors with brushed stainless steel finish. 2.4 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Five Year Limited Warranty PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install casework with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces using concealed shims. Where casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match casework face. B. Install casework without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessories as indicated. C. Install casework and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet D. Fasten unit of casework to adjacent unit and into structural support members of wall construction with #10 sheet metal or wood screws with washer head or washer. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and lubricate to provide unencumbered operation. B. Clean casework on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 12372 KITCHEN CASEWORK 12372-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. KCMA Certification: Provide kitchen casework with Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (KCMA) "Certified Cabinet" seal affixed in a semiexposed location of each unit, showing compliance with above standard. A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain kitchen casework from one source of a single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver casework as factory-assembled units,packaged individually. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Comply with casework manufacturer's written requirements for temperature and humidity conditions during storage and installation. Do not install casework until these conditions have been attained and stabilized. B. Field Measurements: Verify casework dimensions by field measurements. Verify kitchen casework can be installed in compliance with the original design and referenced standards. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: 1. Kitchen Casework: a. Yorktowne,Inc.: Premier Collection b. Style: Foxridge C. Material: Maple d. Finish: Natural e. Door Style: Frame and Recessed panel f. Overlay: Standard 2.2 CABINET MATERIALS,GENERAL A. Sizes,dimensions,and thicknesses given are minimum dimensions. B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1,mat-formed particleboard, Grade 1-M-2 with minimum density of 40 pcf internal bond of 60 psi,and minimum screw-holding capacity of 225 lbs. on faces and 2001bs. on edges. C. Hardwood Plywood: ANSUHPMA HP hardwood and decorative plywood,Good Grade(1)or better. D. Particleboard Core Plywood: ANSIWMA HP hardwood and decorative plywood, Good Grade (1) or better. KITCHEN CASEWORK 12372-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 12372-KITCHEN CASEWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes wood-faced kitchen cabinets and countertops.ADA Compliant. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Surfaces: Surfaces visible when drawers and opaque doors are closed;behind clear glass doors; bottoms of casework 43 inches or more above finished floor. B. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Surfaces which become visible when opaque doors are open or drawers are extended;bottoms of casework are more than 30 inches and less than 42 inches above finished floor. C. Concealed Surfaces: Surfaces considered concealed when surfaces not visible after installation;bottoms of casework less than 30 inches above finished floor; tops of casework over 78 inches above finished floor and not visible from an upper level;stretchers,blocking,and components concealed by drawers. D. Flush Overlay: Door and drawer faces cover cabinet frame with space between faces sufficient for operating clearance. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each casework type specified. C. Product data for each hardware type specified. D. Shop drawings for casework showing location and size, accessories, materials, finishes, and filler panels. Include fully dimensioned plans,elevations,and anchorage details to countertop and walls. E. Samples for verification purposes in full-size units of each type of material indicated; in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. " I. One unit of each type of exposed hardware. KITCHEN CASEWORK 12372- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA Q c O Q (D U) a)� (D o a) a) cn Q� U) (D N CO co U 0-N a) Q ° } = a) Q j C/)C — Q N'i � � Q N CD 0) O ca C � � N co L C � CO D :3 C O O �o C15 � a) a) M , o � O� a E m N -O 05 Cd ca N cn +� O a> m � � � � � � aa)i � � � � co 0) CV CV fV — U Z Co ° U Q � c C') � 0 -0 U U - CO)O >J L m O m C co+� O N CO CO O O �a N O J ) J J J O � U 0 O O N (0 CM— � Q LL U U cf) -0 C cu �- o 0 ' "' � a� co O C m cri 1 8 M ° 0) CO >' a >. Q W 0T0c � mM � mao � o � V 1 70 "It C0 (D � CO � O o Q C5 U N � _(3) C\1 � It ND_ D N � 0 - U a) _a O_ c:) QOO " o `er QQ QQ (00 `:> U3 3 � Q O 0 N C) CD r__ N 000 CA CN co co r 0 Qz mcncoCl� ooti � ° + U w _0 C13 O A � N O N C _ cr Q O CTS �- i U w co O D = O CO m m C j CO Q O Cf) Q Q � — ° U Q o ol� °o Q m c� �- C'3 C3 C3 c� o m _ CO `� m a) U) tip a - o o a) ' 3 Q Z 3 3 a' o -0 �- � c°nCS � � � M° U) � tn � � cCi) F° cni- z co END OF SE TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA C. Framed Mirror Units, General: Fabricate frames for glass mirror units to accommodate wood, felt, , plastic, or other glass edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that will permit rigid,tamperproof glass installation and prevent moisture accumulation,as follows: 1. Provide galvanized-steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 inch and full mirror size, with nonabsorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler material. D. Mirror Unit Hangers: Provide system for mounting mirror units that will permit rigid,tamperproof and theftproof installation,as follows: 1. One-piece, galvanized-steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install toilet accessory units according to manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate as recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed,tamperproof manner with special hangers,toggle bolts, or screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's instructions for type of substrate involved. C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbt complying with ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces strictly according to manufacturer's recommendations after removing temporary labels and protective coatings. 100041 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA A. Supplied by owner, installed by General Contractor 2.7 SOAP DISPENSERS A. Supplied by owner,installed by General Contractor 18 SHOWER AND BATH.ACCESSORIES A. Shower Curtain Rod, Heavy-Duty: 1-1/4 inch o.d., 0.05 inch stainless steel, satin finish; furnish with 3 inch o.d., minimum 0.04 inch stainless steel flanges with satin finish, designed for exposed fasteners ASI,Inc.Mod.No. 1204 in. 36"and 60"lengths. B. Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless steel,spring wire curtain hooks with snap fasteners, sized to accommodate specified curtain rod size. Provide one hook per curtain grommet. C. Towel Bar: 24 inch long, satin-finished, Type 304 stainless steel tubular (3/4 inch square) bar and rectangular end brackets. Provide galvanized backplates for concealed mounting. ASI, Inc. Mod. No. 7360-24. 2.9 FOLDING TUB SEAT 1. Folding Phenolic and Stainless Steel tub seat — ADA Compliant. Manufacturer shall supply modified hinge to allow seat to clear grab barswhen in upright position. ASI, Inc. Model No. 8358 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. Mop and Broom Holder: 0.05 inch, Type 304, stainless steel hat channel with spring-loaded, rubber, cam-type mop/broom holders. Provide unit 36 inches long and complete with four holders. ASI, Inc. Model No. 8215-4. B. Double-Prong Robe Hook: Heavy-duty stainless steel robe hook. ASI,Inc.Model No. 7345 2.11 MIRROR UNITS A. Standard Stainless Steel Framed Mirror Units: Fabricate frame with channel shapes not less than 0.04 inch,with square corners carefully mitered to hairline joints and mechanically interlocked. Provide in Type 430 bright polished finish. ASI,Inc. 0620 Series. Sizes as scheduled on drawings. 2.12 FABRICATION A. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints,exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous stainless steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible. B. Recessed Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all-welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors or access panels with full-length, stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide toilet accessories as listed in the schedule shown on drawings. 2.2 MATERIALS,GENERAL A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304,with polished No.4 finish,0.034 inch minimum thickness. B. Brass: Leaded and unleaded, flat products, ASTM B 19; rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges,ASTM B 16;Castings,ASTM B 30. C. Sheet Steel: Cold-rolled, commercial quality ASTM A 366, 0.04 inch minimum. Surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish. D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 527 G60. E. Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on base metal,ASTM B 456,Type SC 2. F. Mirror Glass: Nominal 6.0 mm thick, conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q2, and with silvering,electro-plated copper coating,and protective organic coating. G. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153,hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. H. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, or of galvanized steel where concealed. 1. Keyless Access: Provide units for keyless access to units requiring internal access for servicing, re- supply,etc. 2.3 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS A. Double-Roll Dispenser: Bobrick Mod.No.B-2740. 2.4 TOWEL DISPENSER A. Supplied by owner,installed by General Contractor. 2.5 GRAB BARS A. Stainless Steel Type: Provide grab bars with wall thickness not less than 0.05 inch and as follows: 1. Mounting: Concealed,manufacturer's standard flanges and anchorages. 2. Clearance: 1-1/2 inch clearance between wall surface and inside face of bar. 3. Gripping Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard nonslip texture.(Peened) 4. Heavy-Duty Size: Outside diameter of 1-1/2 inches. 2.6 SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL UNITS TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 4 SECTION 10800-TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes toilet and bath accessory items as scheduled. B. Toilet compartments and related accessories are specified in Division 10. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections. B. Product data for each toilet accessory item specified, including construction details relative to materials, dimensions,gages,profiles,mounting method,specified options,and finishes. C. Samples of each toilet accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements. Acceptable full-size samples will be returned and may be used in the Work. D. Setting drawings where cutouts are required in other work, including templates, substrate preparation instructions,and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchorage devices. E. Maintenance instructions including replaceable parts and service recommendations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish accessory manufacturers' standard inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in concrete or built into masonry. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid interference with and ensure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet accessory items. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA B. Overhead-Braced-and-Floor-Anchored Compartments: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion- resistant supports,leveling mechanism,fasteners,and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. C. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch-wide in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch-wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch-wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible. 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit with combination rubber- faced door strike and keeper designed for emergency access. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible. 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. 4. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit that complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at out-swinging doors. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels and not more than 1 inch between panels and walls. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Secure panels to walls and panels with not less than 2 stirrup brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. B. Overhead-Braced-and-Floor-Anchored Compartments: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than 2 fasteners. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure toilet compartments and screens are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 -3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. MISCO Partitions 2. Santana Products,Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS r a A. General: Provide materials that have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed f surfaces that exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material,or other imperfections on finished units are unacceptable. B. Solid-Plastic, Polymer Resin: High-density polyethylene ( PE) with homogenous color throughout. ! Provide material not less than 1 inch thick with seamless construction and eased edges in color and t pattern as follows: f 1. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as selected by Architect from a manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns. C. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves(Caps): ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304 stainless steel,not less than 0.0312 inch thick and 3 inches high, finished to match hardware. I D. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's standard ear or U-brackets for attaching panels and screens to walls and pilasters of the following material: 1. Material: Stainless steel. E. Full-Height(Continuous)Brackets: Manufacturer's standard design for attaching panels and screens to walls and pilasters of the following material: 1. Material: Stainless steel. F. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories of the following material: 1. Material: Stainless steel. G. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile in manufacturer's standard finish. H. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome- plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware,with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Provide standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment system. Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive compartment-mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars,as indicated. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 10155 -TOILET COMPARTMENTS DART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes toilet compartments and screens as follows: 1. Type: Solid-plastic,polymer resin. 2. Compartment Style: Overhead braced and floor anchored. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 10 "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet paper holders, grab bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and style of toilet compartment and screen specified. Include details of construction relative to materials, fabrication, and installation. Include details of anchors, hardware, and fastenings. B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of toilet compartment and screen assemblies. Include plans,elevations,sections,details,and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of sections of actual units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of compartment or screen indicated. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating units without field measurements. Coordinate supports, adjacent construction, and fixture locations to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2-PRODUCTS TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA PRODUCT DATA SHEET l -VINYL WALL COVERING A. Corridors scheduled for vinyl wall covering,provide: 1. Manufacturer: Tower Contract Wall Covering. 2. Style: Ravello Type II 3. Color: Chablis 4. Code T2-RL-10 5. Contact: Brewster Wallcovering, 1-800-366-1701 B. Student Rooms scheduled for vinyl wall covering,provide: 1. Manufacturer: Exxes 54 2. Style: Stoneacre 1 3. Type: 1 4. Color: White sand 5. Code: SE-33-38 6. Contact:Brewster Wallcovering, 1-800-366-1701 C. Comstock Reception scheduled for vinyl wall covering,provide: 1. Manufacturer: Brunschwig&Fils 2. Number: S380F.06 3. Pattern: Perugia 4. Color: Ivory,China Rose 5. Width: 27" ** 6. Contact: Brunschwig&Fils, 1-800-992-5446 D. Wilder Reception scheduled for vinyl wall covering,provide: 1. Manufacturer: Brunschwig&Fils 2. Number: S380B.06 3. Pattern: Perugia 4. Color: Pearl,Genoa Blue 5. Width: 27" 6. Contact: Brunschwig&Fils, 1-800-992-5446 D. Comstock Dining Room scheduled for vinyl wall covering,provide: 1. Manufacturer: Brunschwig&Fils 2. Number: S379F.06 3. Pattern: Latina 4. Color: Ivory,China Rose 5. Contact: Brunschwig&Fils, 1-800-992-5446 E. Wilder Dining Room scheduled for vinyl wall covering,provide: 1. Manufacturer: Brunschwig&Fils 2. Number: S379B.06 3. Pattern: Latina 4. Color: Pearl,Genoa Blue 5. Contact: Brunschwig&Fils, 1-800-992-5446 END OF SECTION 09950 WALL COVERINGS 09950-5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA D. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 3 inches from inside corners. No horizontal seams. E. Remove air bubbles,wrinkles,blisters,and other defects. F. Trim edges for color uniformity,pattern match,and tight closure at seams and edges. Butt seams. CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams,perimeter edges,and adjacent surfaces. B. Use cleaning methods recommended by wall covering manufacturer. C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. WALL COVERINGS 09950-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Wall Liner: Nonwoven, synthetic underlayment and adhesive as recommended by wall covering manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of Work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew, oil, grease,incompatible primers,dirt,and old adhesive. C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking,unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finishes with fine sandpaper. E. Prime surfaces if required by vinyl wall covering manufacturer. F. Inspect surfaces and report to General Contractor any conditions which will not allow proper installation of wall coverings. G. Start of installation by wall covering installer shall be construed as acceptance of surfaces and conditions in a particular area. H. Install wall liner, with no gaps or overlaps, where required by wall covering manufacturer. Form smooth wrinkle-free surface for finished installation. Do not begin wall covering installation until wall liner has dried. I. Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. General: Comply with wall coverings manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated,except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Cut wall covering panels in roll number sequence. Change run numbers at partition breaks and corners only. C. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps. WALL COVERINGS 09950-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. .wu, C. Mockups: Prior to installing wall covering,construct mockups for each form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. 1. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work. 5. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. a. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may become part of the completed Work. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall covering until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a lighting level of not less than 15 foot-candles(160 lux) is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering. C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by the wall covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage,and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Rolls of Wall Covering Material: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the product specified in each wall covering Product Data sheet at end of this Section. 2.2 ADHESIVES A. General: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive, for use with specific wood-veneer wall covering and substrate application,as recommended by wall covering manufacturer. WALL COVERINGS 09950-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 09950-WALL COVERINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl wall covering. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 9 Section"Painting"for priming wall surfaces. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of product specified. Include data on physical characteristics,durability, fade resistance,and flame-resistance characteristics. C. Samples for verification in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. 1. Wall Covering Material: Full-width sample, not less than 36 inches long, from dye lot used for the Work. D. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of wall coverings certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. E. Maintenance data for wall covering to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed 5 projects similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide wall coverings with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. WALL COVERINGS 09950- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 A. Carpet Type A: (First floor Comstock,Wilder and elevator cab floors) 1. Manufacturer: Shaw Commercial 2. Style Name: Artesia BL 3. Style No.: 50418 4. Color name:Picasso 5. Color No.: 18413 6. Fiber Product; Monsanto ULTRA V.I.P. BCF Nylon 6.6 7. Gauge: I/10 8. Finished Pile Thickness 0.144 inch 9. Production Weight: 28 ozs/yd. 10. Dye Method: Yarn Dyed 11. Secondary Backing: U1traLoc MPC 12. Density: 7,000 ozs./yd. B. Carpet Type B: (Comstock upper floors) 1. Manufacturer: Shaw Commercial 2. Style Name: Surfaces BL 3. Color Name: Masonry 4. Color No.: 20800 5. Fiber Product: 100%Solutia Ultra VIP VCF Nylon 6. Gauge: 1/10 7. Fnished Pile Thickness: 0.185 8. Production Weight: 32 oz. 9. Dye Method: Yarn Dye 10. Secondary Backing Ultraloc WC 11. Density: 6227 C. Carpet Type C: (Wilder upper floors) 1. Manufacturer: Shaw Commercial 2. Style Name: Surfaces BL 3. Color Name: Night Sky 4. Color No.: 20470 5. Fiber Product: 100%Solutia Ultra VIP VCF Nylon 6. Gauge: 1/10 7. Fnished Pile Thickness: 0.185 8. Production Weight: 32 oz. 9. Dye Method: Yarn Dye 12. Secondary Backing Ultraloc MPC 13. Density: 6227 END OF SECTION 09680 IMIK CARPET 09680-6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 3.5 PROTECTION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 15: "Protection of Indoor Installation." B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure carpet is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. low CARPET 09680-5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA B. Level subfloor within 1/4 inch in 10 feet, noncumulative, in all directions. Sand or grind protrusions, „ bumps,and ridges. Patch and repair cracks and rough areas. Fill depressions. 1. Use leveling and patching compounds to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in subfloor as recommended by the following: a. Carpet manufacturer. b. Carpet cushion manufacturer. C. Remove subfloor coatings,including curing compounds,and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap,wax,oil,or silicone. D. Broom or vacuum clean subfloors to be covered with carpet. Following cleaning, examine subfloors for moisture,alkaline salts,carbonation,or dust. E. Wood-Subfloor Preparation: Apply wood-floor sealer, according to manufacturer's directions, where recommended by the following: I. Carpet manufacturer. 2. Carpet cushion manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Direct Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104,Section 8: "Direct Glue-Down." B. Stretch-in Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 11: "Stretch-in Utilizing Tackless Strip." C. Comply with carpet manufacturer's recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways,center seams under door in closed position. Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpet. D. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces,permanent fixtures,and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. E. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves,and similar openings. F. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. G. Install carpet cushion seams at 90-degree angle with carpet seams. H. Use seamless installation in corridors. 3.4 CLEANING A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation. 1. Remove visible adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. -am* 2. Remove protruding yarns from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. CARPET 09680-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the products specified in each carpet Product Data sheet at end of this Section. 2.2 CARPET CUSHION A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the products specified in each carpet cushion Product Data sheet at end of this Section. 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: As recommended by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. 2. Carpet cushion manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated and to comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet as recommended by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. C. Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water-resistant plywood in strips as required to match cushion thickness and in compliance with CRI 104, 11.3. D. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine subfloors and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of carpet. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Verify that subfloors and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified in this Section and those of the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. 2. Carpet cushion manufacturer. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with carpet manufacturer's installation recommendations to prepare substrates indicated to receive carpet installation. CARPET 09680-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board (FCIB) or who can demonstrate compliance with FCIB certification program requirements. B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of carpet from one source and by a single manufacturer. C. Carpet Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide carpet with the following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify carpet with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less per ASTM E 84. D. Carpet Cushion Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide carpet cushion with the following fire-test- response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify carpet cushion with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. a. Flame spread: 25 or less per STM E84 b. Smoke Developed: 450 or less per ASTM E84 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104, Section 5: "Storage and Handling." B. Deliver materials to Project site in original factory wrappings and containers, labeled with identification of manufacturer,brand name,and lot number. C. Store materials on-site in original undamaged packages, inside well-ventilated area protected from weather,moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures, and humidity. Lay flat, with continuous blocking off ground. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6: "Site Conditions." B. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until space is enclosed and weatherproof; wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. CARPET 09680-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 09680-CARPET PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes carpet,carpet cushion,and installation. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry" for subflooring and underlayment. . 2. Division 9 Section 'Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for materials, installation and transition edges. 3. Division 14 Section"Elevator"for carpet installation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of carpet material, carpet cushion, and installation accessory specified. Submit manufacturer's printed data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and fire-test- response characteristics. Submit methods of installation for each type of substrate. C. Samples for verification of the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes, showing the full range of color,texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work. Label each sample with manufacturer's name, material type, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and carpet schedule. Submit the following: 1. 12-inch-square Samples of each type of carpet material required. 2. 6-inch Samples of each type of carpet cushion. D. Schedule of carpet using same room designations indicated on Drawings. E. Maintenance data for carpet and cushion to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet and carpet cushion, including manufacturer's recommended frequency for maintaining carpet. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. Include cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE CARPET 09680- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA ,,,, 2. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over sheet vinyl floor coverings. Place plywood or hardboard panels over floor coverings and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. C. Clean resilient sheet flooring not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean sheet vinyl floor coverings by method recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09666 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666-5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1. Maintain uniformity of sheet vinyl floor covering direction. 2. Arrange for a minimum number of seams and place them in inconspicuous and low traffic areas, but in no case less than 6 inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates. 3. Match edges of resilient floor coverings for color shading and pattern at seams. 4. Avoid cross seams. C. Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installing on top of finished floor covering,install floor covering before these items are installed. D. Scribe,cut,and fit sheet vinyl floor coverings to butt tightly to vertical surfaces,permanent fixtures,and built-in furniture,including cabinets,pipes,outlets,edgings,thresholds,and nosings. E. Extend sheet vinyl floor coverings into toe spaces,door reveals,closets,and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers,holes,or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. G. Adhere sheet vinyl floor coverings to flooring substrates by method approved by floor covering manufacturer. 1. Produce completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks,or other surface imperfections. 2. Comply with floor covering manufacturer's directions including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing,and adhesive open and working times. H. Heat-weld seams in sheet vinyl floor coverings. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce a surface flush with adjoining sheets. I. Integral Flash Cove Base: Where indicated,cove sheet vinyl floor coverings up vertical surfaces to form integral base of height indicated over cove support strip with top edge butted against reveal at wall. J. Hand roll sheet vinyl floor coverings in both directions from center out to embed floor coverings in adhesive and eliminate trapped air. At walls,door casings,and other locations where access by roller is impractical,press floor coverings firmly in place with flat-bladed instrument. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing sheet vinyl floor coverings: 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by floor covering manufacturers. 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 3. Do not wash floor until after period recommended by floor covering manufacturer. 4. Damp-mop floor to remove black marks and soil. B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by floor covering manufacturer. 1. Cover sheet vinyl floor coverings with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion. SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA C. Underlayment: 4' x 4' x 1/4-inch Multi-ply Underlayment a^ manufactured by MacMillan Blodel Building Materials with 10 year warranty. D. Integral Cove Base Transition Strips: Radiused wood filler stips for smooth transitions from horizaontal to vertical surfases E. Rod for Heat-Welding Seams: Product of floor covering manufacturer in color complying with the following requirement. 1. Match field color of sheet vinyl floor covering. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. General: Examine areas where installation of sheet vinyl floor coverings will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with floor covering manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section. B. For wood subfloors verify the following: 1. Inspect for level and confirm elevational differences with low points and drain locatinos. Remove coatings and irregularities prior to installation of patching componds and underlayment. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications to prepare substrates indicated to receive sheet vinyl floor coverings. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per floor covering manufacturer's direction to fill cracks,holes,and depressions in substrates. C. Install wood underlayment and cove base transition strips according to manufacturer's recommended installation practices. D. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by sheet vinyl floor coverings immediately before installation. Following cleaning,examine substrates to determine if there is visually any evidence of moisture,alkaline salts,carbonation,or dust. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with sheet vinyl floor covering manufacturer's installation instructions and other requirements indicated that are applicable to each type of floor covering installation included in Project. B. Lay out sheet vinyl floor coverings to comply with the following requirements: SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver sheet vinyl floor coverings and installation accessories to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification,and shipping and handling instructions. B. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F and 90 deg F. C. Move sheet vinyl floor coverings and installation accessories into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F in spaces to receive sheet vinyl floor coverings for at least 48 hours prior to installation,during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period,maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F. B. Do not install sheet vinyl floor coverings until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic while installing sheet vinyl floor covering. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Install sheet vinyl floor coverings and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the product specified. I. Forbo Industries; Smaragd 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives (Cements): Water-resistant, stabilized type as recommended by manufacturer to suit sheet vinyl floor covering products and substrate conditions indicated. SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 09666-SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Sheet vinyl floor coverings with heat-welded seams. B. See Division 1 Section-Alternates for description of work in this section affecting alternates 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Ow B. Product data for each type of product specified. C. Samples for verification purposes in form of 6 x 9-inch sections of each different color and pattern of sheet vinyl floor covering product specified, showing full range of variations expected in these characteristics. D. Maintenance data for sheet vinyl floor coverings,to include in the Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage Installer that is certified by floor covering manufacturer as competent in the technique for heat-welding seams. B. Single-Source Responsibility for Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of sheet vinyl floor covering from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. C. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide sheet vinyl floor coverings with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq cm or more per ASTM E 648. 2. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662. SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA C. Rubber Wall Base: Provide rubber wall base complying with the following: ..r%, 1. Available Products: As follows: (in all areas except at rubber tile areas) a. Mercer Products Co. b. Johnsonite Div.Of Duramax, Inc C. Norament d. Roppe Corp. 2. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns produced for rubber wall base complying with requirements indicated. Except match specified rubber tile at rubber tile areas. 3. Style: Cove with top-set toe and straight with no toe at carpeted areas. 4. Minimum Thickness: 1/8 inch(3.2 mm). 5. Height:4 inches(101.6 mm). 6. Lengths:Coils in lengths standard with manufacturer,but not less than 96 feet(29.26 m). 7. Outside Comers: Premolded. 8. Inside Corners:Job formed. 9. Surface: Smooth. D. Rubber Stair Treads and Accessories: Provide rubber stair treads and accessories complying with the following: 1. As follows: a. Norament No.925 B b. Endura Series 130 Round "* C. Estrie Products Int. 2. Color and Pattern:Match color and pattern of rubber tile. 3. Rubber Stair Treads: One piece nosing tread-riser with abrasive yellow strip nosings. products complying with the following requirements: a. Type: Raised-disc pattern. b. Thickness:3/16-inch(4.8-mm)tapering to 1/8 inch(3.2 mm)at back edge. C. Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece. d. Matching rubber stringers E. Rubber Accessory Molding: Provide rubber accessory molding complying with the following: 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors produced for rubber accessory molding complying with requirements indicated. 2. Product Description: Carpet edge for glue-down applications. Carpet nosing. Nosing for rubber tile. Reducer strip for resilient flooring. Tile and carpet joiner. END OF SECTION 09660 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660-6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by tile manufacturers. 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by resilient floor tile manufacturer. 4. Damp-mop tile to remove black marks and soil. B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by tile manufacturer. 1. Cover tiles with undyed,untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion. 2. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over tiles. Place plywood or hardboard panels over tiles and under objects while they are being moved Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. C. Clean tiles not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean tiles using method recommended by manufacturer. 3.5 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING SCHEDULE A. Molded-Rubber Floor Tile: Provide molded-rubber floor tile complying with the following: 1. Available Products: As follows: a. Norament No. 925 B,Article 354 b. Endura Series 130 Round C. Estrie Products Int. 2. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns produced for tile complying with requirements indicated. 3. Class: Class I-A(homogenous rubber tile,solid color). 4. Overall Thickness: .16 inches. 5. Size: 18.125 by 18.125 inches or 39.37 by 39.37 inches. 6. Molded-Pattern Figure and Dimensions: Raised discs. 7. Provide: Wax enbibed product. B. Vinyl Composition Tile: Provide vinyl composition floor tile complying with the following: 1. Available Products: As follows: a. Armstrong World Industries: Excelon Stonex b. Azrok Industries: 800 Series C. Kentile Floors,Inc.: Architectural Criterion. d Tarkett,Inc.: Basics 2. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns produced for tile complying with requirements indicated. 3. Class: Class 2(through-pattern tile). 4. Wearing Surface: Smooth. 5. Thickness: 1/8 inch(3.2 mm). 6. Size: 12 by 12 inches. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660-5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile manufacturer's directions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings,including curing compounds,and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander,or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush. D. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by tiles immediately before tile installation. Following cleaning,examine substrates for moisture,alkaline salts,carbonation,or dust. E. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to applying adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with tile manufacturer's installation directions and other requirements indicated that are applicable to each type of tile installation included in Project. B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths at perimeter that equal less than one-half of a tile. Install tiles square with room axis,unless otherwise indicated. C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction. D. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, built-in furniture including cabinets,pipes,outlets,edgings,thresholds,and nosings. E. Extend tiles into toe spaces,door reveals,closets,and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers,holes,or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. G. Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items occurring within finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed on these covers. Tightly adhere edges to perimeter of floor around covers and to covers. H. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates without producing open cracks, voids,raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks,or other surface imperfections in completed tile installation. I. Use full spread of adhesive applied to substrate in compliance with tile manufacturer's directions including those for trowel notching,adhesive mixing,and adhesive open and working times. J. Hand roll tiles where required by tile manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION As A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing the installation: RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in each Product Data Sheet at end of this Section. 2.2 RESILIENT TILE A. Molded Pattern Rubber Floor Tile: Products complying with ASTM F 1344 and requirements specified in Molded Pattern Rubber Floor Tile Product Data Sheet at end of this Section. 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by tile manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Adhesives(Cements): Water-resistant type recommended by tile manufacturer to suit resilient floor tile products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. General: Examine areas where installation of tiles will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for tile installation and comply with tile manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section. B. For wood subfloors verify the following: 1. Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in Division 6 "Rough Carpentry." 2. Underlayment surface is free of surface irregularities and substances with potential to interfere with adhesive bond,show through surface,or stain tile. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications to prepare substrates indicated to receive tile. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA A. Single-Source Responsibility for Floor Tile: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient floor tile with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq cm or more per ASTM E 648. 2. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver tiles and installation accessories to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F and 90 deg F. C. Store tiles on flat surfaces. Move tiles and installation accessories into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F in spaces to receive tiles for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F. B. Do not install tiles until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed C. Close spaces to traffic during tile installation. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Install tiles and accessories after other finishing operations,including painting,have been completed. B. Do not install tiles over concrete slabs until the slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive as determined by tile manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than one box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each class, wearing surface,color,pattern and size of resilient floor tile installed. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 09660-RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Rubber floor tile. 2. Vinyl Compostion Tile. 3. Resilient stair accessories 4. Resilient flooring accessories 5. Resilient carpet accessories 6. Resilient wall base and accessories B. Resilient wall base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor tiles are specified in Division 9 Section"Resilient Wall Base and Accessories." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. 1. Certification by tile manufacturer that products supplied for tile installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds(VOC's). C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tiles showing full range of colors and patterns available for each type of resilient floor tile indicated. D. Samples for verification purposes in full-size tiles of each different color and pattern of resilient floor tile specified,showing full range of variations expected in these characteristics. E. Product certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect, signed by manufacturer certifying that each product complies with requirements. F. Maintenance data for resilient floor tile,to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 3.8 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERING SCHEDULE A� Manufacturer: Forbo Industries,Inc. 1. Proprietary Product: Marmoleum Dual Linoleum Sheet and Linoleum Adhesive(See LSF#1) a. Description: Solid color,homogeneous sheet linoleum of primarily natural materials consisting of linseed oil,wood flour,and rosin binders,mixed and calendered onto natural jute backing. Patter and color shall extend throughout total thickness of material. b. Width: 79" C. Length: 105 Linear Feet d. Gauge: 1/10: e. Backing: Jute f. Pattern and Color: #713 Calico g. Adhesive: Forbo Industries,Inc. L910 Adhesive h. Heat Welding Rod: Forbo Industries,Inc.,Marmoweld color-matched welding rod 2. Proprietary Product: Marmoleum Dual Linoleum Tile and Linoleum Tile Adhesive. (See LTF #1) a. Description: Homogeneous tile of primarily natural materials consisting of linseed oil, wood flour,and rosin binders,mixed and calendered onto a polyester backing. Pattern and color shall extend throughout total thickness of tile material. b. Size 20"x 20"approx. C. Gauge: 1/10" d. Backing: Polyester backing e. Pattern and color#713 Calico and#614 charcoal(accent tile) f. Adhesive: Forbo Industries,Inc.L910 adhesive. LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS 09654-7 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 2. Sweep and vacuum floor thoroughly. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended in writing by floor covering manufacturer. 4. Damp-mop floor to remove marks and soil using method and cleaner recommended in writing by floor covering manufacturer. B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period_ Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by floor covering manufacturer. 1. Apply protective floor polish to floor surfaces that are free from soil, adhesive, and surface blemishes. a. Seal linoleum with not less than 3 coats of floor polish. b. Use commercially available product recommended in writing by floor covering manufacturer. C. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. 2. After drying room film (yellow film cased by linseed oil oxidation) disappears, cover linoleum floor coverings with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion. 1 Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor surfaces. Place plywood or hardboard panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. C_ Clean floor surfaces not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each Project area. Clean floor coverings according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. After cleaning, restore polish finish according to floor covering manufacturer's written recommendations. LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS 09654-6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA E. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply with adhesive and floor covering manufacturers' written instructions, including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. 1. Provide completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and surface imperfections. F. Roll floor coverings according to floor covering manufacturer's written instructions. G. Heat-Welded Seams: Grout joints and heat weld with welding bead, permanently fusing sections in to a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams according to manufacturers written instructions and ASTM F 1516 to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces. Heat welding only on sheet flooring border. 3.5 TILE INSTALLATION A. Lay out tiles from center marks established on accompanying drawing. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half of a tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles at a 45-degree angle with room axis, unless otherwise indicated B. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons of the same batch and mixing . tiles as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. Discard broken, cracked, chipped or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles at a 45-degree angle with room axis, unless otherwise indicated 3.6 SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Lay out sheet flooring to comply with the following requirements: 1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction 2. Arrange for a minimum number of seams and place them in inconspicuous and low- traffic areas and not less than 6 inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates. 3. Match edges of sheet flooring for color shading and pattern at seams according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 4. Avoid cross and butt seams. 5. Eliminate deformation s that result from hanging method used during the drying process (stove bar marks) according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing flooring products: 1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended in writing by floor covering manufacturer. LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS 09654-5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA _W C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with linoleum floor covering manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive linoleum floor coverings. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAYMENT PANELS A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Underlayment: Nail to subflooring a. Space panels 1/32 inch at edges and ends. b. Fill and sand edge joints of underlayment receiving resilient flooring just before installing flooring. 3.4 FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturers written installation instructions. B. Scribe, cut and fit floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures, including built-in furniture. cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings. C. Extends floor coverings into toe spaces. door reveals, closets, and similar openings. D. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. look LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS 09654-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products indicated for each designation in the Linoleum Floor Covering Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.2 PRODUCTS A. Linoleum Floor Coverings: Consisting of oxidized linseed or other vegetable drying oil and rosin, mixed with ground cork or wood flour, mineral filler, and pigments. Mixture is bonded and keyed to a burlap (jute) or other suitable fibrous backing so that backing is partially embedded in mixture. Patterns and colors extend through entire floor covering thickness. B. Trowelabie Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended in writing by floor covering manufacturer for products and substrate conditions indicated. D. Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer for heat-welding linoleum seams. 1. Heat weld border only. Match color of sheet linoleum. Aoft", E. Remove existing metal stair nosings in vestibule. Clean and re-install. 2.3 PANELS FOR UNDERLAYMENT A- General: Over smooth subfloors, provide underlayment not less than '/4" thick. Over board or uneven subfloors, provide underlayment not less than 11/32 inch thick. B. Plywood Underlayment for Resilient Flooring: Provide plywood panels with fully sanded face and as follows: 1. Grade: APA A-C UnderIayment Exterior. PART 3 —EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of linoleum floor coverings will occur, with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for floor covering installation and comply with requirements specified. B. For wood subfloors, verify the following: 1. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with adhesive bond, show through surface, or stain floor covering. LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS 09654-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1. Engage an installer who is competent in technique required by manufacturer for heat- welding seams. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of linoleum floor covering specified from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 W/sq. cm or greater when tested per ASTM E 648. 2. Smoke Density: Maximum specific optical density of 450 or less when tested per ASTM E 662. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver linoleum floor coverings and related products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 and 90 deg F. Store rolls upright. .. C. Move linoleum floor coverings and related products into spaces where they will be installed at least 72 hours in advance of installation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F in spaces to receive linoleum floor coverings for at least 72 hours before installation, during installation, and for at least 72 hours after installation. After postinstallation period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. B. Do not install linoleum floor coverings until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed C. Maintain relative humidity in spaces to receive linoleum floor coverings before, during, and after installation within the range recommended in writing by manufacturer. D. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation and for time period after installation recommended in writing by manufacturer. E. Install linoleum floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting and ceiling installation, have been completed PART 2—PRODUCTS LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS 09654-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA " ECTION 09654—LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS i'ART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Linoleum floor tile 2. Underlayment under linoleum flooring. 3. Linoleum sheet flooring, seamless installation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. B. Show location of seams and edges. Indicate location of columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. C. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard sizes, but not less than 6-by-9-inch sections of each color and pattern of linoleum floor covering specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. 1. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size samples, but not less than 9 inches long, of each color specified. D. Heat-Welded Seam Samples: Of each heat-welding bead and flooring product, color, and pattern combination required, with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch sample made and applied to a rigid backing by Installer for this Project. E. Maintenance Data: For linoleum floor coverings to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS 09654- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA A. Installation: comply with flooring manufacturer's instruction s and recommendations for preparation of substrates to receive wood flooring,including application of primers,moisture barriers and adhesives. B. Nailed Installation: Nail strip-type flooring to subflooring according to flooring manufacturer's recommendations. C. End-Matched Strip Flooring: Wherever change in laying direction is indicated,kerf ends of boards and install continuous steel spline full length of joint. D. Unfinished Wood Flooring: After installation, machine-sand surface of wood flooring smooth, using coarse, medium and fine (No. 00) paper. Sand to remove offsets or observable unlevel conditions, ridges,or cuppings. E. Apply stain,if needed,to match approved sample. F. Apply urethane finish according to manufacturer's instructions. Apply as many coats as needed to build a dry film thickness of 3.0 mils. G. Protection: Protect completed wood flooring during remainder of construction period so that flooring and finish will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 09551 WOOD FLOORING 09551 -2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 09551 -WOOD FLOORING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Submit samples consisting of three sets of 12-inch-square finished samples for each type of wood flooring. B. Conditioning: Deliver wood flooring after building is enclosed and humidity has stabilized at anticipated level for occuapncy, as recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 7 days before installation to permit moisture omtent adjustment. Open sealed packages to allow material acclimate to the existing conditions. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Field: Wood strip flooring — Manufacturer's standard straight-edge, tongued-and-grooved, and end- matched solid wood slooring, 25/32-inch-thick by 2'/e"-wide strips, 2'0"minimum length averagin 4'- 6"long. 1. Provide cherry and maple flooring bearing the trademark of the National Flooring Manufacturer's Association(MFMA). B. Border: 25/32 inch thick by 2'/J' maple flooring with Historic Floors of Oshkosh Decorative Flooring Border No. 127, 8'/2"x V wide border with maple,Brazilian cherry and wenge with coordinated comer blocks. 1. For decorative wood border contact: Hoboken Floors, One Design Center Place, Suite 627, Boston,MA, 617-4264343 C. Wood Trim: Except as otherwise indicated, provide wood saddles and thresholds, as indicated in or adjacent to wood flooring,of same species,grade and cut as wood floring in border. D. Finish Materials: As recommended by flooring manufacturer. 1. Water-based plyurethane complying with environmental and flammability restrictions, specially compounded for multiple-coat application on wood floors. Durable,nonyellowing, odorless, and fast drying. 2. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide plastic impregnated parquest flooring by one of the following: a. Basic Coatings b. BonaKemi USA,Inc. C. Crawford Laboratories d. Dura Seal Division,Minwax,Co.,Inc. e. Hillyard Chemical Co. £ Huntington Laboratories,Inc. g. National Coatings Co. 1.3 EXECUTION WOOD FLOORING 09551 - 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1. Provide solvent-based sealer. B. Solvent-Based, Oil-Modified Urethane: Oil/solvent urethane specially compounded for multicoat application on wood flooring. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine substrates where wood flooring will be installed and conditions under which work will be performed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 SANDING AND FINISHING A. Schedule floor finishing to be completed just before final inspection, Project acceptance and Substantial Completion. B. Machine-sand installed,unfinished flooring to remove offsets and nonlevel conditions,ridges,cups,and sanding machine marks that would be noticeable after finishing. Use three grades of sandpaper, ending with 00 grade. Vacuum and tack clean and immediately apply finish. Do not permit traffic on floor after sanding and until finish is completed. C. Apply three coats of floor finish according to manufacturer's instructions,in addition to sealer, including machine buffing with steel wool in-the-wet where recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect unfinished wood flooring prior to finishing with heavy kraft paper or other suitable covering to prevent damage or deterioration. Do not use plastic sheet or film that could cause condensation. B. Do not cover finished floors with kraft paper, rugs or any other material until finish reaches full cure, usually 6 or 7 days. END OF SECTION 09550 WOOD FLOOR REFINISHING 09550-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 09550-WOOD FLOOR REFINISHING PART 1 -GENERAL Il,I RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sanding and refinishing of interior wood flooring. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refinisher Qualifications: Engage an experienced refinisher who has specialized in sand and finishing wood flooring similar to those required for this Project. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Finishing Materials: a. Basic Coatings. b. BonaKemi USA,Inc. C. Crawford Laboratories. d. Dura Seal Division,Minwax Co.,Inc. e. Hillyard Chemical Co. f. Huntington Laboratories,Inc. g. National Coatings Co. 2.2 FINISHING MATERIALS A. Floor Sealer: Penetrating-type, pliable, compatible with stain and finish used and as recommended by flooring manufacturer. WOOD FLOOR REFINISHING 09550- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA a. Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to short axis of space. 2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -7 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA ceiling installation and anchorage. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3e2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish the layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and conform to the layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per manufacturer's instructions and CISCA"Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of the supporting structure or of the ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing,countersplaying,or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension Aft* system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of 3 tight turns. Connect hangers either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure, that are appropriate for substrate, and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age,corrosion,or elevated temperatures. 5. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise shown;and provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets,on moldings and trim. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented,bent,or kinked members. E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide neat,precise fit. 1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped-edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member. 2. Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of finish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability properties of aluminum extrusions complying with ASTM B 221 for alloy and temper 6063-T5. 3. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Apply baked enamel according to paint manufacturer's specifications for cleaning,conversion coating,and applying organic coating. a. Organic Coating: Manufacturer's standard thermosetting coating system with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.8 to 1.2 mil b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.8 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements: 1. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM E 90. 2. Product has flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings of less than 25 per ASTM E 84. B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant;Pecora Corp. b. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant;United States Gypsum Company. 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. BA-98;Pecora Corp. b. Tremco Acoustical Sealant;Tremco,Inc. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA capping prefinished galvanized steel in baked polyester paint. Main beams and cross tees shall have rotary stiching. 1. Structural Classification: ASTM C 635 intermediate duty. 2. Color: White and match the actual color of the selected ceiling tile,unless noted otherwise. 3. Acceptable Product: Prelude XL 15/16" Exposed Tee System, as manufactured by Armstong World Industries. B. Attachment Devises: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1 Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated. C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, prestretched, with a yield stress load of at least time three design load,but not less than 12 gauge. D. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or exgtruded aluminum of types and profiles indicated or, if not indicated,manufacturers standard moldings for edges and penetrations, including light fixtures, that fit type of edge detail and suspension system indicated Provide moldings with exposed flange of the same width as exposed runner. 2.7 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS,GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications,and finishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements. B. Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated. 1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance"where high-humidity finishes are indicated. C. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated. D. Wire Hangers,Braces,and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated Carbon Steel Wire: ASTM A 641,Class 1 zinc coating,soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so that its stress at 3 times the hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung)will be less than the yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106- inch-diameter wire. E. Hanger Rods: Mild steel,zinc coated,or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. F. Flat Hangers: Mild steel,zinc coated,or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. G. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide, formed with 0.0396-inch-thick galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 446, G 90 Coating Designation, with bolted connections and 5/16-inch-diameter bolts. H. Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's extruded- aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's product designations,complying with the following requirements: ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA l00` 2. Type B. Panels: Armstrong Ceramaguard RHI00 3. Suspension System: Armstrong World Industries,Inc. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS,GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns,acoustical ratings, and light reflectances,unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS A. Acoustical Panels Type AP-1 1. Surface Texture: Very Fine Texture 2. Composition: fiberglass with DuraBrite acousitcally transparent membrane 3. Color: White 4. Size 24"x 24"x 7/8" 5. Edge Profile: Vector for interface with Prelude XL 15/16"Exposed Tee System grid. 6. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423; Classified with UL label on product carton 0.95. 7. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): ASTM C 1414; Classified with UL Label on product carton Not Applicable 8. Articulation class(AC): ASTM E 1111;classified with UL label on product carton 190 9. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264;Class A 10. Ligh Reflectance(LR)White Panel: ASTM E 1477;0.89. 11. Dimensional Stability: HumiGuard Plus 12. Acceptable Product: Optima Vector,3900 as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries. 2.5 CEILINGS OF HIGH-DENSITY,CERAMIC-BASE PANELS WITH SCRUBBABLE FINISH-TYPE B A. Panel Characteristics: Type XX units per ASTM E 1264 resistant to heat, moisture, and corrosive fumes and complying with pattern and other requirements indicated. 1. Pattern: Panels matching pattern indicated by reference to manufacturer's standard product designations in "Manufacturers"Article. 2. Color/Light Reflectance Coefficient: White/LR 0.80. 3. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.60. 4. Edge Detail: Square. 5. Thickness: 5/8 inch(16 mm). 6. Thickness: 16 mm. 7. Size: 24 by 48 inches(610 by 1220 mm). B. Suspension System Type: 1. Wide-face,aluminum-capped,double-web,hot-dip galvanized-steel suspension system. 2.6 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Components: Main beams and cross tees,base metal and end detail, fabricted from commercial quality hot dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653. Main beams and and cross tees are double- web steel construction with 15/16"type exposed flange design. Exposed surfaces chemically cleansed, ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA D. Single-Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension system from a ,ate single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture,direct sunlight, surface contamination,and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is completed and dry, work above ceilings is complete,and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them,including light fixtures,HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system components(if any),and partition assemblies(if any). 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage,and are identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. 2. Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following for each panel type indicated: 1. Type A Panels: Armstrong Fine Optima Vector. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 09511 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY i A. This Section includes ceilings composed of acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems. 1 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. i C. Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size indicated below. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. 1. 6-inch-square samples of each acoustical panel type,pattern,and color. 2. Set of 12-inch-long samples of exposed suspension system members, including moldings, for each color and system type required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed acoustical panel ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1. Surface-burning characteristics of acoustical panels comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84. 2. Acoustical panel ceilings indicated are identical in materials and construction to those tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119. C. Single-Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA 3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer 40" that is acceptable to brick and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains. B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, un- bonded, and otherwise defective tile work. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure tile is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Comple- tion. 1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining,damage, and wear. 2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is com- pleted. D. Seal Marble Mosaic Tile border with sealer approved by manufacturer. E. Before final inspection,remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. END OF SECTION 09310 look CERAMIC TILE 09310- 8 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. C. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetra- tions so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoin- ing tiles on floor, base,walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets the same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. F. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following tile installation standards: 1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement, dry-set, commercial portland cement, and latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10. 3.4 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Floor Installation Sched- ule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI Al 08 series of tile instal- lation standards. B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths: 1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch. C. Back Buttering: For installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced ANSI A108 series of the installation standards: 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning. CERAMIC TILE 09310- 7 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA A. Examine substrates, areas,and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for 1.01%t compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting per- formance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting the are firm; dry; clean; free from oil, waxy films, and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 se- ries of tale installation standards for installations indicated. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before in- stalling tile. 3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust latter in consultation with Architect. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone and are incompatible with tile-setting materials by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush. B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with dry-set or latex-portland cement mortars that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installa- tion standards for installations indicated. 1. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions to fill cracks,holes, and depressions. 2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample submit- tals, verify that tile has been blended in the factory and packaged so tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site be- fore installing. D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent adhesion or staining of exposed tile surfaces by grout, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of temporary protective coating indicated below,taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces: 1. Petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 series of the installation standards in "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic the installation schedules. CERAMIC TILE 09310- 6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA A. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI Al 18.6 for materials described in Section H-2.4, com- posed as follows: 1. Factory-Prepared, Dry-Grout Mixture: Factory-prepared mixture of portland cement; dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to produce the following: a. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and narrower. b. Sanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and wider. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations in- dicated. B. Temporary Protective Coating: Provide product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; is compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and is easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile. 1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F per ASTM D 87. 2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is spe- cially formulated and recommended for use as a temporary protective coating for tile. C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. 2.7 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufactur- ers'written instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION CERAMIC TILE 09310- 5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in the factory and package so tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. E. Mounting: Where factory-mounted tile is required, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assem- blies as standard with manufacturer, unless another mounting method is indicated. F. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect ex- posed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of petroleum parafl"in wax,applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Glazed Ceramic Tile: Provide flat file complying with the following requirements: 1. Composition: Porcelain. 2. Module Size: 6 by 6 inches and 12 by 12 inches. 3. Nominal Thickness: Manufacturer's Standard 4. Face: Plain. 5. Name and Color: a. Border: Cerdomus Durango Gres Fine Porcellanato—Durango Gold ZC 16 b. Field: Cerdomus Durange Gres Fine Porcellanato—Durango Ambla ZABI B. Marble Mosaic Border: 1. Composition: Marble Mosaic Pieces 1 2. Size: 4%"by 243/4" 3. Color: Selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.4 SETTING MATERIALS A. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI Al 18.1. B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI Al 18.4, composed as follows: 1. Prepackaged Dry-Mortar Mix: Factory-prepared mixture of portland cement; dry, redis- persible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to which only water needs to be added at Project site. 2. Mixture of Dry-Mortar Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of prepackaged dry-mortar mix and liquid-latex additive complying with the following requirements: a. Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber. b. Latex Additive: Acrylic resin. 2.5 GROUTING MATERIALS CERAMIC TILE 09310 -4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol- lowing: 1. Tile Products: a. International Cortina Tile, 1645 Riverdale St.,West Springfield, MA 01089 2. Tile-Setting and-Grouting Materials: a. American Olean Tile Company. b. Atlas Minerals&Chemicals, Inc. C. Boiardi Products Corporation. d. Bonsal: W.R.Bonsal Company. e. Bostik. f. C-Cure Corporation. g. Custom Building Products. h. Dal-Tile Corporation. i. DAP,Inc. j. Laticrete International,Inc. k. Mapei Corporation. 1. Southern Grouts &Mortars,Inc. m. Summitville Tiles, Inc. n. TEC Incorporated. 2.2 PRODUCTS,GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile,"for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide the complying with Standard Grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to the sizes specified in Part 1 "Definitions"Article. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI stan- dards referenced in "Setting Materials"and "Grouting Materials"articles. C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other ap- pearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors, textures, and pat- terns for products of type indicated. CERAMIC TILE 09310- 3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA 1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture required, at least 12 _ inches square, mounted on braced cementitious backer units, and with grouted joints us- ing product complying with specified requirements and approved for completed work in color or colors selected by Architect. 2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required. F. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer. G. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the products furnished comply with requirements. H. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to dem- onstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,names of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of suc- cessful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from one source with resources to provide products from the same production run for each contiguous area of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. C. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes. C. Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained to comply with referenced ,, standards and manufacturer's written instructions. CERAMIC TILE 09310-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 09310-CERAMIC TILE -:�T 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Ceramic Mosaic tile floor and base for thin set installation: T.C.A Spec. F122-97 B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition"for removing existing concrete. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Module Size: Actual tile size(minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499)plus joint width indicated. B. Facial Dimension: Actual tile size(minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of tile, mortar,grout,and other products specified. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Tile patterns and locations. 2. Widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. C. Tile Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sec- tions of tiles showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type and composition of tile indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. D. Grout Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of grout showing the full range of colors available for each type of grout indicated. E. Samples for Verification: Of each item listed below, prepared on Samples of size and construc- tion indicated. Where products involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, flanges of cornerbead, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. B. Prefill open joints,rounded or beveled edges,and damaged areas using setting-type joint compound. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim accessories having flanges not requiring tape. D. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints and to flanges of trim accessories as recommended by trim accessory manufacturer. E. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per GA-214. 1. Level 1 for ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies. 2. Level 2 where panels form substrates for PVC wall finish. 3. Level 4 for gypsum board surfaces,unless otherwise indicated. F. Use the following joint compound combination as applicable to the finish levels specified: 1. Embedding and First Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or taping compound. Fill (Second) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping compound. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready-mixed,drying-type,all-purpose or topping compound. G. For Level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fill(second),and finish (third)coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects and ready for decoration. K Where Level 2 gypsum board finish is indicated, embed tape in joint compound and apply first coat of joint compound. I. Finish cementitious backer units to comply with unit manufacturer's directions. J. Skim coat walls with excess adhesive where Vinyl Wallcovering is removed and adhesive cannot be removed and application of finishes requies smooth surface. K. Blend wall patches with adjacent plaster for smooth transitions without telegraphing through proposed finish. Tape edges of patches with fiberglass mesh tape. 3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure gypsum board assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09255 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255- 11 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications. 3.6 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing,unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally(perpendicular to framing),unless parallel application is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies. Use maximum-length panels to minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically(parallel to framing)with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. B. Install 24" high continuous cementitious backer units to comply with ANSI A108.11 at base of all shower and tub surrounds scheduled to receive PVC wall finish. 1. Install water-resistant gypsum backing board panels at showers, tubs, and where indicated to reveive PVC finish. Install with 1/4-inch open space where panels abut other construction or penetrations. C. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows: 1. Fasten with screws. 3.7 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's directions for type,length,and spacing of fasteners. B. Install comerbead at external corners. C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound,except where other types are indicated. 1. Install LC-bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate. 2. Install L-bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed. 3. Install PVC trim at all bathrooms with tubs and/or showers 4. Install metal trim at all other locations. 3.8 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255- 10 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 3.5 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD,GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216. B. Install sound-attenuation blankets, where indicated, prior to installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting and joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than two framing members. D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. E. Locate both edge or end joints over supports,except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings where possible. F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported)edges of stud flanges first. G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. H. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Instead, float gypsum panels over these members using resilient channels or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. I. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces(above ceilings, etc.),except in chases that are braced internally. 1. Except where concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air,or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts,pipes,and conduits. J. Isolate perimeter of nonload-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors, as detailed. Provide 1/4-to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. K. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended by manufacturer, install gypsum panels over wood framing,with floating internal corner construction. L. Where STC-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of the partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. M. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 -9 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 3. Support outside (cut) leg of runners by clinching a 1-inch-high-by-0.0209-inch-thick steel sheet .• strip to inside of cut legs using metal lock fasteners. 4. Attach runners to structural elements at floor and ceiling with fasteners located 2 inches from ends.and spaced 24 inches o.c. 5. Position studs vertically with open sides facing in same direction and engaging floor and ceiling runners. Begin and end each arc with a stud and space intermediate studs equally along arcs at stud spacing recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for radii indicated. Attach studs to runners with 3/8-inch-long pan head framing screws. On straight lengths at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches o.c.with last stud left free standing. G. Frame door openings to comply with GA-219, and with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs)at head and secure to jamb studs. 1. Install 2 studs at each jamb,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud,with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint. 3. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. 4. Provide wood blocking for wood trim installation. H. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or, if none indicated, as required for door openings. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. I. Install thermal insulation as follows: 1. Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-funning members spaced 24 inches o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of finning members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. Start from this furring channel with standard width insulation panel and continue in regular manner. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. J. Install polyethylene vapor retarder where indicated to comply with the following requirements: 1. Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with mechanical fasteners or adhesives. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates. 2. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than 2 wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges, at perimeter of wall openings, and at lap joints;space fasteners 16 inches o.c. 3. Seal joints in vapor retarders caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor retarder tape. 4. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarder immediately before concealing it with the installation of gypsum board or other construction. ,401h GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-8 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA A. Existing walls: Examine cut-outs in existing partitions prior to installation of gypsum patching panels to assure neat installation. Confirm adjacent plaster surfaces are sound and compatible with patching methods. 3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING,GENERAL A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer or,if none available,with United States Gypsum Co.'s"Gypsum Construction Handbook." 3.4 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board stud assemblies abut other construction. 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips or foam gaskets between studs and wall. B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surfaces do not vary more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1. Cut studs 1/2 inch short of full height to provide perimeter relief. 2. For STC-rated and fire-resistance-rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid structural surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed, to support gypsum board closures needed to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. D. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated. 1. Single-Layer Construction: Space studs 16 inches o.c.,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Cementitious Backer Unit Construction: Space studs 406 mm o.c.,unless otherwise indicated. E. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each gypsum board panel can be attached to open(unsupported)edges of stud flanges first. F. For curved soffits,install steel framing as follows: 1. Cut top runners through leg and web at 2-inch intervals for arc length. In cutting lengths of runners,allow for uncut straight lengths of not less than 12 inches at ends of arcs. 2. Bend runners to uniform curve of radius indicated and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 -7 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA Avokt B. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following applications: 1. Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.033 inch thick. 2. Fastening gypsum board to wood members. C. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. D. Steel drill screws of size and type recommended by unit manufacturer for fastening cementitious backer units. E. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets without membrane facing). 1. Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass,slag wool,or rock wool. F. Thermal Insulation: Material indicated below, of thickness and width to fill voids formed by Z-furring members: 1. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular, polystyrene thermal insulation formed from a polystyrene base resin by an extrusion process using hydrochlorofluorocarbons as the blowing agent to comply with ASTM C 578 for Type IV, and with the following surface-burning characteristics: a. Flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. G. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397,thickness and maximum permeance rating as follows: 1. 6 mils,0.13 perms. H. Vapor Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow metal frames, cast-in-anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1. Use pressure-sensitive or staple-attached, open-weave, glass-fiber reinforcing tape with compatible joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board and joint treatment materials for application indicated. C� Joint Tape for Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by cementitious backer unit manufacturer. D. Drying-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged vinyl-based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. 1. Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product. a. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and face flanges of trim accessories. b. Topping compound formulated for fill(second)and finish(third)coats. C. All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds. E. Joint Compound for Cementitious Backer Units: Material recommended by cementitious backer unit manufacturer. 2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements: 1. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. PL Acoustical Sealant;ChemRex,Inc.;Contech Brands. b. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant;Pecora Corp. C. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant;United States Gypsum Co. 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. BA-98;Pecora Corp. b. Tremco Acoustical Sealant;Tremco,Inc. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 -5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA C. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630 and as follows: 1. Type: Regular,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch(12.7 mm)where indicated. 2.4 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS A. Provide cementitious backer units complying with ANSI A118.9, of thickness and width indicated below,and in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Width: Manufacturer's standard width,but not less than 32 inches. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, cementitious backer units that may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following products: 1. Wonderboard Multi+Board;Custom Building Products. 2. DomCrete Cementitious Tile-Backer Board;Domtar Gypsum. 3. DUROCK Cement Board;United States Gypsum Co. 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints complying with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below: 1. Material: Formed plastic at toilet rooms with showers or metal (elsewhere), with metal complying with the following requirement: a. Steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip or electrolytic process, or steel sheet coated with aluminum or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047: a. Comerbead on outside corners,unless otherwise indicated. b. LC-bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use LC-beads for edge trim,unless otherwise indicated. B. Accessory for Curved Edges: Cornerbead formed of metal,plastic, or metal combined with plastic, with either notched or flexible flanges that are bendable to curvature radius. 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated. B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape,unless otherwise indicated. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. Domtar Gypsum. b. Georgia-Pacific Corp. C. National Gypsum Co.;Gold Bond Building Products Division. d. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. General: Provide steel framing members complying with the following requirements: 1. Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant coating. B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16-inch-wide minimum lip (return), and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base(uncoated)metal and for depth: 1. Thickness: 0.0179 inch,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: 0.0329 inch as follows: a. For head runner,sill runner,jamb,and cripple studs at door and other openings. 3. Depth: 3-5/8 inches,unless otherwise indicated. C. Deflection Track: Manufacturer's top runner complying with the requirements of ASTM C 645 and with 2-inch-deep flanges. D. Z-Furring Members: Manufacturer's standard Z-shaped furring members with slotted or nonslotted web, fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653 or ASTM A 568;with a minimum base metal (uncoated)thickness of 0.0179 inch, face flange of 1-1/4 inch, wall-attachment flange of 7/8 inch, and of depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. ' E. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated. 2.3 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available that will minimize end-to-end butt joints in each area indicated to receive gypsum board application. 1. Widths: Provide gypsum board in widths of 48 inches. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows: 1. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type: Type X where required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies. 3. Edges: Tapered. "& 4. Thickness: 1/2 inch,unless otherwise indicated. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 -3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies from a single manufacturer,unless otherwise indicated. B. Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel products from a single manufacturer. C. Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions,General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations,whichever are more stringent. B. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board,maintain not less than 50 deg F for 48 hours before application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F when using temporary heat sources. C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot,dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Dale Industries,Inc. b. Marino/Ware(formerly Marino Industries Corp.). C. National Gypsum Co.;Gold Bond Building Products Division. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 09255-GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Nonload-bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies. 2. Gypsum board assemblies attached to steel framing. 3. Gypsum board assemblies attached to wood framing. 4. Cementitious backer units installed with gypsum board assemblies. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring, and gypsum sheathing applied over wood framing. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA-505 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.4 ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings,provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. B. Fire Resistance: Provide gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings indicated. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of product specified. C. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of gypsum board assembly components certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1. Examine and re-adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore function of doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements. 2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. 3. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of hardware units. 4. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware. END OF SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 11 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA PART 3 - EXECUTION I 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect. I. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute. 2. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface- mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved. C. Set units level,plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealers." F. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated. 3.2 ADJUSTING,CLEANING,AND DEMONSTRATING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. I. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. C. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes. D. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after the date of Substantial Completion, the Installer, accompanied by representatives of the manufacturers of latchsets and locksets and of door control devices, and of other major hardware suppliers, shall return to the Project to perform the following work: DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 10 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 2.9 DOOR STOPS A. Provide stops for all interior doors. Wherever possible provide wall bumpers. Provide floor stops where the use of wall bumpers is not feasible. Furnish with all necessary risers and fasteners to suit wall or floor conditions. Stops shall be Ives 407,436 or 441. B. In cases where neither wall bumpers nor floor stops can be used, a separate over-head stop shall be provided. Match campus standard. C. Provide grey resilient parts for exposed bumpers. 2.10 DOOR TRIM UNITS A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of either machine screws or self-tapping screws. B. Fabricate edge trim of stainless steel to fit door thickness in standard lengths or to match height of protection plates. C. Fabricate protection plates not more than 1-1/2 inches less than door width on hinge side and not more than 1/2 inch less than door width on pull side by height indicated. 1. Metal Plates: Brass or bronze,0.062 inch(U.S. 16 gage),beveled 4 sides. 2.14 HARDWARE FINISHES A. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock sets (or push-pull units if no latch or lock sets). B. Provide finishes that match those established by BHMA or, if none established, match the Architect's sample. 1. Finishes: a. Exterior Hinges: US4. b. Interior Hinges: US4. C. Locks/Latchsets: US4. d. Exit Devices: US4. e. Closers: Sprayed to match US4. f. Kickplates,Push/Pull: US4. g. Stops and Misc.: US4. C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating(if any), composition,hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. D. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze, and aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. The suffix "-NL" is used with standard finish designations to indicate "no lacquer." DOOR HARDWARE 08710-9 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 2.6 LOCKS,LATCHES,AND BOLTS Awkk A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide flat lip strikes for locks with 3-piece, antifriction latchbolts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Provide extra long strike lips for locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Provide recess type top strikes for bolts locking into head frames,unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide dust-proof strikes for foot bolts, except where special threshold construction provides nonrecessed strike for bolt. 5. Provide roller type strikes where recommended by manufacturer of the latch and lock units. 6. Provide standard (open) strike plates for interior doors of residential units where wood door frames are used. B. Lock Throw: Provide 5/8-inch minimum throw of latch on pairs of doors. Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings. 1. Provide 1/2-inch minimum throw of latch for other bored and preassembled types of locks and 3/4-inch minimum throw of latch for mortise locks. Provide 1-inch minimum throw for all dead bolts. C. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/2-inch-diameter rods of brass, bronze, or stainless steel with minimum 12-inch-long rod for doors up to T-0" in height. Provide longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding 7-0"in height. 2.7 PUSH/PULL UNITS A. Exposed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for installation, thru-bolted for matched pairs but not for single units. 2.8 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. 1. Where parallel arms are indicated for closers, provide closer unit one size larger than recommended for use with standard arms. B. Access-Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide adjustable units complying with ANSI Al 17.1 provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing. Closers also to comply with ADA and Massachusetts Barriers Board requirements. C. Combination Door Closers and Holders: Provide units designed to hold door in open position under normal usage and to release and close door automatically under fire conditions. Incorporate an integral electromagnetic holder mechanism designed for use with UL listed fire detectors, provided with normally closed switching contacts. 1. Provide integral smoke detector device in combination door closers and holders complying with UL 228. DOOR HARDWARE 08710-8 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA D. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws,except as specifically indicated. E. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including"prepared for paint"surfaces to receive painted finish. F. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work,provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. 2.4 HINGES,BUTTS,AND PIVOTS A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames,provide only template-produced units. B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following requirements: 1. For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes. 2. For wood doors and frames install wood screws. 3. For fire-rated wood doors install#12 x 1-1/4-inch,threaded-to-the-head steel wood screws. 4. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots. C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated,provide hinge pins as follows: 1. Out-Swing Exterior Doors: Nonremovable pins. 2. Out-Swing Corridor Doors with Locks: Nonremovable pins. 3. Interior Doors: Nonrising pins. 4. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves, except where hospital tip(HT) indicated. D. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height. 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 86 inches or less in height with same rule for additional hinges. E. Width of Hinges: Shall be sufficient to clear all trim or moldings. 2.5 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. Provide construction cylinders as required by the Contractor. B. Existing System: Grandmasterkey the locks to the Owner's existing system, with a new masterkey for the Project. The existing system is Corbin/Russwin Master Ring Cylinders to be provided by the Owner. DOOR HARDWARE 08710-7 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 2.2 SCHEDULED HARDWARE €, Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following: 1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is specified under the Article "Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with requirements. 2. ANSI/BHMA designations used elsewhere in this Section or in schedules to describe hardware items or to define quality or function are derived from the following standards. Provide products complying with these standards and requirements specified elsewhere in this Section. a. Butts and Hinges: ANSUBHMA A156.1. b. Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.2. C. Exit Devices: ANSI/BHMA A156.3. d. Door Controls-Closers: ANSI/BHMA A156.4. e. Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products: ANSI/BHMA A156.5. f. Architectural Door Trim: ANSI/BHMA A156.6. g. Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSI/BHMA A156.7. h. Door Controls-Overhead Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.8. i. Interconnected Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.12. j. Mortise Locks and Latches: ANSUBHMA A156.13. k. Sliding and Folding Door Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.14. 1. Closer Holder Release Devices: ANSI/BHMA A156.15. M. Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.16. n. Self-Closing Hinges and Pivots: ANSI/BHMA A156.17. o. Materials and Finishes: ANSI/BHMA A156.18. 2.3 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect. I. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated,except as otherwise specified. C. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units for finish designations indicated. DOOR HARDWARE 08710-6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA a. Baldwin Hardware Corp. b. Corbin&Russwin Architectural Hardware,Div. Black&Decker Corp. C. Hager Hinge Co. d. Hiawatha, Inc. e. H.B. Ives,A Harrow Company. f Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company(Trimco). 8. Overhead Closers: a. LCN,Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group--No Substitution. 9. Smoke-Activated Closers: a. Corbin&Russwin Architectural Hardware,Div.Black&Decker Corp. b. Dor-O-Matic. C. Dorma Door Controls International. d. LCN,Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. e. Norton Door Controls,Div.Yale Security Inc. f. Rixson-Firemark,Div. Yale Security Inc. g. Yale Security Inc. 10. Door Control Devices: a. Baldwin Hardware Corp. b. Builders Brass Works Corp. C. Corbin&Russwin Architectural Hardware,Div.Black&Decker Corp. d. Glynn-Johnson Corp. e. Hager Hinge Co. £ H. B.Ives,A Harrow Company. g. Quality Hardware Mfg. Co.,Inc.;Div.Newman Tonks,Inc. h. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company(Trimco). 11. Door Trim Units: a. Baldwin Hardware Corp. b. Builders Brass Works Corp. C. Hager Hinge Co. d. H.B.Ives,A Harrow Company. e. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company(Trimco). 12. Kick,Mop,and Armor Plates: a. Baldwin Hardware Corp. b. Corbin&Russwin Architectural Hardware,Div.Black&Decker Corp. C. Hager Hinge Co. d. Hiawatha,Inc. e. H. B. Ives,A Harrow Company. f. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company(Trimco). DOOR HARDWARE 08710-5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1.7 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Butts and Hinges: a. Hager Hinge Co. b. McKinney Products Co. C. Stanley Hardware,Div. Stanley Works. 2. Pivots: a. Glynn-Johnson Corp. b. Hager Hinge Co. C. LCN,Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. d. Norton Door Controls,Div.Yale Security Inc. IWO%, e. Rixson-Firemark,Div. Yale Security Inc. f Stanley Hardware,Div. Stanley Works. 3. Key Control System: a. Key Control Systems,Inc. b. Telkee Inc. 4. Cylinders and Locks: a. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp. -- No Substitution. 5. Bolts: a. Builders Brass Works Corp. b. Glynn-Johnson Corp. C. Hager Hinge Co. d. H.B. Ives,A Harrow Company. e. Quality Hardware Mfg. Co.,Inc.;Div.Newman Tonks,Inc. f. Stanley Hardware,Div. Stanley Works. 6. Exit/Panic Devices: a. Von Duprin,Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group--No Substitution. 7. Push/Pull Units: DOOR HARDWARE 08710-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA D. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware(latch and lock sets,hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer. B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity,that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity,type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor,at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation. 1. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing. C. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule,and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. B. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container. C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct. D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or Project site). E. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. DOOR HARDWARE 08710-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA fasteners, and Owner's maintenance tools required to comply with specified requirements and -Oak% as needed to install and maintain hardware. Furnish or replace any items of door hardware resulting from shortages and incorrect items at no cost to the Owner or Contractor. Obtain signed receipts from Contractor for all delivered materials. C. Contractor's responsibilities shall be as follows: 1. Submittals: Coordinate and process submittals for door hardware in same manner as submittals for other work. 1 Construction Schedule: Cooperate with door hardware supplier in establishing scheduled dates for submittals and delivery of templates and door hardware. Incorporate in construction schedule the times and dates related to furnishing hardware by door hardware supplier. 3. Coordination: Coordinate door hardware with other Work. Furnish hardware supplier or manufacturer with shop drawings of other work where required or requested. Verify completeness and suitability of hardware with supplier. 4. Product Handling: Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the site. Inventory hardware jointly with representative of hardware supplier and issue signed receipts for all delivered materials. 5. Installation Information: The general types and approximate quantities of hardware required for this Project are indicated at the end of this Section in order to establish Contractor's costs for installation and other work not included in allowance. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification sections. B. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions,maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness,hand,function,and finish of door hardware. 1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: a. Type,style, function,size,and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. C. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations,symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. 2. Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule. DOOR HARDWARE 08710-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 08710-DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hinges. 2. Pivots. 3. Lock and latch sets. 4. Bolts. 5. Exit devices. 6 Push/pull units. 7 Closers. 8 Miscellaneous door control devices. 9 Door trim units. 10 Electro-magnetic hold open devices 11. Protection plates. B. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include: 1. Cylinders for locks on entrance doors. 2. Final replacement cores and keys to be installed by Owner. 1.3 HARDWARE COORDINATION A. Selection and Ordering: Furnish door hardware as scheduled and in such quantities required. B. Door hardware supplier's responsibilities shall be as follows: 1. Submittals: Submit through Contractor required product data and final hardware schedule as specified in this Section,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Construction Schedule: Inform Contractor promptly of estimated times and dates that will be required to process submittals, to furnish templates, to deliver hardware, and to perform other work associated with furnishing door hardware for purposes of including this data in construction schedule. Comply with this schedule. 3. Coordination and Templates: Assist Contractor as required to coordinate hardware with other work in respect to both fabrication and installation. Furnish Contractor with templates and deliver hardware to proper locations. 4. Product Handling: Package, identify, deliver, and inventory door hardware specified in this Section. 5. Discrepancies: Based on requirements indicated in Contract Documents in effect at time of door hardware selection, furnish types, finishes, and quantities of door hardware, including DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 4. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. D. Field-Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements: 1. Division 9 Section "Painting." 3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors will be without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08212 WOOD DOORS 08212-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA * a. Customized fabricated tomatch existing,2'/4"thick six panel mahogany doors. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wood doors to comply with the following requirements: 1. In sizes indicated for job-site fitting. B. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame shop drawings,DHI Al 15-W series standards,and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with factory machining. C. Glazed Openings: Glaze doors at factory for applications indicated. D. Glazed Openings: Trim glazed openings with solid wood moldings of profile indicated, with one side removable. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door: 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions and referenced quality standard and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to requirements ofNFPA 80. C. Job-Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1. Fitting Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Provide 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, 1/16 inch per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors, and 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4-inch clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2. Fitting Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: Comply with NFPA 80. 3. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. WOOD DOORS 08212-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1. Mark, label,or otherwise identify panel wood doors as complying with NWWDA I.S.6. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's instructions. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during the remainder of the construction period to comply with the following requirements applicable to Project's geographical location: 1. AWI quality standard Section 100-S-11 "Relative Humidity and Moisture Content." PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following doors: 1. Interior two panel solid core wood doors: a. Millenium Series SR-5000, precision engineered doors, model 5102, manufactured by American Building Supply, Inc., Sacramento, CA 95828. Installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1) Unfinished white maple 3-ply hardwood veneer with raised premium hardwood molding, (one face only at locations indicated on drawings). Twenty minute fire rating. Provide manufacturer's five year warranty. 2. Interior flush solid core doors: a. American Door Manufacturing, 1488 Tillie Lewis Drive, Stockton, CA 95206, PBC-1 7 ply construction, select grade white maple hardwood face for transparent and opaque field applied finish. 3. Glazed wood french doors: a. Custom fabricated with safety glazing,combination pine(for transparent finished face and poplar for opaque finished face). 4. Exterior wood doors: WOOD DOORS 08212-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 08212-WOOD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior two panel solid core doors. 2. Interior flush solid cove doors. 3. Interior glazed french doors 4. Exterior six panel doors B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork"for wood door frames. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of door, including details of construction, glazing, and factory-finishing specifications. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard: Comply with the following standard: 1. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute for grade of door,construction, finish,and other requirements. B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Provide wood doors that comply with NFPA 80;are identical in materials and construction to units tested in door and frame assemblies per ASTM E 152;and are labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials except where those of Category I are expressly indicated and permitted. D. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain doors from one source and by a single manufacturer. E. Product Certification: Require door manufacturer to certify that doors comply with specified requirements including those of referenced door standard. WOOD DOORS 08212- 1 i Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA t 3. At existing concrete or masonry construction, install at least 3 completed opening an- chors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Set frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts and masonry an- chorage devices. 4. In metal-stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In steel-stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws. 5. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. i C. Door Installation: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI/SDI 100. 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install with clearances specified in NFPA 80. j 2. Smoke-Control Doors: Comply with NFPA 105. If 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of ! prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. END OF SECTION 08110 I t i i E i f } P E i Amok„ STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA 1. Provide nonremovable stops on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 2. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing beads on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 2.6 FINISHES,GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. B. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1,"for steel sheet finishes. C. Apply primers and organic finishes to doors and frames after fabrication. 2.7 STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel to comply with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning)or SSPC- SP 8(Pickling). B. Pretreatment: Immediately after surface preparation, apply a conversion coating of type suited to organic coating applied over it. C. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer that complies with ANSI A224.1 acceptance criteria, is compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and has capability to pro- vide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats. Apply primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufac- turer's data, and as specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. Except for frames located in existing concrete, masonry, or gypsum board assembly con- struction, place frames before constructing enclosing walls and ceilings. 2. In masonry construction, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge loca- tion on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110- 5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA C. Plaster Guards: Provide minimum 0.0179-inch- thick steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. D. Grout: When required in masonry construction, as specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Ma- sonry." 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI 100 requirements. 1. Internal Construction: One of the following manufacturer's standard core materials ac- cording to SDI standards: a. Rigid mineral fiber with internal sound deadener on inside of face sheets. 2. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch between non-fire-rated pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom. a. Fire Doors: Provide clearances according to NFPA 80. B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from only cold-rolled steel sheet. C. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames." D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold-or hot-rolled steel sheet. E. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for ex- posed screws and bolts. F. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Com- ply with applicable requirements of SDI 107 and ANSI Al 15 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. G. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for sur- face-applied hardware may be done at Project site. H. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to the Door and Hardware Institute's (DHI) "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." I. Glazing Stops: Minimum 0.0359-inch-thick steel or 0.040-inch-thick aluminum. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA i. Kewanee Corp. j. Mesker Door,Inc. k. (The)Phillip Mfg. Co. 1. Pioneer Industries. m. Republic Builders Products. n. Steelcraft. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial-quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, com- plying with ASTM A 569. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Carbon steel complying with ASTM A 366, commercial quality, or ASTM A 620,drawing quality, special killed. C. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.0478-inch- thick steel sheet; 0.0516- inch-thick galvanized steel where used with galvanized steel frames. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 153,Class C or D as applicable. 2.3 DOORS , - A. Steel Doors: Provide 1-3/4-inch- thick doors of materials and ANSI/SDI 100 grades and mod- els specified below, or as indicated on Drawings or schedules: 1. Interior Doors: Level I, standard-duty, Model 1, full flush design, minimum 0.0359-inch- thick cold-rolled steel sheet faces. B. Door Louvers: Provide louvers according to SDI I I IC for interior doors where indicated, with blades or baffles formed of 0.0239-inch- thick cold-rolled steel sheet set into minimum 0.0359- inch-thick steel frame. 1. Sight-Proof Louvers: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped blades. 2.4 FRAMES A. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, ac- cording to ANSI/SDI 100, and of types and styles as shown on Drawings and schedules. Con- ceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate frames of minimum 0.0478-inch- thick cold-rolled steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners. 2. Fabricate frames for interior openings over 48 inches wide from 0.0598-inch- thick steel sheet. B. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double-door frames. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ,. A. Provide doors and frames complying with ANSI/SDI 100 "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames"and as specified. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per ASTM E 152, and are labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authori- ties having jurisdiction. 1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that doors conform to all standard construction requirements of tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size. 2. Temperature-Rise Rating: At stair enclosures, provide doors that have a temperature-rise rating of 450 deg F maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided re- finished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity cham- ber. If cardboard wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide mini- mum 1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol- lowing: 1. Steel Doors and Frames: a. Amweld Building Products,Inc. b. Benchmark Commercial Doors. C. Ceco Door Products. d. Copco Door Co. e. Curries Co. f. Deansteel Manufacturing Co. g. Friedrich& Co. h. Fenestra Corp. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA SECTION 08110-STEE11 DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes steel doors and frames. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for building anchors into and grouting frames in ma- sonry construction. 2. Division 8 Section 'Door Hardware"for door hardware and weatherstripping. 3. Division 8 Section"Glazing" for glass in steel doors and sidelights. 4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for spot grouting frames in gypsum board partitions. "* 5. Division 9 Section"Painting"for field painting primed doors and frames. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Divi- sion 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction, mate- rials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construc- tion,location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. D. Door Schedule: Submit schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Contract Drawings. 1. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. E. Oversize Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire rated and exceed- ing limitations of labeled assemblies, submit certification of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to conform to design, materials, and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. 3.6 ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Vertical Joints(exterior windows and doors): 1. Tremco: Dymonic Polyurethene B. Horizontal Joints(walks and paving): 1. Base Polymer: Urethane. 2. Type: Single Compenent. 3. Grade: P(pourable) 4. Manufacturer: a. Mameco: Vulkem 45 b. Pecora: NR-201 Urexpan C. Sonneborn: Sonolastic SL1. C. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Provide products formulated with fungicide that are in- tended for sealing interior nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes, and that comply with the following: 1. Products: Provide the following a. Tremsil 600 White; Tremco. 2. Applications: Use at joints between plumbing fixtures and walls and floors. END OF SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 7 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch,twist,puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints. E. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time back- ings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow op- timum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or cur- ing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint configuration, per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193,where indicated. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration, per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193,of recess depth and at locations indicated. a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by meth- ods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA ,, C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint- sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sea- lants, oil,grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt,and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. 3. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. a. Metal. b. Glass. C. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufac- turer,based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint- sealant bond, do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by clean- ing methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each type in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as dem- onstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses. 2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING look. A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manu- facturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self- adhesive tape where applicable. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to pro- mote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. A""'" JOINT SEALANTS 07920-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the fol- lowing conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. 2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 3. When joint substrates are wet. B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 1.8 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addi- tion to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by elastomeric sealant manufac- turer agreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty pe- riod. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manu- facturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by struc- tural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals,tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric con- taminants. PART 2 -PRODUCTS JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sea- lants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products fur- nished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. E. SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. F. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for com- patibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. G. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating sealants comply with re- quirements,based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations. H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has re- sulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manu- facturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicat- ing manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS JOINT SEALANTS 07920-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA SECTION 07920-JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by refer- ence to this Section: B. This Section includes sealants for the following applications: 1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. C. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows. ** d. Other joints as indicated. 2. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, win- dows, and elevator entrances. C. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors,and counters. d. Other joints as indicated. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section"Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters of acoustical ceilings. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water- resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.4 SUBMITTALS JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces,removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA ' 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. B. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof; form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep,filled with mastic sealant(concealed within joints). D. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered,removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches,except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work. 1. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. E. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable,joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant. 1. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered. F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. G. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact,with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Bed flanges of Work in a thick coat of roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. H. Counterflashings: Coordinate installation of counterflashings with installation of assemblies to be protected by counterflashing. Install counterflashings in reglets or receivers. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant, lead wedges and sealant, interlocking folded seam, or blind rivets and sealant. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 2 inches and bed with sealant. 1. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate roof-penetration flashing installation with roofing and installation of items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows: 1. 20 oz. copper telescoping covers for ventstacks SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA I. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view. J. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being anchored or from compatible,noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. 1. Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but never less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.4 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. General: Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than that listed below for each application and metal. B. Gutters: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Copper: 24 oz./sq. ft. C. Downspouts: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. D. Ridge Caps: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. E. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Copper: 20 oz./sq. ft. F. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. G. Valley Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Copper: 24 oz./sq. ft. H. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Copper: 20 oz./sq. ft. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA C. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene;nonhardening,nonskinning,nondrying,nonmigrating sealant. D. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." E. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and weather- resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal. F. Paper Slip Sheet: 5-lb/square red rosin, sized building paper conforming to FS UU-B-790, Type I, Style lb. G. Polyethylene Underlayment: ASTM D 4397,minimum 6-mil-thick black polyethylene film, resistant to decay when tested according to ASTM E 154. H. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed; noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance. 1. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586,Type I,asbestos free,asphalt based. 2.3 FABRICATION,GENERAL A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with ' recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions,metal,and other characteristics of the item indicated. B. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. C. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning,buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated,with exposed edges folded back to form hems. D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams,and solder. E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. F. Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof; form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges,not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant(concealed within joints). G. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable,joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. H. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners,and other information specified. 1. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience Installer who has completed sheet metal flashing and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Mockups: Prior to installing sheet metal flashing and trim, construct mockups indicated to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. 1. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Construct mockups for the following type of sheet metal flashing and trim: a. Gutters and downspouts. b. Exposed trim,gravel stops,and fasciae. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work. 6. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance,durability of Work,and protection of materials and finishes. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Copper: ASTM B 370; temper H00, cold rolled except where temper 060 is required for forming; not less than 16 oz./sq. ft.,unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. B. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic,nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers,compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 07620- SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories: 1. Roof-drainage systems. 2. Exposed trim. 3. Metal flashing. 4. Dormers. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof hatches, vents,and other manufactured roof accessory units. C. See Division 1 Section-Alternates for description of work in this section related to alternates 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement,thermally induced movement,and exposure to weather without failing. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data including manufacturer's material and finish data, installation instructions, and general recommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated product. C. Shop Drawings of each item specified showing layout, profiles, methods of joining, and anchorage details. D. Samples of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory items, in the specified finish. Where finish involves normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets composed of 2 or more units showing the full range of variations expected. 1. 8-inch-square Samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished surfaces. 2. 12-inch-long Samples of factory-fabricated products exposed as finished Work. Provide complete with specified factory finish. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrate according to roofing ► system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of flashing sheet at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing. C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing as recommended by manufacturer. D. Clean seam areas,overlap sheets, and firmly roll flashings into the adhesive. Weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. E. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations. F. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect. 1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of the date and time of inspection. 3.7 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect sheet membrane roofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage,describing its nature and extent in a written report,with copies to Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, reinstall roofing,and repair sheet flashings to a condition free of damage and deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures required by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07533 SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533 -6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of the roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 3.3 ADHERED SHEET INSTALLATION A. Install thermoplastic sheet over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll sheet and allow to relax for a minimum of 30 minutes. B. Start installation of sheet in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. C. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. D. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of sheet. E. Apply a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, at a rate required by roofing system manufacturer, to substrate and install fabric-backed sheet. Keep seam area and remainder of sheet free of asphalt. F. Mechanically fasten sheet securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing. G. Apply roofing sheet with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. H. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing sheet in place with clamping ring. L Install adhered thermoplastic sheet and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing. 3.4 SEAM INSTALLATION A. Clean seam areas, overlap sheets, and weld side and end laps of sheets and flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Weld seam as follows: 1. Weld Method: Solvent B. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply seam calk to seal cut edges of sheet membrane. C. Repair tears,voids,and lapped seams in roofing that does not meet requirements. 3.5 FLASHING INSTALLATION SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533 -5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard bonding adhesive. D. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet,of type required for application. E. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard aluminum bars, approximately 1 inch wide, roll formed and prepunched. F. Insulating Materials: Provide matierals as follows: 1. Polyisocyanurate Board Roof Insulation: Rigid, cellular, thermal insulation with polyisocyanurate closed-cell foam core and manufacturer's standard facing laminated to both sides;complying with FS HH-1-1972/2,Class 1. G. Auxiliary Insulation Materials; Provide materials as follows: 1. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with fire-resistance requirements. 2. Mastic Sealer: type recommended by insulation manufacturer for bonding edge joints and filling voids. 3. Mechanial Anchors: Corrosion-resistant type as recommended by insulation manufacturer for deck type,and complying with fire and insurance wind-uplift rating requirements. a. Provide system tested and approved for I-60 wind-uplift rating. H. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions of FM 4470, designed for fastening sheet to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. 1. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T joint covers, seam calk, termination reglets, and other accessories recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which roofing will be applied, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements. B. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains are properly clamped into position. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. 100W SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533 -4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling,storing,and protecting during installation. D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing to be installed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.9 WARRANTY A. General Warranty. The warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Roofing Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit a written warranty, without monetary limitation, signed by ., roofing system manufacturer agreeing to promptly repair leaks resulting from defects in materials or workmanship for the following warranty period: 1. Warranty Period:Fifteen year Golden Seal Total System Warranty. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. EDPM Sure Seal reinforced 060 a. Carlisle Syntec Systems;Carlisle Corp. 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing material. 1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material,type, thickness, and color as sheet membrane. SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533 -3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA A. Product Data: For each type of roofing product specified. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements. E. Samples for Verification: Of the following products: 1. 12-by42-inch square of sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam. 2. 12-by-12-inch square of walkway pads. C. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved, authorized,or licensed by manufacturer to install specified roofing system. D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that the roofing system complies with requirements specified in the"Performance Requirements"Article. Upon request, submit evidence of meeting requirements. E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners,and other information specified. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency, indicate compliance of components of roofing system with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current product compositions. G. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of roofing system's compliance with building code in effect for Project,from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. H. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. I. Warranty: Sample copy of standard roofing system manufacturer's warranty stating obligations, remedies,limitations,and exclusions of warranty. J. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roofing installation. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing roofing similar to that required for this Project and who is approved, authorized, or licensed by the roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name,product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and _A4%, within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid materials from direct sunlight. SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533 -2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 07533-SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Adhered sheet roofing. 2. Rigid Roof Insulation. (Tapered) B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, cants, and blocking; and wood- based,structural-use roof deck panels. 2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings, flashings and counterflashings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 for definition of terms related to roofing work not otherwise defined in this Section. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install sheet membrane roofing and base flashing that are watertight; will not permit the passage of liquid water; and will withstand wind loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required,as demonstrated by roofing system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. FM Listing: Provide sheet membrane, base flashings, and component materials that meet requirements of FM 4450 and FM 4470 as part of a roofing system and that are listed in FM's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction,as applicable. Identify materials with FM markings. 1. Roofing system shall comply with the following: a. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90. 1.5 SUBMITTALS SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533 - 1 RenovatiQ;,,.�qmstock-Wilder Q - t� April 15,'2000 Smith Col ;-Nokhampton,MA r-2 - n -_ Una w tal r w a J N l5 I 0 r Q w `... UJ p � 2.+ `y t z 0� �• v d� Ypb/i al of S w U r 0 S ' Z4 =� uj �Id Q O_ d Wo�l9 wuj o j ��Iu ps d J ( we e w �yx -:R 0 ZQ 0 - - �° � %L. W LU S� f r-W F r u o > -4 t- " ° o ;z(3 � . � Z ? CIA -to s i OL Luqtr r L=ce=jl i r v -- - c u- I Wr - - U1 p�r _ bt r awa O d Q p0 wtL w ,, END OF SECTION 07315 -� 2D -2 a SLAT 1 G " 07315 -9 , a N O s Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA Comstock-Wilder specs Slate 10x18 North Country unfading black (New England slate co.) (12x18'S for valley&hip cuts) Copper Flat copper roofing 2402 Gutters 24OZ Valleys 240Z Downspouts 20OZ all copper will be cold-rolled Ventstacks 20OZ All other flashings 20OZ Copper bar stock 1"X1/4" (1"x 1/8"for downspout hangers) Roof hatches Bilco S-50 aluminum TV X TO" All nuts,bolts,screws stainless steel All nails copper Ice&water W.RGrace Snowgnards R&L Sheetmetal guards with'/,galvanized waterpipe with threaded caps Single Ply membrane for flat roofing Cadisle EPDM .060 reinforced Sure-Seal with Carlisle flashings including seam tape (fully adhered system) All single ply roofing will have a 15year Gold Seal warranty Insulation - 2"Polyisosvanurate Drains All new drains will be castiron,4",with castiron covers Drains installed by a licenced plumber i r a 3 i i SLATE SHINGLES 07315 - 8 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA Chimney caps and flashing under stone caps will be20OZ copper. Cupolo flashing will be 20OZ copper. Gable end returns will be 20OZ copper recessed into building. Ridge caps will be 20OZ copper.and will be fastened with continuous clips. MEMBRANE ROOFING Flat roofs will be Carlisle.060 reinforced Sure-Seal EPDM membrane.Roofing to be. installed over 2"polyisocyanurate insulation. System will be"A" system(fully adhered).__._ All flashings will be as per Carlisle specs. All seams will be done with seam tape. Membrane roofs will have a 15 year Gold Seal manuficbtrers warranty. i New 4"drains will be cast iron with cast iron strainers and will be installed by a licenced plumber. MISC. Snowguards will be installed over cellar enhances and ADA entrances,including walkways and ramps leading to them Snowguards will be as specified with brackets spaced not more than T apart,fastened with#14X11/2"screws.All guards will have as few joints as possible. Roof hatches will be replaced with new Bilcos as per spec.with appropriate access to hatch from attic floor. 1 i SLATE SHINGLES 07315 - 7 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April JS,.2606- - Smith College,Northampton,MA COMSTOCK-WILDER TEAROFF All existing roofing with the exception of the rubber roof over the kitchen area will be Tom and removed down to the deck All copper dormers and crickets will be removed along with any roofing that may be Below them. SLATE ROOFS All slate will be 10&12x18 as specified. Allslate will be installed with a centered sidelap and a 3"headlap. 12"slate will be used on all miters where required to avoid sliver pieces. Slate will be installed with 11/2"copper,smooth shank,roofing nails. Allhips will have copper flashings between each course(3=10). Where needed,slate hooks will be stainless steel. No warped or broken slate will be installed Contractor guarranty and maintain slate roof for five years. Any leftover slate becomes the property of the owner. i WATERPROOFING I Ice and watershield will be installed 3'wide in all valleys,along all rakes,6'high at all eaves,extending below built-in gutters,below copper crickets and dormers(covered with red rosin paper). All felt paper will be#30 and will be used beneath all slate roofing and as needed Sealants used on masonry flashings will be a one part urethane sealant(Tremco, Sonolastic,Etc.). COPPER ROOFS AND FLASHINGS All upper dormers will be flat seamed,soldered joints,with copper edge metal to match existing.Panels will be no longer than an 18X24 cut(24 OZ.),fastened with copper clips as per approved method Crickets will be flat seamed,soldered joints with a minimum 6"up the masonry walls and will be 24OZ. copper. Counter fleshings can be 20OZ>copper. Gutters will be 240Z.copper fabricated to match configuration of originals.Expansion joints to be installed no more than 30 feet apart Copper bar joints will staggered at least 3"from gutter joints. Ou tletswill be 24OZ. Valleys will be 2402,copper with a minimum 6"slate coverage and will be installed with clips fastened with copper nails. Ventstack and airvent flashings will be 240Z.copper. Vemstack flashings will have telescoping covers. Ornimental covers on airvents will be reused or duplicated if damaged during removal.Tubes and flanges will be replaced. Downspouts will be 20OZ copper and will be attached to building using brackets shown in details.Brackets will be spaced 5'on center.Arrf offsets in downspouts will have radiused angles. All seams will be soldered Ground drains will be reamed out and water tested before downspouts are tied in.Downspouts will be attached to plastic pipes with plastic 3"X5"to 6"plastic adapters Plastic pipes will be cut to within 6"of grade. All flat roof edge metal will be 20OZ.copper and match existing. All stepflashings,counterflashings,hatch flashings,and any other misc.flashings will be 20OZ. copper. SLATE SHINGLES 07315 -6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA 00.1- of slate shingles and break(stagger)joints between courses a minimum of 3 inches. Provide a 2-inch projection of slat at eaves and 1-inch projection at gables. Cut and fit slate neatly around roof vents, pipes, ventilators, and other projections through roof. 1. Nail slate shingles so nail heads just touch slate lightly. Do not drive nails home drawing slates downward or leave nail head protruding enough to interfere with overlapping shin- gle above. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace damaged or broken slates. B. Remove excess slate and debris from Project site. END OF SECTION 07315 1000*1 look, SLATE SHINGLES 07315 - 5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA f. Tremco Butyl Sealant 505; Tremco, Inc. 2. Joint Sealant: One-part elastomeri Polyurethane polysulfide, or silicone-rubber sealant as recommended in writing by shingle manufacturer. Where sealant will be exposed, pro- vide in color matching shingle 3. Mastic: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated, asphalt cement designed for trowel appli- cation. 4. Soffit vents: 3" mini louvers — Model FML-10, aluminum, white, as manufactured by The Solar Group,Taylorsville, MD,or approved equal. 5. Power Ventilators: model RVA-151, Aluminum, factory finish (black) as manufactured by The Solar Group, or approved equal PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate and conditions under which slate shingle Work is to be performed; notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Proceed with slate shingle Work only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Substrate: Proceed with slate shingle installation only after substrate construction, vent stacks, and other penetrating work is complete and when substrate materials are dry. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Sheet Metal Flashing Installation: Install sheet metal flashing, vent flashing, and edge protec- tion as indicated and in compliance with details and recommendations of NRCA's "Steep Roofing Manual"and"Copper and Common Sense". 1. Where flashings occur perpendicular to slope, return sheet metal a minimum of 4 inches under shingles. B. Felt Underlayment Installation: Apply one layer of felt over entire roof surface, beginning at eaves, with courses perpendicular to slope of roof. Lap succeeding courses 2 inches minimum, with 6-inch-minimum end laps. Fasten with sufficient nails to hold in place until slate shingles are installed. C. Bituminous Underlayment: Install at locations shown on roof plan in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. . D. Slate shingle Installation: Beginning at eaves, install slate shingles according to written rec- ommendations of manufacturer and details and recommendations of NRCA's "Steep Roofing "" Manual". Unless other indicated, provide at least a 3-inch head lap between succeeding courses SLATE SHINGLES 07315 -4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA 2.3 COPPER MATERIAL A. Copper built-in gutters and downspouts: All fully exposed copper flashing cold-rolled copper sheet complying with ASTM B 370 temper designation, H00, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Weight: 16 oz. per sq. ft. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Weight: 20 oz. per sq. ft. for valleys and ridge caps. 2.4 UNDERLAYMENTS A. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type H, No. 30 asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt; minimum 26-inch-wide rolls. B. Modified Bituminous Underlayment: ASTM D 1970, self-adhering, polymer-modified, bitumi- nous sheet; 40 mils thick. Provide primer when recommended by manufacturer. 1. W.R. Grace Ice and Water Shield"Vycor Ultra" 2.5 FASTENERS A. Roofing Nails: 0.1055-inch-diameter-shank, hot-dip galvanized steel, Type ES, barbed-shank roofing nails; minimum 3/8-inch-diameter head, and long enough to penetrate 3/4 inch into solid decking or to penetrate through plywood sheathing. B. Slating Nails: 0.135-inch, diamond-point, smooth-shaft, hard copper-wire slating nails with large head; minimum 5/16-inch diameter, and long enough to penetrate either completely through or at least 3/4 inch into sheathing. C. Minimum Nail Length for Shingles 3/16 Inch Thick or Less: 1. For shingles 18 inches or less in length: 1-1/4 inches long. 2. For hip and ridge shingles: 2 inches long. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Plastic Cement: ASTM C 1085, one-part, nonsag, nonstaining, solvent-release-curing, polym- erized butyl sealant formulated with minimum of 75 percent solids; with a tack-free time of 24 hours or less. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: a. Chem-calk 300; Bostik Inc. b. PIT 757;H.B.Fuller Company C. BC-158;Pecora Corporation d. PSI 301;Polymeric Systems, Inc. e. Sonneborn Multi-Purpose Sealant; Sonneborn Building Products, Div. Of Chem- Rex, Inc. SLATE SHINGLES 07315 - 3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA A. Deliver slate shingles to Project site and store as close as possible to the point of installation to minimize damage while handling. B. Store and handle roofing materials to prevent breakage and ensure dryness. Store in a dry, well ventilated, weathertight place. Store rolls of felt and other sheet materials on end on pallets or another raised surface. C. Do not leave unused felts on roof overnight or when roofing work is not in progress unless pro- tected from weather or other moisture sources. D. Handle and store materials and equipment in a manner to avoid significant or permanent deflec- tion of deck. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Slate Shingles: Full-size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering slate shingles that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the fol- lowing: a. New England Slate Co.,North Country Unfading Black 2.2 SHINGLES A. Slate Shingles: Hard, dense, sound rock, machine punched o drilled for two nails located for proper head lap. No broken or cracked slated, no broken exposed corners, and no broken cor- ners on covered ends that could sacrifice nailing strength or laying of a watertight roof. No rib- bons in exposed portion of shingle, and curvature not to exceed 1/8 inch per 12 inches. 1. Classification: ASTM C 406. a. Grade S 1: Expected service life more than 75 years. 2. Thickness: Nominal 3/16 inch. 3. Length: 18 inches; 7-1/2-inch exposure with 3-inch lap. 4. Width: Random, but not less than one-half length. 5. Butt Shape: Standard square cut. 6. Weather-Exposure Color Change: Permanent or unfading. 7. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. SLATE SHINGLES 07315 -2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA SECTION 07315—SLATE SHINGLES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Slate shingles for standard slate roof replacement. 2. Flashing restoration and new roof and soffit vents. 3. Copper gutters and down spouts. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry"for cant strips,battens and nailers. C. Smith College Standard Roofmg and Flashing Standards attached to the end of this section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of product indicated B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations and sections at hips, gables, ridges, and eaves; com- ponent details; accessories; and attachments to other Work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of slate shingle indicated. D. Samples for Verification: Full-size units for each type of slate shingle indicate; in sets for each color, texture, shape, and size specified, showing the full range of variations expected. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Slate: Obtain each variety of slate from one source with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING SLATE SHINGLES 07315 - 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork plumb, level,true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for plumb and level(including tops). C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk,concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available)to the greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Fill gaps, if any,between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler,sand smooth,and finish same as wood base, if finished. 1. Install standing and running trim with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch variation from a straight line. F. Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. Calk space between backsplash and wall with specified sealant. 1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. G. Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to the extent not completed at shop or before installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats were applied in the shop. H. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair,replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean,lubricate,and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to fabricator and Installer that ensures that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. 000k END OF SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-7 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA A. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied backsplashes and edges, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid surfacing material manufacturer's recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication,and finishing. 1. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in the shop. B. Solid Surfacing Material Thickness: 1/2 inch C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solid surface material complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes. 2.7 INTERIOR ORNAMENTAL WORK FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 700. B. Quality Standard: Comply with WIC Section 11, "Miscellaneous Interior Millwork." 1. Grade: Premium. 2.8 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 900. 1. Grade: Premium. Auk 2.9 CLOSET RODS AND SHELVES A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 600 1. Grade: Custom 2. Wood: Natural Finish 3. Hardware: a. Adjustable Standards and Brackets: Chrome Plated Steel b. Rod: Chrome Plated Steel PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. 3.2 INSTALLATION INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1. Trial fit assemblies at the fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on approved shop drawings before disassembling for shipment. E. Shop-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and,where located in countertops and similar exposures,seal edges with a water-resistant coating. 2.4 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300. 1. Grade: Premium. B. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. C. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly. D. Wood Species: Match species and cut for existing types of opaque-finished architectural woodwork located in same area of building,unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 COUNTERTOPS AND CUBICAL STORAGE UNITS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for countertops. 1. WIC Section 14,"Wood Casework." 2. Grade: Premium. B. Type of Top: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following: 1. Grade: GP-50,0.050-inch nominal thickness. 2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: a. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes in the following categories: 1) Solid colors,with core same color as surface. 3. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. 4. Core Material: Phenolic resin,medium-density particleboard. 2.6 SOLID SURFACING MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA C. Solid Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with the material and performance requirements of ANSI Z124.3,Type 5 or Type 6,without a precoated finish. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: a. Conan;DuPont Polymers. b. Surell;Formica Corp. C. Fountainhead;Nevamar Corp. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with ASME B18.6.1 for applicable requirements. C. For removable skirts on lavatories provide stainless steel screws and finish washers 1. For metal framing supports,provide screws as recommended by metal-framing manufacturer. D. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements. E. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. 2.3 FABRICATION,GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard and of the following grade: 1. Grade: Premium. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of cabinets and edges of solid-wood(lumber)members 3/4 inch thick or less: 1/16 inch 2. Edges of rails and similar members more than 3/4 inch thick: 1/8 inch D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment to Project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A_ Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet-work is completed, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Verify locations of concealed framing, blocking, reinforcements, and fiuring that support woodwork by accurate field measurements before being enclosed. Record measurements on final shop drawings. 2. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and,where the following products are part of interior woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards that apply to product characteristics indicated: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1,Grade M-2. 2. Softwood Plywood: PS 1. 3. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1. B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3,grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative laminates by one of the following: a. Formica Corporation. b. Ralph Wilson Plastics Co. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcing specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers, and other items installed in architectural woodwork. D. Samples for initial selection of the following in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors,textures,and patterns available for each type of material indicated. 1. Plastic laminates. E. Samples for verification of the following: 1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, 50 sq. in, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. 2. Wood-veneer-faced panel products, with or for transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches, for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish one-half of face as specified. 3. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, 8 by 10 inches for panels and 50 sq. in. for lumber,for each finish system and color,with one-half of exposed surface finished. F. Product certificates signed by woodwork fabricator certifying that products comply with specified requirements. G. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners,and other information specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work. B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for interior architectural woodwork installation by a firm that can demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar in type and quality to those required for this Project. C. Quality Standard: Except as otherwise indicated,comply with the following standard: 1. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A_ Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration. B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 06402-INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Plastic-laminate cubical storage units. 3. Solid surfacing material countertops. 4. Flush wood paneling and wainscots. 5. Interior ornamental work. 6. Interior frames and jambs. 7. Closet rods and shelves. 8. Adjustable rods and shelves. 9. Stock wood columns,caps and bases B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry" for exposed framing and for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work concealed in the wall. 2. Division 8 Section"Wood Windows"for stock wood windows. 3. Division 9 Section "Wood Flooring" for wood flooring. 4. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field finishing of installed interior architectural woodwork. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction prior to woodwork installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product and process specified and incorporated into items of architectural woodwork during fabrication,finishing,and installation. C. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices,and other components. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to fabricator and Installer that ensures that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 06401 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 -5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members, kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. D. Wood Species: Western Red Cedar. 2.5 EXTERIOR ORNAMENTAL WORK FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 700. B. Grade: Premium. C. Wood Species: Honduras Mohagany PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for plumb and level. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches long,except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. 1. Install standing and running trim with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch variation from a straight line. F. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 -4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of exterior woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards that apply to product characteristics indicated: 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use, nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized,unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ASME B18.6.1 for applicable requirements. C. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements. 1. Stainless-steel nails. 2. Hot-dip galvanized nails. 3. Any material indicated above. D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts,unless otherwise indicated. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Edges of solid-wood(lumber)members 3/4 inch thick or less: 1/16 inch. 2. Edges of rails and similar members more than 3/4 inch thick: 1/8 inch . C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment to Project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. D. Shop-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, electrical work,and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and seal edges with a water-resistant coating suitable for exterior applications. 2.4 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300. B. Grade: Premium. EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 -3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A- Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work. B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for exterior architectural woodwork installation by a firm that can demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar in type and quality to those required for this Project. C. Quality Standard: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following standard: 1. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute for grades of exterior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Obtain and comply with woodwork manufacturer's and Installer's coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for woodwork during its storage. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation of exterior woodwork only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. C. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Verify locations of concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by accurate field measurements before being enclosed. Record measurements on final shop drawings. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that exterior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS larAk EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 -2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 06401 -EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior standing and running trim. 2. Exterior ornamental work including: a. Pilasters. b. Balusters. C. Columns. d. Railings B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for exposed framing and for blocking and other carpentry work concealed in the wall. 2. Division 8 Section"Wood Windows"for stock wood windows. 3. Division 9 Section "Painting"for field finishing of installed exterior architectural woodwork. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Exterior architectural woodwork includes wood blocking, shims, and nailers for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction prior to woodwork installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each t,pe of product and process specified and incorporated into items of architectural woodwork during fabrication,finishing, and installation. C. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show locations and sizes of blocking and nailers, including concealed blocking and reinforcing specified in other Sections. EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 - 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. 1. Comply with "Code Plus"provisions in above-referenced guide. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: a. Glue and nail to wood framing. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. C. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 2. Subflooring: a. Glue and nail to wood framing. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. C. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 3. Sheathing: a. Nail to wood framing. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. C. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 4. Underlayment: a. Nail to subflooring. b. Space panels 1/32 inch apart at edges and ends. C. Fill and sand edge joints of underlayment receiving resilient flooring just before installing flooring. 5. Plywood Backing Panels: Nail or screw to supports. 3.9 PARTICLEBOARD UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Comply with the National Particleboard Association's recommendations for type of subfloor indicated. Fill and sand gouges, gaps, and chipped edges. Sand uneven joints flush. 1. Fastening Method: Glue and nail underlayment to subflooring. 3.10 HARDBOARD UNDERLAYMENT A. Comply with AHA's "Application Instructions for Basic Hardboard Products" and hardboard manufacturer's written instructions for preparing and applying hardboard underlayment. 1. Fastening Method:Nail underlayment to subflooring. END OF SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 10 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 2.. For load-bearing walls, provide double-jamb studs for openings 72 inches and less in width, and triple jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth indicated. 3.6 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1-1/2 inches of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches on masonry. Attach floor joists as follows: 1. Where supported on wood members, by toe nailing or by using metal framing anchors. 2. Where framed into wood supporting members, by using wood ledgers as indicated or, if not indicated, by using metal joist hangers. B. Fire Cuts: At joists built into masonry, bevel cut ends 3 inches and do not embed more than 4 inches. C. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 48 inches. D. Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to one-sixth depth of joist, one-third at ends. Do not bore holes larger than 1/3 depth of joist; do not locate closer than 2 inches from top or bottom. E. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal thickness by depth of joist at ends of joists unless nailed to header or band. F. Provide bridging of type indicated below, at intervals of 96 inches o.c.,between joists. I. Diagonal wood bridging formed from bevel-cut, 1-by-3-inch nominal- size lumber, double-crossed and nailed at both ends to joists. 3.7 TIMBER FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Install timber with crown edge up and provide not less than 4 inches of bearing on supports. Provide continuous members, unless otherwise indicated; tie together over supports if not continuous. B. Where beams or girders are framed into pockets of exterior concrete or masonry walls, provide 1/2-inch air space at sides and ends of wood members. C. Install wood posts using metal anchors indicated or toe nails 4 sides. D. Treat ends of timber beams and posts exposed to weather by dipping in water-repellent preservative for 15 minutes. 3.8 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-9 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA C. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal- size furring horizontally and vertically at 600 mm o.c. D. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal- size furring vertically at 16 inches o.c. E. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal- size furring vertically at 400 mm O.C. F. Furring to Receive Plaster Lath: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal- size furring vertically at 16 inches O.C. 3.4 WOOD FRAMING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. B. Do not splice structural members between supports. C. Where built-up beams or girders of 2-inch nominal- dimension lumber on edge are required, fasten together with 2 rows of 20d nails spaced not less than 32 inches o.c. Locate one row near top edge and other near bottom edge. 1. For continuous members, locate end joints over supports. 3.5 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Arrange studs so wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or partition and narrow face is parallel. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-load-bearing partitions. Nail plates to supporting construction, unless otherwise indicated. B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches high, using members of 2-inch nominal thickness and of same width as wall or partitions. C. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level and at ceiling line of top story. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted wood blocks of 2-inch nominal-thick lumber of same width as framing members. D. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs. 1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs with headers not less than 4- inch nominal depth for openings 48 inches and less in width, 6-inch nominal depth for openings 48 to 72 inches in width, 8-inch nominal depth for openings 72 to 120 inches in low-° width, and not less than 10-inch nominal depth for openings 10 to 12 feet in width. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 8 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. C. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood. D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. E. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required. F. Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler. 3.2 WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER,BLOCKING,AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, secure anchor bolts to formwork before concrete placement. C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level and at ceiling,with wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal- size furring horizontally and vertically at 24 inches o.c. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 7 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; and,where indicated, flat washers. H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2.9 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. General: Provide framing anchors made from metal indicated, of structural capacity, type, and size indicated, and as follows: 1. Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated, with building code in effect for Project. 2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation. C. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- long seat and 1-1/4-inch- wide nailing flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth. 1. Thickness: 0.050 inch. D. I-Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- long seat and 1-1/4-inch- wide nailing flanges full depth of joist. Nailing flanges provide lateral support at joist top chord. 1. Thickness: 0.050 inch. E. Top Flange Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers, full depth of joist, formed from metal strap with tabs bent to extend over and be fastened to supporting member. 1. Strap Width: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Thickness: 0.050 inch. F. Bridging: Rigid, V-section, nailless type, 0.062 inch thick, length to suit joist size and spacing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA C. Plywood Subflooring: Exterior single-floor panels or sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 16 oc.. 2. Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch. D. Oriented-Strand-Board Subflooring: Exposure 1 single-floor panels or sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 16 oc. 2. Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch. E. Underlayment, General: Provide underlayment in nominal thicknesses indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/4 inch over smooth subfloors and not less than 3/8 inch over board or uneven subfloors. F. Plywood Underlayment for Resilient Flooring: DOC PS 1,Exterior A-C with fully sanded face. G. Plywood Underlayment for Ceramic Tile: DOC PS 1,Exterior, C-C Plugged, 5/8 inch thick, for ceramic tile set in epoxy mortar. H. Plywood Underlayment for Carpet: DOC PS 1,Exterior,C-C Plugged. I. Particleboard Underlayment: ANSI A208.1, Grade PBU. J. Hardboard Underlayment: AHA A135.4, Class 4 (Service), Surface S1S; with back side sanded. 2.7 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 inch thick. 2.8 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails,Brads,and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. F. Lag Bolts: ASME B 18.2.L. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA C. For all boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine,No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or Hem-fir(north), Standard or 3 Common grade;NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-fir, Standard or 3 Common grade; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. D. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.5 SHEATHING A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 16/0. 2. Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch min. B. Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 16/0. 2. Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch min. C. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 16/0. 2. Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch. D. Oriented-Strand-Board Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 16/0. 2. Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch. 2.6 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT A. Plywood Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, Structural I, Underlayment single-floor panels. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 16 oc. 2. Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch. 3. Edge Detail: Tongue and groove. 4. Surface Finish: Fully sanded face. B. Oriented-Stand-Board, Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: Exposure 1 single-floor panels. I. Span Rating: Not less than 16 oc. 2. Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch. 3. Edge Detail: Tongue and groove. 4. Surface Finish: Fully sanded face. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA 4. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 5. Hem-fir(north);NLGA. 6. Southern pine; SPIB. D. Load-Bearing Walls: Any species and grade with a modulus of elasticity of at least 1,300,000 psi and an extreme fiber stress in bending of at least 1000 psi for 2-inch nominal thickness and 12-inch nominal width for single-member use. E. Ceiling Joists (Non-Load-Bearing): Construction or No. 2 grade and any of the following species: 1. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA. 2. Douglas fir-south; WWPA. 3. Douglas fir-larch(north);NLGA. 4. Hem-fir;WCLIB or WWPA. 5. Hem-fir(north);NLGA. 6. Southern pine; SPIB. F. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: Construction or No. 2 grade and any of the following species: 1. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA. 2. Douglas fir-south; WWPA. 3. Douglas fir-larch(north);NLGA. 4. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 5. Hem-fir(north);NLGA. 6. Southern pine; SPIB. 7. Spruce-pine-fir(south);NELMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 8. Spruce-pine-fir;NLGA. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Blocking. 3. Cants. 4. Nailers. 5. Furring. 6. Grounds. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or Hem-fir(north);NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir(south)or Spruce-pine-fir;NELMA,NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work. 2.2 WOOD PRODUCTS,GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S,unless otherwise indicated. 5. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2- inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Structural Panels: 1. Plywood: DOC PS 1. 2. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2. , 3. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than thickness indicated. 4. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential&Commercial." 5. Factory mark panels according to indicated standard. 2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated. B. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade and the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or Hem-fir(north);NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir(south)or Spruce-pine-fir;NELMA,NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. C. Exterior and Load-Bearing Walls, Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Partitions, Construction or No. 2 grade and any of the following species: 1. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA. 2. Douglas fir-south; WWPA. 3. Douglas fir-larch(north);NLGA. Amok ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 06100-ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Framing with timber. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise indicated. B. Exposed Framing: Dimension lumber not concealed by other construction. C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NELMA-Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NLGA-National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. RIS-Redwood Inspection Service. 4. SPIB-Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB- West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA- Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548 may review work as directed. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 -PRODUCTS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout,concrete,masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings, if any. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop Amok painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 8 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA lookk 2.11 FINISHES,GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. r 2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: 1. ASTM A 123,for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M,for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors(SSPC Zone 113): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interiors(SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices,bolts,welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts,toggle bolts,through-bolts, lag bolts,wood screws, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-7 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA 1. Interior, where indicated. ►, 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports that are not a part of structural-steel framework as necessary to complete the Work. B. General: Provide steel framing and supports indicated and as necessary to complete the Work. C. Fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware,hangers, and similar items. 1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with inte- grally welded steel strap anchors 1-1/4 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 8 inches long at 24 inches o.c.,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM INCLUDING EXTERIOR STAIR RAILINGS. A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. Provide anchors, welded to trim, for embedding in concrete or masonry construction, spaced not more than 6 inches from each end, 6 inches from corners, and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. Attach railings to wall with cast iron railing brackets C. Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim in the following locations: 1. Exterior. 2.10 SECURITY SCREEN A. Fabricated of stainless steel wire cloth and aluminum frame with cross bars at mid-height B. Finish: Frame and cross bars painted with manufacturers standard baked polyester powder finish. C. Color: Selected by architect from manufacturers full range of standard colors. D. Operation: Secure with 2 spring bolts each and piano hinge at top. E. Back-up angles: 1"x 1"x 1/8"aluminum on four sides. F. Manufacturer: Kane Manufacturing Corp. security Level 5, model"A-Pro-28-B". Aftlk METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change(range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening up of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change(Range): 120 deg F,ambient; 180 deg F,material surfaces. I. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. J. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. K. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk)screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 2.7 STEEL LADDERS A. General: Fabricate ladders for locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details, and anchorages as indicated. 1. Comply with ANSI A14.3,unless otherwise indicated. 2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1. B. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges, spaced 18 inches apart. C. Bar Rungs: 3/4-inch-diameter steel bars, spaced 12 inches o.c. i { D. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails;plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. E. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets. Size brackets to support design loads specified in ANSI A14.3. F. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum-oxide grout. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Mebac; IKG Borden. b. SLIP-NOT; W. S. Molnar Company. G. Galvanize ladders, including brackets and fasteners, in the following locations: METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA E. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME B18.22.1. F. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel,ASME B18.21.1. G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488,conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material: Alloy Group 1 or 2 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 and nuts complying with ASTM F 594. H. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588,tumble-wing type, class and style as needed. 2.5 GROUT A. Nonshrink,Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining,noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. C. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strggth and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. -004 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA C. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads for exterior stair railings. E. Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, Grade 32510. F. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load imposed within a safety factor of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M. G. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. 2.3 PAINT A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section "Painting." B. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Organic zinc-rich primer, complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: a. Carboline 621; Carboline Company. b. Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670;PPG Industries, Inc. C. Tneme-Zinc 90-97; Tnemec Company, Inc. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and,where indicated, flat washers. C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. D. Machine Screws: ASME B 18.6.3. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE i.. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS 131.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 4. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS,GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks,rolled trade names, or roughness. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666,Type 304. loftk METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA SECTION 05500-METAL FABRICATIONS '_'AJ1ZT I -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel ladder(elevator pit). 2. Support angles for elevator door sills. 3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 4. Miscellaneous metal trim. 5. Exterior metal stair rails. 6. Security Screens 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes. 2. Cast nosings and treads. 3. Paint products. 4. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. I. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. C. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded nosing and tread. D. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel sheet certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. E. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA 1. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/71MS 602. C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean unit masonry by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints, as work progresses. B. After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. 2. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing the surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 4. Clean brick by the bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes No.20, using job-mixed detergent solution. 5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3.7 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Masonry Waste Disposal: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including broken masonry units, waste mortar,and excess or soil-contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. 2. Remove excess, clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810- 7 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA 3.2 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in bond pattern indicated; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. D. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts,and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows: 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including areas under cells. B. Lay solid brick-size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. B. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L"and "T" sections. 3.5 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA 2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES Tao General: Do not use admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270,Proportion Specification. C. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Limit pigments to the following percentages of cement content by weight: 1. For portland cement-lime mortar,not more than 10 percent. D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL ? A. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform source quality-control testing indicated below. 4 B. Brick Tests: For each type and grade of brick indicated, units will be tested according to ASTM C 67. C. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each type of concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be tested according to ASTM C 140. PART 3 -EXECUTION i 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 4 A. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. C. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at the time of laying. D. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following: 1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810- 5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA 1. Wire Size for Side Rods: W2.8 or 0.188-inch diameter. - . 2. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W2.8 or 0.188-inch diameter. 3. Single-Wythe Masonry: Use either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods and cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. 2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Materials, General: As follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating for exterior walls and Class 1 coating for interior walls. 2. Galvanized Steel Plates, snapes and bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2.7 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing and Accessories: Fabricated to complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1. Material: copper, 10-oz./sq. ft. weight or 0.0135 inch thick for fully concealed flashing; 16-oz./sq. ft. weight or 0.0216 inch thick elsewhere. B. Contractor's Option for Concealed Flashing: For flashing partly exposed to the exterior, use metal flashing specified above. For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Copper-Laminated Flashing: Manufacturer's standard laminated flashing consisting of 7-oz./sq. ft. sheet copper bonded with asphalt between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth. a. Available Products: 1) Advanced Building Products, Inc.;Copper Fabric Flashing. 2) AFCO Products,Inc.; Copper Fabric. 3) Hohmann&Barnard, Inc.; H&B C-Fab Flashing. 4) Phoenix Building Products; Type FCC-Fabric Covered Copper. 5) Polytite Manufacturing Corp.; Copper Fabric Flashing. 6) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. 7) York Manufacturing,Inc.;York Copper Fabric Flashing. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene. 2.9 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate „ and 1/2-cup dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. of water. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1. Unit Compressive Strength: 2500-psi- minimum, average net-area compressive strength. 2. Weight Classification:Lightweight. 3. Type: I, moisture-controlled and II, nonmoisture-controlled units. C. Brick,General: 1. Provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces. 2. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color,and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. D. Face Brick: Stiles and Hart Waterstruck—Light Red. E. Building(Common)Brick:ASTM C 62. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: 4400-psi-minimum, average net-area compressive strength. 2. Size: Match size specified for face brick. 2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or H, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. B. Hydrated Lime:ASTM C 207 C. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. D. Pigmented Mortar: Colored cement or cement-lime formulation as required to produce the color in approved panel. E. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494, Type C, and recommended by the manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. 1. Available Products: a. Euclid Chemical Co.; Accelguard 80. b. Grace, W.R. &Co., Construction Products Division; Morseled. C. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex,Inc.; Trimix-NCA. F. Water: Potable. 2.5 REINFORCING A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M; ASTM A 616/A 616K including Supplement 1;or ASTM A 617/A 617M, Grade 60. B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A 951; mill galvanized, carbon-steel wire for interior walls and hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire for exterior walls. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15, 2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those . of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Mockups: Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry assembly to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. 1. Build mockups in sizes approximately 48 inches long by 48 inches high by full thickness. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. B. Hot-Weather Requirements: When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or 90 deg F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2.2 COLORS AND TEXTURES A. Exposed Masonry Units: Match samples. 2.3 MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: 1900-psi-minimum, average net-area compressive strength. 2. Weight Classification: Lightweight. 3. Type: 1, moisture-controlled and II,nonmoisture-controlled units. 4. Special Shapes: Provide for lintels, corners,jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. Aoftk B. Concrete Building Brick:ASTM C 55. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA SECTION 04810-UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL 7,1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Concrete brick. 3. Face brick. 4. Building(common)brick. 5. Mortar and Grout 6. Reinforcing Steel 7. Embedded Flashing 8. Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories B. See Division 4 Section "Masonry Restoration and Cleaning" for work on existing masonry walls. C. See Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel items installed in unit masonry assemblies. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each masonry unit,accessory, and other manufactured product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For masonry reinforcing bars; comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. C. Samples: Showing the full range of colors and textures available for exposed masonry units and colored mortar. D. Material Test Reports: For each type of masonry unit, mortar,and grout required. E. Material Certificates: For each type of masonry unit required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on each type of unit required per test method indicated. 1. Clay Masonry Units: ASTM C 67. 2. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 140. 3. Mortar: For properties per ASTM C 270. ^!"W 4. Grout: For compressive strength per ASTM C 1019. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 2. Remove mortar from masonry surfaces within raked-out joints to provide reveals with square backs and to expose masonry for contact with pointing mortar. Brush, vacuum, or flush joints to remove dirt and loose debris. 3. Do not spall edges of masonry units or widen joints. Replace damaged masonry units. a. Cut out old mortar by hand with a chisel and mallet,unless otherwise indicated. b. Do not use power-operated rotary hand saws and grinders unless specific Architect's written approval is obtained based on submission by Contractor of a satisfactory quality control program and demonstrated ability of operators to use tools without damaging masonry. Quality control program shall include provisions for supervising performance and preventing damage due to worker fatigue. B. Point joints as follows: 1. Rinse masonry joint surfaces with water to remove dust and mortar particles. Time the rinsing application so that at the time of pointing excess water has evaporated or run off and joint surfaces are damp but free of standing water. 2. Apply the first layer of pointing mortar to areas where existing mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas. Apply in layers not greater than 3/8 inch until a uniform depth is formed. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying the next layer. 3. After joints have been filled to a uniform depth, place remaining pointing mortar in three layers with each of first and second layers filling approximately two fifths of joint depth and third layer the remaining one fifth. Fully compact each layer and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. Where existing bricks have rounded edges recess final layer slightly from face. Take care not to spread mortar over edges onto exposed masonry surfaces,or to featheredge mortar. 4. When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of joints, unless otherwise indicated. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by brushing. 5. Cure mortar by maintaining in a damp condition for not less than 72 hours. 6. Where repointing work precedes cleaning of existing masonry, allow mortar to harden not less than 30 days before beginning cleaning work. 3.7 FINAL CLEANING A. After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed masonry surfaces of excess mortar and foreign matter using stiff nylon or bristle brushes and clean water, which is spray-applied at a low pressure. B. Using metal scrapers or brushes is not permitted. C. Using acid or alkali cleaning agents is not permitted. END OF SECTION 04525 CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04525-9 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 2. Scrub masonry with detergent solution using medium-soft brushes until soil is thoroughly dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes, as required, to remove soil from mortar joints and crevices. Dip brush in solution often to ensure adequate fresh detergent and that masonry surface remains wet. 3. Rinse masonry with cold water to remove detergent solution and soil,applied as follows: a. Low-pressure spray. 4. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce the effect established by the mockup. 3.4 BRICK REMOVAL AND REBUILDING A. Carefully remove by hand, at locations indicated,bricks that are damaged, spalled, or deteriorated_ Cut out full units from joint to joint and in a manner to permit replacement with full-size units. B. Support and protect masonry indicated to remain that surrounds removal area. Maintain flashing, reinforcement,lintels,and adjoining construction in an undamaged condition. C. Salvage as many whole,undamaged bricks as possible. D. Remove mortar, loose particles and soil from salvaged brick by cleaning with brushes and water. Store brick for reuse. E. Clean remaining brick at edges of removal areas by removing mortar, dust, and loose debris in preparation for rebuilding. 3.5 BRICK REBUILDING A. Install new or salvaged brick to replace removed brick. Fit replacement units into bonding and coursing pattern of existing brick. If cutting is required, use a motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean,sharp,unchipped edges. B. Lay replacement brick with completely filled bed, head, and collar joints. Butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Wet clay bricks that have ASTM C 67 initial rates of absorption (suction)of more than 30 gm per 30 sq. in. per min. Use wetting methods that ensure units are nearly saturated but surface dry when laid. Maintain joint width for replacement units to match existing units. C. Tool exposed mortar joints in repaired areas to match joints of surrounding existing brickwork. D. Point new mortar joints in repaired area to comply with requirements for repointing existing masonry, and rake out mortar used for laying brick before mortar sets. 3.6 REPOINTING MASONRY A. Rake out joints as follows: 1. Rake out mortar from joints to depths equal to 2-1/2 times their widths but not less than 1/2 inch nor less than that required to expose sound,unweathered mortar. CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04525-8 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA D. Rinse off chemical residue and soil by working upwards from bottom to top of each treated area at each stage or scaffold setting. Ea Removing Plant Growth: Completely remove plant, moss, and shrub growth from masonry surfaces. Carefully remove plants, creepers, and vegetation by cutting at roots and allowing to dry as long as possible prior to removal. Remove loose soil and debris from open masonry joints to whatever depth they occur. F. Water Application Methods: Where water application methods are indicated, comply with the following: 1. Spray Applications: Spray-apply water to masonry surfaces to comply with requirements indicated for location, purpose, water temperature, pressure, volume, and equipment. Unless otherwise indicated,hold spray nozzle no less than 6 inches from surface of masonry and apply water from side to side in overlapping bands to produce uniform coverage and an even effect. a. Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi;3 to 6 gpm. G. Chemical Cleaner Application Methods: Apply chemical cleaners to masonry surfaces to comply with chemical manufacturer's recommendations using brush or spray application methods, at Contractor's option,unless otherwise indicated. Do not allow chemicals to remain on surface for periods longer than those indicated or recommended by manufacturer. 1. Spray Application: Apply chemical cleaners at pressures not exceeding 50 psi, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Reapplying Chemical Cleaners: Do not apply chemical cleaners to same masonry surfaces more than twice. 3.3 CLEANING BRICKWORK A. Paint Removal with Water-Rinsable Chemical Paint Remover: At locations indicated, remove paint from masonry surfaces as follows: 1. Apply thick coating of water-rinsable chemical paint remover to painted masonry with natural- fiber cleaning brush,deep-nap roller,or large paint brush. 2. Allow chemical paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended by paint remover manufacturer. Agitate periodically with a stiff-bristle brush. 3. Remove chemical and paint residue by rinsing with water. B. Soot Removal: At locations indicated,remove soot from masonry surfaces as follows: 1. Apply chemical soot remover to masonry with brushes. 2. Allow chemical soot remover to remain on surface for period recommended by soot remover manufacturer. 3. Remove chemical and soot residue by rinsing with water. C. Detergent Cleaning: At locations indicated, clean clay masonry with a detergent solution applied as follows: 1. Wet masonry with warm water applied by low-pressure spray. CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04525-7 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA a. Add colored mortar pigment to produce mortar colors required. , 2. Rebuilding Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N, unless otherwise indicated,with cementitious material content limited to portland cement-lime. 3. Grout: ASTM C 476. 2.5 CHEMICAL CLEANING SOLUTIONS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated,dilute chemical cleaning materials with water to produce solutions of concentration indicated but not greater than that recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer. B. Chemical Paint Remover: In a concentration recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer. C. Soot Remover: In a concentration recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with the chemical cleaner manufacturer's recommendations for protecting building surfaces against damage from exposure to their products. B. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building whose masonry surfaces are being restored,building site,plants,and surrounding buildings from injury resulting from masonry restoration work. 1. Prevent chemical cleaning solutions from coming into contact with pedestrians, motor vehicles, landscaping,buildings,and other surfaces that could be injured by such contact. 2. Do not clean masonry during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning solutions to unprotected surfaces. 3. Dispose of runoff from cleaning operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors. 4. Erect temporary protection covers over pedestrian walkways and at points of entrance and exit for persons and vehicles that must remain in operation during course of masonry restoration work. C. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with chemical cleaners by covering them with a liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. Apply masking agent to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not apply liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces. 3.2 CLEANING MASONRY,GENERAL A. Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner; work from top to bottom of each scaffold width and from one end of each elevation to the other. Work from bottom to top of the building for each scaffold drop. B. Use only those cleaning methods indicated for each masonry material and location. C. Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage of all surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect without streaking or damaging masonry=-faces. CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04525-6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA C. Brushes: Fiber bristle only. D. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution prepared by mixing 3 oz. of trisodium phosphate(TSP), I oz. of laundry detergent(Tide,All, etc.), 1 quart of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite(bleach), and 3 quarts of warm water for each gallon of solution required. E. Water-Rinsable Chemical Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard thixotropic water-rinsable solvent formulation for removing paint coatings from masonry. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sure Klean 509 Paint Stripper, ProSoCo,Inc. F. Soot Remover: Manufacturer's standard alkaline cleaner formulated to remove smoke stains and soot encrustation from masonry surfaces. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sure Klean Smoke Remover, ProSoCo,Inc. G. Spray Equipment: Provide equipment for controlled spray application of water and chemical cleaners, if any,at rates indicated for pressure,measured at spray tip,and for volume. Adjust pressure and volume, as required,to ensure that damage to masonry does not result from cleaning methods. 1. For water spray application,provide a fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an angle of not less than 15 degrees. 2. For heated water spray application, provide equipment capable of maintaining a temperature at flow rates indicated between 140 and 180 deg F. 2.4 MORTAR MDCES A. Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious and aggregate material in a dry condition by volume or equivalent weight. Do not measure by shovel, use known measure. Mix materials in a clean mechanical batch mixer. 1. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together before adding any water. Then mix again adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for I to 2 hours. Add the remaining water in small portions until reaching mortar of the desired consistency. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material. B. Colored Mortar: Produce mortar of color required by using selected ingredients. Do not adjust proportions without Architect's approval. 1. Colored Mortar Pigment: Where colored mortar pigments are indicated, do not exceed a pigment-to-cement ratio of 1:10 by weight. C. Do not use admixtures of any kind in mortar,unless otherwise indicated. D. Mortar Proportions: Mix mortar materials in the following proportions: 1. Pointing Mortar for Brick: One part white portland cement,two parts lime,and six parts colored or natural mortar aggregate. CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04525-5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 5. Clean masonry surfaces. , 6. Perform final cleaning piror to installation of replacement windows. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MASONRY MATERIALS A. Face Brick and Accessories: Provide face brick and accessories, including units for lintels, arches, corners, and other specially ground, cut, or sawed shapes where required to complete masonry restoration work. 1. Provide units with color,surface texture,and size to match existing brick work and with physical properties not less than those determined from preconstruction testing of selected existing units. B. Building Brick: Provide building brick complying with ASTM C 62 for masonry work concealed from view of same vertical dimension as face brick. 1. Grade SW where in contact with earth. 2. Grade SW,MW,or NW for concealed back-up. 2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I or Type IL AW 1. Provide nonstaining white cement complying with staining requirement of ASTM C 91 for not more than 0.03 percent water-soluble alkali. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207,Type S. C. Colored Mortar Pigment: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for mortar mixes. Use only pigments with record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars. D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Colored Mortar Aggregate: Natural or manufactured sand selected to produce mortar color indicated. 2. For pointing mortar,provide sand with rounded edges. 3. Match size,texture,and gradation of existing mortar as closely as possible. E. Water: Clean, free of oils,acids,alkalis,and organic matter. F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. 2.3 CLEANING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Water for Cleaning: Clean,potable, free of oils,acids,alkalis, salts,and organic matter. B. Warm Water: Heat water to a temperature of 140 to 180 deg F CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04525-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA b. Allow a waiting period of the duration indicated, but not less than 7 calendar days, after completion of sample cleaning to permit a study of sample panels for negative reactions. 3. Repointing: Prepare two separate sample areas approximately 36 inches high by 72 inches wide for each type of repointing required, one for demonstrating methods and quality of workmanship expected in removing mortar from joints and the other for demonstrating quality of materials and workmanship expected in pointing mortar joints. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Carefully pack, handle, and ship masonry units and accessories strapped together in suitable packs or pallets,or in heavy-duty cartons. Unload and handle to prevent chipping and breakage. B. Deliver other materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers and packaging,bearing labels as to type and names of products and manufacturers. C. Protect masonry restoration materials during storage and construction from rain, snow, and ground water,and from staining and mixing with soil and other materials. D. Protect grout, mortar, and other materials from deterioration by moisture and temperature. Store in a dry place or in waterproof containers. Keep containers tightly closed and away from open flames. Protect liquid components from freezing. E. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for minimum and maximum temperature requirements for storage. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Clean masonry surfaces only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried out,but for not less than 7 days after completion of cleaning. B. Do not repoint mortar joints or repair masonry unless air temperature is between 40 deg F and 80 deg F and will remain so for at least 48 hours after completion of work. C. Prevent grout or mortar used in repointing and repair work from staining face of surrounding masonry and other surfaces. Immediately remove grout and mortar in contact with exposed masonry and other surfaces. D. Protect sills,ledges,and projections from mortar droppings. 1.8 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING A. Order replacement materials at the earliest possible date,to avoid delaying completion of the Work. B. Perform masonry restoration work in the following sequence: 1. Repair existing masonry, including replacing existing masonry with new masonry materials. 2. Remove plants,paint,and soot prior to general cleaning. 3. Rake out existing mortar from joints indicated to be repointed. 4. Repoint existing mortar joints of masonry indicated to be restored. CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04525 -3 Renovations to Comstock-V4 ilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 2. Each type of mortar for pointing and masonry rebuilding and repair in the form of sample mortar strips 6 inches long by 1/2 inch wide set in aluminum or plastic channels. 3. Each type of chemical cleaning material. D. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include a list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners,and other information specified. E. Restoration program for each phase of the restoration process, including protection of surrounding materials on building and site during operations. Describe in detail the materials, methods, and equipment to be used for each phase of the restoration work. 1. If alternative methods and materials to those indicated are proposed for any phase of restoration work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on other comparable projects,and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project. F. Cleaning program indicating cleaning process, including protection of surrounding materials on building and site,and control of runoff during operations. Describe in detail the materials,methods and equipment to be used. I. If alternative methods and materials to those indicated are proposed for any phase of cleaning work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on other comparable projects,and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AMOK. A. Restoration Specialist: Engage an experienced masonry restoration and cleaning firm that has specialized in the types of work required for this Project. At Contractor's option, the work may be divided between two specialist firms: one for cleaning work and one for repair work. 1. Field Supervision: Require restoration specialist firm to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on the job site during times that clay masonry restoration and cleaning are in progress. B. Chemical Manufacturer Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in producing masonry cleaning compounds, which have been used on similar projects with successful results, and that retains factory- trained representatives who are available for consultation and jobsite inspection and assistance at no additional cost. C. Field-Constructed Mockups: Prior to starting general masonry restoration,prepare the following sample panels on the building where directed by Architect. Prepare sample panels using same materials and methods proposed for the Work, and under same weather conditions to be expected during the restoration. Obtain Architect's acceptance of visual qualities before proceeding with masonry restoration. Retain acceptable panels in an undisturbed condition, suitably marked, during construction as a standard for judging the completed Work. 1. Notify Architect one week in advance of dates and times when sample panels will be prepared. 2. Cleaning: Demonstrate the materials and methods to be used for cleaning each type of masonry surface and condition on sample panels approximately 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m) in area. a. Test materials and methods on samples of adjacent nonmasonry materials for possible 400* reaction with cleaning materials, except where materials and methods are known to have a deleterious effect on such materials. CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04525-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 04525-CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Removing plant growth. 2. Repairing damaged clay masonry. 3. Cleaning exposed clay masonry surfaces. 4. Repointing mortar joints. 5. Rebuilding chimneys. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal' for metal flashing for restored clay masonry construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Repointing: The process of raking out(removing)mortar and replacing it with new mortar. B. Pointing: The process of placing new mortar in existing joint spaces,which have previously been raked out. This term does not include the raking out process. C. Tuckpointing: The process of touching up existing mortar joints by filling in recesses with new mortar, without first raking out the joints. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each product indicated including recommendations for their application and use. Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply with requirements. C. Samples for verification purposes,prior to erecting the mockup,of the following: 1. Each new exposed masonry material to be used for replacing existing materials. Include in each set of samples the full range of colors and textures to be expected in the completed Work. a. Provide straps or panels containing not less than four brick units. CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04525 - 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting,keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days. C. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by curing compound, by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing,or by combining these methods,as specified. D. Provide moisture curing by the following methods: 1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. 2. Use continuous water-fog spray. 3. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover with water, and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges,with a 4 inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. E. Provide moisture-retaining cover curing as follows: 1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3.12 REMOVING FORMS A. General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form-removal operations,and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. END OF SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-8 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to below 90 deg F . Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas. 4. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions,as acceptable to Architect. 3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: Provide a rough-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finished Work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form-facing material used,with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched,and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off. B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls,horizontal offsets,and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.9 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing,slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix,place, and cure concrete as specified to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete Work. B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 3.11 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating,but before power floating and troweling. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-7 oil Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1. Joint fillers and sealants are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.5 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions,and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached. B. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms,bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. 3.6 PREPARING FORM SURFACES A. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, form-coating compound before placing reinforcement. B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions. 3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation,reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete," and as specified. C. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete complying with ACI 309. D. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints,until completing placement of a panel or section. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement,other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement. E. Hot-Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength of concrete,place concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA G. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before placing concrete. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete,as required,to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. 3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars,"for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as specified. 1. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder/barrier during reinforcement placement and concreting operations. Repair damages before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs,runners,bolsters,spacers,and hangers,as approved by Architect. D. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 3.4 JOINTS A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints so they do not impair strength or appearance of the structure,as acceptable to Architect. B. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in construction joints in walls and slabs and between walls and footings. Bulkheads designed and accepted for this purpose may be used for slabs. C. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints except as indicated otherwise. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct isolation joints in slabs-on-grade at points of contact between slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations,as indicated. 1. One-part,Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: Type S,Uses T,M,G.A.and O. 2. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed,compressible,resilient,nonwaxing,nonextruding strips of open-cell polyurethane foam of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. E. Contraction (Control)Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct contraction joints in slabs-on-grade to form panels of patterns as shown. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project - identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water introduced. B. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94,and as specified. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials, vapor retarder/barrier, and other related materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. 3.2 FORMS A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances and surface irregularities complying with the following ACI 347 limits: 'mok 1. Provide Class A tolerances for concrete surfaces exposed to view. 2. Provide Class C tolerances for other concrete surfaces. B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in the Work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent cement paste from leaking. C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways,reglets,recesses,and the like for easy removal. D. Provide temporary openings for clean-outs and inspections where interior area of formwork is inaccessible before and during concrete placement. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent losing concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. E. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. F. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings,recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1. For exposed exterior surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain substances that cause spalling. C. Water: Potable. 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS A. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following,complying with ASTM C 171. 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene-coated burlap. 2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGNING MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use an independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. B. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties as indicated on drawings and schedules: 1. 4000 psi ,28-day compressive strength; water-cement ratio, 0.44 maximum (non-air-entrained), 0.35 maximum(air-entrained). C. Water-Cement Ratio: Provide concrete for following conditions with maximum water-cement (W/C) ratios as follows: 1. Subjected to deicers/watertight: W/C 0.40. D. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows: 1. Ramps,slabs,and sloping surfaces: Not more than 3 inches. 2. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 3 inches. E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in Work. 2.6 CONCRETE MIXING A. Job-Site Mixing: Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer. For mixers of 1 cu.yd. or smaller capacity, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes,but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. For mixers of capacity larger than 1 cu. yd., increase minimum 1-1/2 minutes of mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu.yd.. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute(CRSI)"Manual of Standard Practice." *+ PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel-type materials to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings. B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a maximum of 350 g/L volatile organic compounds(VOCs)that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. D. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to the plane of the exposed concrete surface. 1. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter in the concrete surface. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars:ASTM A 615 Grade 60,deformed. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185,welded steel wire fabric. C. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications. 1. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. 2. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs that are protected by plastic(CRSI,Class 1)or stainless steel(CRSI,Class 2). 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type 1. 1. Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 03300-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement procedures,and finishes. B. Cast-in-place concrete includes the following: 1. Foundations and footings. 2. Slabs-on-grade. 3. Foundation walls. 4. Equipment pads and bases. 5. Ramps,steps and walks. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. See Division 1 Section-Alternates for description of work in this section affected by alternates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials,and others if requested by Architect. C. Shop drawings for reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending, and placing concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcing required for openings through concrete structures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. American Concrete Institute(AC1)301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings." 2. ACI 318, 'Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch C. Grading Inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. 3.15 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES A. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course material on prepared subgrades. Place base course material over subbases to pavements. 1. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of ASTM D 4254 relative density. 2. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 3. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches or less, place materials in a single layer. 4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches, place materials in equal layers,with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted. 3.16 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and re-establish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded,rutted, settled,or lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace material to depth directed by the Architect;reshape and recompact at optimum moisture content to the required density. C. Settling: Where settling occurs during the Project correction period,remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional approved material,compact,and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. 3.17 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris,and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK 02200-6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 3.12 FILL A. Preparation: Remove vegetation,topsoil,debris,wet,and unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions,and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placing fills. B. When subgrade or existing ground surface to receive fill has a density less than that required for fill, break up ground surface to depth required,pulverize,moisture-condition or aerate soil and recompact to required density. C. Place fill material in layers to required elevations for each location listed below. 1. Under grass,use satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use subbase or base material, or satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps,use subbase material. 4. Under footings and foundations,use engineered fill. 3.13 COMPACTION A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations. Place backfill and fill uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Percentage of Maximum Dry Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 1557: 1. Under structures,building slabs,steps,and pavements,compact the top 12 inches below subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum dry density. 2. Under walkways, compact the top 6 inches below subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum dry density. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas,compact the top 6 inches below subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent maximum dry density. 3.14 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections,lines,and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between existing adjacent grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots,fill low spots,and trim high spots to conform to required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1.2 inches 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1.2 inches EARTHWORK 02200-5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending indicated bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position when acceptable to the Architect. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction as directed by the Architect. B. Where indicated widths of utility trenches are exceeded, provide stronger pipe, or special installation procedures,as required by the Architect. 3.9 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill soil materials, including acceptable borrow materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent wind-blown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.10 BACKFILL A. Backfill excavations promptly,but not before completing the following: 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing,and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. 3. Testing, inspecting,and approval of underground utilities. 4. Concrete formwork removal. 5. Removal of trash and debris from excavation. 6. Removal of temporary shoring and bracing,and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. 3.11 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and to fill unauthorized excavations. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings,and bodies of conduits. B. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil material or subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch,to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system. C. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. D. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade. EARTHWORK 02200-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades,and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation. 3.3 EXCAVATION A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. B. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to required subgrade elevations regardless of the character of materials and obstructions encountered. 3.4 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS A. Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction to maintain stable excavations. Protect adjacent structures during excavation operations. 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1.2 inches. Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, installing services and other construction,and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections,elevations,and grades. 3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated slopes,lines,depths,and invert elevations. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit. 3.8 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION EARTHWORK 02200-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA I. Utilities include on-site underground pipes,conduits,ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within building lines. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others except when permitted in writing by the Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. 1. Provide a minimum 48-hours'notice to the Architect and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide approved borrow soil materials from off-site when sufficient approved soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM; free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches (50 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, ' vegetation and other deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC,ML,MH, CL,CH, OL, OH,and PT. D. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials. E. Subbase and Base Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone,and natural or crushed sand,ASTM D 2940,with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2 inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. F. Bedding Material: Subbase or base materials with 100 percent passing a 1 inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. G. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, ASTM D 448, coarse aggregate grading size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2 inch sieve and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures,utilities,sidewalks,pavements,and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement,undermining,washout,and other hazards created by earthwork operations. EARTHWORK 02200-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 02200-EARTHWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing and grading subgrades for slabs-on-grade, ramps, steps, walks, pavements, and landscaping. 2. Subbase course for walks and pavements. 3. Excavating and backfilling trenches within building lines. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. 1. Division 2 Section "Landscape Work" for finish grading, including placing and preparing topsoil for lawns and planting. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Excavation consists of the removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations and the reuse or disposal of materials removed. B. Subgrade: The uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase,drainage fill,or topsoil materials. C. Borrow: Soil material obtained off-site when sufficient approved soil material is not available from excavations. D. Subbase Course: The layer placed between the subgrade and base course in a paving system or the layer placed between the subgrade and surface of a pavement or walk. E. Base Course: The layer placed between the subbase and surface pavement in a paving system. F. Drainage Fill: Course of washed granular material supporting slab-on-grade placed to cut off upward capillary flow of pore water. G. Unauthorized excavation consists of removing materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without direction by the Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Architect,shall be at the Contractor's expense. H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below ground surface. EARTHWORK 02200- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 3. Where patching smooth painted surfaces, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken surface ^" containing the patch after the surface has received primer and second coat. 4. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials,if necessary,to achieve uniform color and appearance. 5. Inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation,where feasible. F. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.8 CLEANING A. Sweep the building broom clean on completion of selective demolition operation. B. Change filters on air-handling equipment on completion of selective demolition operations. C. Coordinate with Owner delivery of items and materials to be salvaged by the Owner. Such items include but are not limited to doors, hardware, piping, fixtures and equipment. Review list of items to be salvaged prior to proceeding with demolition operations. END OF SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame- cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment throughout the structure and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls,floors,or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. On-site storage or sale of removed items is prohibited. 10. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing before start of selective demolition operations. B. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain,using power-driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power-driven impact tools. C. Remove resilient floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations of the Resilient Floor Covering Institute's (RFCI) "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings"and Addendum. 1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods recommended by RFCI. D. Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing. See applicable Division 7 Section for new roofing requirements. 3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS A. Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent construction by selective demolition operations. B. Patching is specified in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." C. Where repairs to existing surfaces are required,patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. 1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls to remain with an approved masonry patching material,applied according to manufacturer's printed recommendations. D. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining construction to remain in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing. E. Patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space where demolished walls or partitions extend one finished area into another. Provide a flush and even surface ofuniform color and appearance. 1. Closely match texture and finish of existing adjacent surface. 2. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA A. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks,and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. E. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area. 1. Protect existing site improvements,appurtenances,and landscaping to remain. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between demolition and removal of existing construction, on exterior surfaces and new construction to ensure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain and are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings,and equipment that have not been removed. C. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. D. Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent movement,settlement,or collapse of building to be selectively demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Use temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental protection regulations. B. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute,hoist,or other device that will convey debris to grade level. C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of selective demolition. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition work above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on lower levels. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. To minimize ,w disturbance of adjacent surfaces,use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with the intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the conflict. Promptly report to the Architect and Owner. E. Survey the condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition. F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES A. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities,except when authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities,as acceptable to Owner and to governing authorities. a. Provide not less than 72 hours'notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover. B. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services to be selectively demolished. 1. Where utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide bypass connections to maintain continuity of service to other parts of the building before proceeding with selective demolition. 2. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. C. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting oil; disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utility services. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed. 3.3 PREPARATION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain the Owner's property, demolished materials shall become the Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site with further disposition at the Contractor's option. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, for information only,unless otherwise indicated. B. Proposed dust-control measures. C. Schedule of selective demolition activities indicating the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. 2. Interruption of utility services. 3. Coordination for shutoff capping,and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of stairs. 5. Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress. D. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Asbestos: It is not expected that asbestos will be encountered in the Work. If any materials suspected of containing asbestos are encountered,do not disturb the materials. Immediately notify the Architect and the Owner. 1. Asbestos will be removed by Owner before start of Work. B. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Existing Special Warranty: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition,by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials. 1. Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials ANK that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 02070-SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Patching and repairs. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary of Work"for use of the building and phasing requirements. 2. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures for selective demolition operations. 3. Division 1 Section"Schedules and Reports"for selective demolition schedule requirements. 4. Division I Section "Contract Closeout"for record document requirements. 5. Division 2 Section "Earthwork"for soil materials,excavating,backfilling,and site grading. 6. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for material and construction requirements for temporary enclosures. 7. Division 15 Sections for cutting,patching,or relocating mechanical items. 8. Division 16 Sections for cutting,patching,or relocating electrical items. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled, salvaged, or to remain the Owner's property. B. Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the Owner's property. Remove, clean, and pack or crate items to protect against damage. Identify contents of containers and deliver to Owner's designated storage area. C. Remove and Reinstall: Remove items indicated; clean, service, and otherwise prepare them for reuse; store and protect against damage. Reinstall items in the same locations or in locations indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by the Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and then cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations. '` 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1. Where extra materials of value remain after completion of associated Work, they become the Owner's property. Dispose of these materials as directed by the Owner. END OF SECTION 0170^ CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 6. Identification systems. 7. Control sequences. 8. Hazards. 9. Cleaning. 10. Warranties and bonds. 11. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments. B. As part of instruction for operating equipment,demonstrate the following procedures: 1. Startup. 2. Shutdown. 3. Emergency operations. 4. Noise and vibration adjustments. 5. Safety procedures. 6. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 7. Effective energy utilization. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. General: The General Conditions require general cleaning during construction. Regular site cleaning is included. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion. a. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. b. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other substances that are noticeable vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. C. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces. d. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean ductwork. Clean light fixtures and lamps. e. Clean the site,including landscape development areas,of rubbish, litter,and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills, and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted to a smooth, even-textured surface. C. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during construction. D. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste ,, materials from the site and dispose of lawfully. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work. 2. Mark new information that is important to the Owner but was not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings. 3. Note related change-order numbers where applicable. 4. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets. Bind sets with durable-paper cover sheets; print suitable titles, dates, and other identification on the cover of each set. Upon completion of the work,submit record drawings on mylar and CAD disk to the Architect for owner's records. C. Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual,including addenda. Include with the Project Manual one copy of other written construction documents, such as Change Orders and modifications issued in printed form during construction. 1. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications. 2. Give particular attention to substitutions and selection of options and information on concealed construction that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. 3. Note related record drawing information and Product Data. 4. Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the Architect for the Owner's records. D. Maintenance Manuals: Organize operation and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in individual,heavy-duty,2-inch, 3-ring,vinyl-covered binders,with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following types of information: 1. Emergency instructions. 2. Spare parts list. 3. Copies of warranties. 4. Wiring diagrams. 5. Recommended"turn-around"cycles. 6. Inspection procedures. 7. Shop Drawings and Product Data. 8. Fixture lamping schedule. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each Installer of equipment that requires regular maintenance to meet with the Owner's personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. Provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives if installers are not experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. Include a detailed review of the following items: 1. Maintenance manuals. 2. Record documents. 3. Spare parts and materials. 4. Tools. 5. Lubricants. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 8. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel. Discontinue and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with mockups, construction tools,and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleanup requirements,including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred,exposed finishes. B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. 1. The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work is substantially complete. 2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance. 1.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment,complete the following. List exceptions in the request. 1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required. 2. Submit an updated final statement,accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum. 3. Submit a certified copy of the Architect's final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected,endorsed and dated by the Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance and shall be endorsed and dated by the Architect. B. Reinspection Procedure: The Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except for items whose completion is delayed under circumstances acceptable to the Architect. 1. Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final acceptance. If the Work is incomplete,the Architect will advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance. 2. If necessary,reinspection will be repeated. 1.5 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Protect record documents from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistant location. Provide access to record documents for the Architect's reference during normal working hours. B. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark which drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 01700-CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project record document submittal. 3. Operation and maintenance manual submittal. 4. Submittal of warranties. 5. Final cleaning. B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in Divisions 2 through 16. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request. 1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. a. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. b. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown,include a list of incomplete items,the value of incomplete construction,and reasons the Work is not complete. 2. Advise the Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits,operating certificates,and similar releases. 5. Submit record drawings,maintenance manuals, final project photographs, damage or settlement surveys,property surveys,and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools,spare parts, extra stock,and similar items. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. Advise the Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect. 2. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. B. Product Selection Procedures: The Contract Documents and governing regulations govern product selection. Procedures governing product selection include the following: 1. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name only a single product or manufacturer,provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. 2. Semiproprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name 2 or more products or manufacturers,provide 1 of the products indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. 3. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements. 4. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. a. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature or by the manufacturer's certification of performance. 5. Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where Specifications only require compliance with an imposed code,standard,or regulation,select a product that complies with the standards,codes,or regulations specified. 6. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. a. Where no product available within the specified category matches satisfactorily and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents concerning "substitutions" for selection of a matching product in another product category. 7. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase "...as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures..." or a similar phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The Architect will select the color,pattern,and texture from the product line selected. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place,accurately located and aligned with other Work. 1. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA determination has been made,select products from sources producing products that possess these qualities,to the fullest extent possible. B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between 2 or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected,even if previously selected products were also options. C. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior. 1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on concealed surfaces or, where required for observation after installation,on accessible surfaces that are not conspicuous. 2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface that is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and other essential operating data: a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. C. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store,and handle products according to the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage,deterioration,and loss,including theft. 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to assure minimum holding time for items that are flammable,hazardous,easily damaged,or sensitive to deterioration,theft,and other losses. 3. Deliver products to the site in an undamaged condition in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system,complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking,protecting,and installing. 4. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. 5. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 6. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not endanger the supporting construction. 7. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and,unless otherwise indicated,new at the time of installation. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 01600-MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products for use in the Project. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Submittals" specifies requirements for submittal of the Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittal Schedule. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories," and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have well-recognized meanings in the construction industry. 1. "Products"are items purchased for incorporation in the Work,whether purchased for the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system,"and terms of similar intent. a. "Named Products" are items identified by the manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in the manufacturer's published product literature,that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents. 2. "Materials" are products substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished,refined or otherwise fabricated,processed,or installed to form a part of the Work. 3. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections,such as wiring or piping. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind from a single source. 1. When specified products are available only from sources that do not, or cannot, produce a quantity adequate to complete project requirements in a timely manner, consult with the Architect to determine the most important product qualities before proceeding. Qualities may include attributes, such as visual appearance, strength, durability, or compatibility. When a MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 0130x, x 4 SUBMITTALS 01300-7 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA 5. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned,at the Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout the course of construction. a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal. b. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction associated with each set. 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE SUBMITTALS A. Submit quality-control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer's instructions, manufacturer's field reports, and other quality-control submittals as required under other Sections of the Specifications. B. Certifications: Where other Sections of the Specifications require certification that a product, material, or installation complies with specified requirements, submit a notarized certification from the manufacturer certifying compliance with specified requirements. 1. Signature: Certification shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of the company. 1.11 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Except for submittals for the record or information, where action and return is required, the Architect will review each submittal,mark to indicate action taken,and return promptly. 1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility. B. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, action stamp. The Architect will mark the stamp appropriately to indicate the action taken, as follows: 1. Final Unrestricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "Approved," the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance. 2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "Approved as Noted," the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance. 3. Returned for Resubmittal: When the Architect marks a submittal "Not Approved, Revise and Resubmit," do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the notations;resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. a. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "Not Approved, Revise and Resubmit" at the Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress. 4. Other Action: Where a submittal is for information or record purposes or special processing or other activity,the Architect will return the submittal marked "Action Not Required." C. Unsolicited Submittals: The Architect will return unsolicited submittals to the sender without action. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) SUBMITTALS 01300-6 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA J"''` a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed,the submittal may serve as the final submittal. 4 4. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. a. Do not proceed with installation until a copy of Product Data is in the Installer's possession. b. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction. 1.9 SAMPLES A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern. i 1. Mount or display Samples in the manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Include the e following: a. Specification Section number and reference. b. Generic description of the Sample. C. Sample source. d. Product name or name of the manufacturer. e. Compliance with recognized standards. 2. Submit Samples for review of size,kind, color, pattern, and texture. Submit Samples for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. a. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the material or product represented, submit at least 3 multiple units that show approximate limits of the variations. b. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics. C. Refer to other Sections for Samples to be returned to the Contractor for incorporation in the Work. Such Samples must be undamaged at time of use. On the transmittal, indicate special requests regarding disposition of Sample submittals. d. Samples not incorporated into the Work,or otherwise designated as the Owner's property, are the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site prior to Substantial Completion. 3. Preliminary Submittals: Submit a full set of choices where Samples are submitted for selection of color,pattern,texture,or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices. a. The Architect will review and return preliminary submittals with the Architect's notation, indicating selection and other action. 4. Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques,connections,operation,and similar characteristics, submit 3 sets. The Architect will return one set marked with the action taken. SUBMITTALS 01300-5 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA B. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Post copies in the Project meeting room and field office. 1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not a Shop Drawing. B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number. 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 6. Sheet Size: Except for templates,patterns and similar full-size Drawings,submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches. 7. Submittals: Submit one correctable, translucent, reproducible print and two blue- or black-line prints for the Architect's review. The Architect will return the reproducible print. 8. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken. 1.8 PRODUCT DATA A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed information, such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts,roughing-in diagrams and templates,standard wiring diagrams,and performance curves. 1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes information on several products that are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information: a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations. b. Compliance with trade association standards. C. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. d. Application of testing agency labels and seals. e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. f. Notation of coordination requirements. 2. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed. 3. Submittals: Submit 3 copies of each required submittal. The Architect will retain one and will return one marked with action taken and corrections or modifications required with a copy to the Owner. SUBMITTALS 01300-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA ` 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar-chart-type, contractor's construction schedule. Submit within 30 days after the date established for"Commencement of the Work." 1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a continuous vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of units of the Work as indicated in the"Schedule of Values." 2. Within each time bar, indicate estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments. As Work progresses,place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate Actual Completion. 3. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable transparency, or other reproducible media,of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period. 4. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities; include minor elements involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in proper sequence. Indicate graphically the sequences necessary for completion of related portions of the Work. 5. Coordinate the Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittal Schedule,progress reports,payment requests,and other schedules. 6. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. Indicate Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect's procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. B. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including submittal review,testing,and installation. C. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates. Post copies in the Project meeting room and temporary field office. 1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities. D. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting,event,or activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. 1.6 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Concurrent with development and acceptance of the Contractor's Construction Schedule, prepare a complete schedule of submittals. 1. Coordinate Submittal Schedule with the list of subcontracts, Schedule of Values, and the list of products as well as the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Prepare the schedule in chronological order. Provide the following information: a. Scheduled date for the first submittal. b. Related Section number. C. Submittal category(Shop Drawings,Product Data,or Samples). d. Name of the subcontractor. �'"'• e. Description of the part of the Work covered f. Scheduled date for the Architect's final release or approval. SUBMITTALS 01300-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA B. Mockups are full-size assemblies for review of construction, coordination,testing,or operation;they are not Samples. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until all related submittals are received. 3. Processing: To avoid the need to delay installation as a result of the time required to process submittals,allow sufficient time for submittal review,including time for resubmittals. a. Allow 1 week for initial review. Allow additional time if the Architect must delay processing to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. b. If an intermediate submittal is necessary,process the same as the initial submittal. C. Allow I week for reprocessing each submittal. d. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing. B. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block. 1. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches (100 by 125 mm) on the label or beside the title block on Shop Drawings to record the Contractor's review and approval markings and the action taken. 2. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken. a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of the Architect. d. Name and address of the Contractor. e. Name and address of the subcontractor. £ Name and address of the supplier. g. Name of the manufacturer. h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. C. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from the Contractor to the Architect using a transmittal form. The Architect will not accept submittals received from sources other than the Contractor. 1. On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements. SUBMITTALS 01300-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 01300- SUBMITTALS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of the Work,including the following: 1. Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submittal schedule. 3. Shop Drawings. 4. Product Data. 5. Samples. 6. Quality assurance submittals. B. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division 1 Sections and other Contract Documents for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Permits. 2. Applications for Payment. 3. Performance and payment bonds. 4. Insurance certificates. 5. List of subcontractors. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Applications for Payment" specifies requirements for submittal of the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section "Coordination" specifies requirements governing preparation and submittal of required Coordination Drawings. 3. Division 1 Section "Project Meetings" specifies requirements for submittal and distribution of meeting and conference minutes. 4. Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout" specifies requirements for submittal of Project Record Documents and warranties at project closeout. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Field samples are full-size physical examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish materials. Field samples are used to establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. SUBMITTALS 01300- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) ART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Applicable) M D OF SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS 01200-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 13. Safety procedures. low* 14. First aid. 15. Security. 16. Housekeeping. 17. Working hours. 1.4 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Conduct progress meetings at the Project Site at regular intervals. Notify the Owner and the Architect of scheduled meeting dates. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of the payment request. B. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner and the Architect, each subcontractor, supplier, or other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning,coordination,or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. C. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to the status of the Project. 1. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine where each activity is in relation to the Contractor's Construction Schedule, whether on time or ahead or behind schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to insure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 2. Review the present and future needs of each entity present,including the following: a. Interface requirements. b. Time. C. Sequences. d. Status of submittals. e. Deliveries. f. Off-site fabrication problems. g. Access. h. Site utilization. i. Temporary facilities and services. j. Hours of work. k. Hazards and risks. 1. Housekeeping. M. Quality and work standards. n. Change Orders. o. Documentation of information for payment requests. D. Reporting: No later than 3 days after each meeting, distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report. 1. Schedule Updating: Revise the Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue the revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PROJECT MEETINGS 01200-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 01200-PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Guneral and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings, including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Preconstruction conferences. 2. Progress meetings. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Coordination" for procedures for coordinating project meetings with other construction activities. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittals"for submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to the Owner and the Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at the Project Site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. B. Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, Architect, and their consultants; the Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. C. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress,including the following: 1. Tentative construction schedule. 2. Critical work sequencing. 3. Designation of responsible personnel. 4. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. 5. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. 6. Distribution of Contract Documents. 7. Submittal of Shop Drawings,Product Data,and Samples. 8. Preparation of record documents. 9. Use of the premises. 10. Parking availability. 11. Office,work,and storage areas. 12. Equipment deliveries and priorities. PROJECT MEETINGS 01200- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a Carborundum saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections where cutting and patching requires excavating and backfilling. 5. Where services are required to be removed,relocated,or abandoned,by-pass utility services,such as pipe or conduit, before cutting. Cut-off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after by-passing and cutting. C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances. 1. Where feasible,inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation. 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Where removing walls or partitions extends one finished area into another,patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform color and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials,if necessary,to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch after the area has received primer and second coat. 4. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. END OF SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 -3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible if identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be performed before cutting. If unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action before proceeding. 1. Before proceeding, meet at the Project Site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. 1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 01045 -CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Coordination" for procedures for coordinating cutting and patching with other construction activities. 2. Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building for alterations. 3. Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. a. Requirements of this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to Division 15 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion,reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Replace,patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing. PART 2-PRODUCTS CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 - 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 10. Radiation. 11. Puncture. 12. Abrasion. 13. Heavy traffic. 14. Soiling,staining,and corrosion. 15. Bacteria. 16. Rodent and insect infestation. 17. Combustion. 18. Electrical current. 19. High-speed operation. 20. Improper lubrication. 21. Unusual wear or other misuse. 22. Contact between incompatible materials, 23. Destructive testing. 24. Misalignment. 25. Excessive weathering. 26. Unprotected storage. 27. Improper shipping or handling. 28. Theft. 29. Vandalism. END OF SECTION 01040 COORDINATION 01040-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures lrte,, with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Preparation of schedules. 2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities. 3. Delivery and processing of submittals. 4. Progress meetings. 5. Project closeout activities. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. B. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests to minimize the necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place, during handling and installation. Apply protective covering where required to assure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. B. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to assure operability without damaging effects. C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful,dangerous,damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. Where applicable, such exposures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Excessive static or dynamic loading. 2. Excessive internal or external pressures. 3. Excessively high or low temperatures. 4. Thermal shock. 5. Excessively high or low humidity. 6. Air contamination or pollution. 7. Solvents. 8. Chemicals. 9. Light. COORDINATION 01040-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 01040-COORDINATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordinating construction operations including,but not necessarily limited to,the following: 1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Coordination Drawings. 3. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 4. Cleaning and protection. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division I Section "Project Meetings" for progress meetings, coordination meetings, and ?0000" preinstallation conferences. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittals" for preparing and submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Division 1 Section "Materials and Equipment"for coordinating general installation. 4. Division 1 Section"Contract Closeout" for coordinating contract closeout. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation,connection,and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance,service,and repair. 3. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate contractors where coordination of their work is required. COORDINATION 01040- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 4. Ensure that incomplete Work is not accepted and will be completed without undue delay. 5. Transmittal of required Project construction records to the Owner. 6. Removal of temporary facilities and services. 7. Removal of surplus materials,rubbish,and similar elements. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01027 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027-4 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA C. Payment-Application Times: The date for each progress payment is the 15th day of each month. The period covered by each Application for Payment starts on the day following the end of the preceding period and ends 15 days prior to the date for each progress payment. D. Payment-Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets G703 as the form for Applications for Payment. E� Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form. Include notarization and execution by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Contractor. The Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and the Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the application. 3. Refer to Article 9 of the Supplementary Conditions for retainage provisions. F. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to the Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall be complete, including waivers of lien and similar attachments,when required. G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals, that must precede or coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment,include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. , ""'• 3. Schedule of Values. 4. Contractor's Construction Schedule(preliminary if not final). 5. Submittal Schedule(preliminary if not final). 6. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. R Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion,submit an Application for Payment. 1. Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this application include: a. Occupancy permits and similar approvals. b. Warranties(guarantees)and maintenance agreements. C. Test/adjust/balance records. d. Maintenance instructions. e. Startup performance reports. f. Changeover information related to Owner's occupancy,use,operation,and maintenance. g. Final cleaning. h. Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety. i. List of incomplete Work,recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion. I. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of the final Application for Payment include the following: 1. Completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion. 3. Ensure that unsettled claims will be settled. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027-3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of the Architect. C. Project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of Work. C. Name of subcontractor. d. Change Orders(numbers)that affect value. e. Dollar value. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar;the total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored,but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include requirements for insurance and bonded warehousing,if required. 6. Provide separate line items on the Schedule of Values for initial cost of the materials, for each subsequent stage of completion,and for total installed value of that part of the Work. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in- place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense,at the Contractor's option. 7. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values prior to the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by the Architect and paid for by the Owner. 1. The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion,and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment-Application Times: Each progress-payment date is indicated in the Agreement. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. A APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 01027-APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. B. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing each prime contractor's Applications for Payment. 1. Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with the Contractor's Construction Schedule, Submittal Schedule,and List of Subcontracts. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. 1. Schedules: The Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittal Schedule are specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals." 1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor's Construction Schedule. B. Coordination: Each prime Sub-Contractor shall coordinate preparation of its Schedule of Values for its part of the Work with preparation of the Contractors'Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and forms,including: a. Contractor's Construction Schedule. b. Application for Payment forms, including Continuation Sheets. C. List of subcontractors. d. Schedule of alternates. e. List of products. f. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. g. Schedule of submittals. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect at the earliest possible date but no later than 7 days before the date scheduled for submittal of the initial Applications for Payment. " C. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish the format for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027- 1 A kak- AQUADRO& CERRUTI.INC. GENERAL.CONTRACTORS•ENGINEERS-CONSTRUCTION MANAGERS MJ.MORAN,INC. C O M P A N Y y �7� VENTURE MECHANICAL CONTRACTORS AJOWT ♦L'iViVRE TELEPHONE Telephone and fax will be available in two locations: Aquadro & Cerruti office, and the MJMoran-Collins Electric office. These are for work-related use and emergency calls only - no personal calls will be allowed. SMOKING No smoking in the building. Smoking will only be allowed in the area wells on the Southeast and Southwest corners of the building. RUBBISH It will be the responsibility of each company to remove rubbish on a daily basis and to put it into the proper dumpster provided by the CMJV. FIRE PERMITS Permits for hot work will be required. These may be obtained from Smith College. TEMPORARY POWER Temporary outlets and lighting will be provided by the electrical contractor. Extension cords and accessories are to be provided by each contractor. WEEKLY FOREMEN'S MEETINGS Weekly foremen's meetings will be held, with mandatory attendance. There may be two meetings per week if deemed necessary. DRINKING WATER Water coolers will be available on each floor of the project. Dispose of cups in adjacent receptacle. Employees are encouraged to take "water breaks" regularly. TOILETS Temporary facilities will be outside until we can install a couple inside the building. AQUADRO & CERRUTI. INC. GENERAL CONTRACTORS-ENGINEERS-CONSTRUCTION MANAGERS :CKLLINS ELECTIUC M.J. MORAN, INC. C 0 M P A N X MECHANICAL CONTRACTORS A JOINT VENTURE SMITH COLLEGE COMSTOCK-WILDER PROJECT ORIENTATION SCOPE This is a very sensitive project: to complete the amount of work in a very short time frame; and to maintain the looks and feel of this period building. This project, like every project, will need a great amount of team work and cooperation among all parties. PARKING Parking is going to be limited to one company vehicle for each trade on site. All other parking will be in a designated parking area on campus, with each company needing to transport its employees. NOISE Respect Our Neighbors Noise is going to be an issue on this project. No radios, tape decks, or similar devices will be allowed. Keep noise to a low level, especially in the early morning when arriving for work. Work hours per the City of Northampton are 7:00 AM to 10:00 PM. We are hoping in hot weather to be able to start at 6:00 AM in areas that won't create noise for our neighbors i.e. basement area. SAFETY Safety is very important. Hard hats and safety glasses will be worn at all times. For those who might forget their hard hats, we will have "pink" ones available for rent in the CMJV office. The first rental will be free, but the second one will be $100.00, billed to your company. Weekly safety meetings will be held. EMERGENCY Emergency telephone numbers will be posted in different locations on the project site. Cooley Dickinson Hospital is just 1/2 mile away up Route 9 West (Elm Street). P.O.BOX 656 TEXAS ROAD NORTHAMPTON,MA.01061 TEL:413-584-4022 FAX:413-584-0011 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 1. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the Owner,the Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. C. Use of the Existing Building: Maintain the existing building in a weathertight condition throughout the construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Take all precautions necessary to protect the building and its occupants during the construction period. D. Hours of operation: The Construction Manager will determine the hours the construction site will be available for work. 1.5 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. The Owner will furnish items listed below. The work includes providing support systems to receive Owner's equipment,and mechanical and electrical connections. 1. Signs 2. Microwave Ovens and Refridgerators 3. Washing Machines and Dryers(by vendors) 4. Selected toilet accessories. Refer to Section 10800 5. Optional Hobart LX Series Dishwasher — provide support systems and blank panel for future installation. 1.6 Construction Manager furnished built-in appliances: A. In-sinkerator Commercial Disposer, 1'/<h.p.Model SS-125 B. Built in Cook Top—Mr. Induction@, SR 1151B, 1500 watts, 110-120 volt. Manufacturered by Spring USA Corporation, 800-535-8974. 1.7 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S SUMMARY OF WORK A. The Construction Manager's Summary of Work is attached to this section for project requirements administered by the Construction Manager under their contract with Smith College. END OF SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SECTION 01010-SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Comstock-Wilder is a four story wood framed masonry bearing-wall building constructed in 1929. The building consists of two dormitory sections separated by masonry partitions and served by a common kitchen. The only access between Comstock and Wilder is through the basement area. 1. Project Location: Comstock-Wilder Houses, Smith College,Northampton,Massachusetts 2. Owner: Trustees of Smith College B. The project includes interior renovations of the existing corridors,toilets,doors,windows,upgrading all public spaces on the first floor, and creating new spaces in the basement; general refurbishing and restoration throughout , except the kitchen. The work also includes new mechanical, electrical and plumbing systems. Barrier free entrances are to be added to the east and west sides of the building. Masonry restoration,and roofing replacement are included in the work C. Contract Documents, dated April 15, 2000 were prepared for the Project by Juster Pope Frazier, LLP, 9 Ashfield Street,Shelburne Falls,MA 01370 C. The Work will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.3 WORK SEQUENCE A. Project Schedule: The Project has been awarded to a Construction Manager;A Joint Venture composed of Aquadro&Cerruti,Inc.,J.M. Moran,Inc. and Collins Electric,Inc. Work is presently underway in certain areas of the building. The interior of the building will be under the control of the Construction Manager after May 15,2000,and all work shall be completed on or before August 18,2000. Refer to Project Orientation directive attached at the end of this section. 1.4 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. General: During the construction period the Construction Manager shall have full use of the Owner's designated staging area for construction operations. The Construction Manager's use of the premises is limited only by the Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of the Project. Provide protective barricades, flashing lights and fencing around staging area as required by the Smith College Physical Plant. A0P*_1 B. Use of the Site: Limit use of the premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of the building beyond the areas in which the Work is indicated. SUMMARY OF WORK 01010- 1 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 000k If the General Liability policy includes a General Aggregate, such General Aggregate shall be not less than$10,000,000.Policy shall be endorsed to have General Aggregate apply to this policy only. 5) Business Auto Liability(including owned,non-owned and hired vehicles): (a) Bodily Injury: $1,000,000 Each Person. $1,000,000 Each Occurrence. (b) Property Damage: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence. 6) Umbrella Excess Liability:$1,000,000 over primary. d) Add, 11.1.4. (.l) "Submit three (3) copies of AIA Document G705, Certificate of Insurance, properly executed,including the title and signature of the authorized representative and the following statement: A copy of this certificate is on file in the office of the insurance company which underwrites the policies." (.2)Certificates shall be in the name of the Trustees of Smith College,Northampton,Mass. (3) Submit three (3) copies of any endorsements that are subsequently issued amending coverage or limits. e) 11.3.7,add the following sentence: "In waiving rights of recovery under terms of this sub-paragraph, the term "Owner" shall be deemed to include the Smith College,and its appointed officials, agents and representatives, Trustees of the College,and the Architect and his employees as the Owner's representative, as provided in the Contract Documents." ARTICLE 12-Uncovering and Correction of Work a) Add 12.1.3, (.1) A 'reasonable allowance for overhead and profit' for work solely performed by the Contractor as indicated above and utilized in the completion of cost and credit figures in Article 12.1.3, shall not exceed twelve(12%)percent of the net cost of the work. (.2) For work performed by subcontractors, cost to Owner may include an allowance for subcontractor's overhead and profit not to exceed ten (10%) percent of subcontractor's net cost,plus an allowance for General Contractor's overhead and profit not to exceed ten (10%) percent of the subcontractor's net cost." END OF SECTION SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 3 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA 9.3.1.3 Beginning with the first progress payment the Owner shall retain ten percent(10%)of the amounts approved for payment,until fifty percent(50%)of the billing of the total contract amount,after which no additional retainage shall be withheld. Article 10-Protection of Persons and Property Article 11 -Insurance a) 11.1.1.8 Liability Insurance shall include major divisions of coverage and be on a comprehensive basis including: 1) Premises Operations(including X,C,and U coverage as applicable. 2) Independent Contractors'Protective. 3) Products and Completed Operations. 4) Personal injury with Employment Exclusion deleted. 5) Contractual, including specified provision for Contractor's obligation under paragraph 3.18. 6) Owned,non-owned and hired motor vehicles. 7) Broad Form Property Damage including Completed Operations. b) 11.1.1.9 If the General Liability coverages are provided by a Commercial General Liability Policy on a claims-made basis,the policy date or Retroactive Date shall predate the Contract; the termination date of the policy or applicable extended reporting period shall be no earlier than the termination date of coverages required to be maintained after final payment,certifieda in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.2. c) Add the following Clause 11.1.2.1 to 11.1.2. 1)Workers'Compensation: (a) State: Statutory. (b) Employer's Liability: $1,000,000 Each Accident. $1,000,000 Disease,Policy Limit. $1,000,000 Disease,Each Employee. 2) Comprehensive or Commercial Liability(including Premises-Operations; Independent Contractors' Protective; Products and Completed Operations; Broad Form Property Damage): (a) Bodily Injury:$1,000,000 Each Occurrence. (b) Property Damage: $50,000 Each Occurrence. (c) Products and Completed Operations to be maintained for 10 years after final payment. (d) Property Damage Liability insurance shall provide X,C,and U coverage. (e) Broad Form Property Damage Coverage shall include Completed Operations. 3) Contractual Liability: (a) Bodily Injury: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence. (b) Property Damage: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence. 4) Personal Injury,with Employment Exclusion deleted:None. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 --GENERAL General Conditions a) The General Conditions of the Contract shall be the American Institute of Architects (AIA) Document A201, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" fourteenth edition, August 1987,herein referred to as the General Conditions. Supplementary Conditions a) The following items consist of changes and additions to the General Conditions as is bound therein.Where any part of an article of the General Conditions is modified or deleted, the remaining unaltered portion shall remain in effect. PART 2--AMENDMENTS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS Article 1 -General Provisions a) 1.2.6 add,"in the event of discrepancies within the Contract Documents: 1) Addenda shall modify Contract Documents. 2) Stated dimensions shall take precedence over implied dimensions (DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS). 3) Large scale drawings take precedence over smaller scale drawings. 4) The Architect shall clarify inconsistencies in the Contract Documents. In the event of inconsistencies in the specifications the best quality (usually most expensive) is intended. 5) Notice of any discrepancy shall be forwarded in writing to the Architect to the Architect within twenty-four hours, who shall issue a revision to the Contract Documents. 6) The Contractor is responsible for measuring the work. Dimensions on the drawings are offered as a guide only. Article 2-Owner a) 2.1.1 Change to read"The Owner(The Trustees of Smith College)is the person",etc. Article 3-Contractor a) 3.6 Delete(TAXES) Article 9-Payment and Completion a) Add new Sub-Paragraph: SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 1 tify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or Owner.The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner,as remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the the case may be,shall be certified by the Architect,upon apph- "'ontractor's surety, if anv, seven days' written notice, termi- cation, and this obligation for payment shall survive termina- nate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any tion of the Contract. prior rights of the surer: 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER .1 take possession of the site and of all materials,equip- FOR CONVENIENCE ment,tools,and construction equipment and machin- 14.3.1 The Owner may,without cause,order the Contractor in ery thereon owned by the Contractor; writing to suspend,delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Pan- pan for such period of time as the Owner may determine. graph 5.4; and .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the 14.3.2 An adjustment shall be made for increases in the cost of Owner may deem expedient. performance of the Contract,including profit on the increased cost of performance,caused by suspension, delay or interrup- 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the tion. NO adjustment shall be made to the extent: reasons stated in Subparagraph 14.2.1.the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is •1 that Performance is,was or would have been so sus- finished. pended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Archi- another provision of this Contract. tea's services and expenses made necessary thereby, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the 14.3.3 Adjustments made in the cost of performance may have unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the a mutually agreed fixed or percentage fee. Amw AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOLATEEN-ni EDITION 24 A201.1987 AIA• • ZP 1987 THE A.%tERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS.173 5 NEW YORK AVENUE.N.W.•W.4-5HINGTON.D.C.20tx)6 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. The Owner shall bear such costs except as provided in Sub- ARTICLE 14 paragraph 13.5.3. 13.5.3 If such procedure for rating, inspection or approval TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT under Subparagraphs 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Fork to comply°with requirements established 14,1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and is stopped for a period of 30 days through no act or fault of the expenses. Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions 13.5.4 Required certificate of testing, inspection or approval of the Work under contract with the Contractor,for any of the shall,unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,be following reasons: secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the .1 issuance of an order of a court or ocher public author- Architcct. ity having jurisdiction; 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tats, inspections or .2 an act of government,such as a declaration of national approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect emergency, making marerizl unavailable; will do so promptly and,where practicable,at the normal place .3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for of testing. Payment and has not notified the Contractor Of the reason for withholding certification as provided in 13.5.6 Tau or inspections conducted pursuant to the Con- Subparagraph 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not tract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable made payment on a Certificate for Payment within delay in the Work, the time stated in the Contract Documents; .4 if repeated suspensions,delays or interruptions by the 13.6 INTEREST Owner as described in Paragraph 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total num- 13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Docu- ber of days scheduled for completion,or 120 days in menu shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such any 365-d2y period, whichever is less: or rate as the parties max.agree upon in writing or, in the absence .5 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor thereof,at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place promptly, upon the Contractor's request, reasonable where the Project is located. evidence'as required by Subparagraph 2.2.1. 14.1.2 If one of the above reasons exists, the Contractor may, 13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and LIMITATION PERIOD Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner 13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor: payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment .1 Before Substantial Completion.As to acts or failures and machinery, including reasonable overhead, profit and to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substan- damages. tial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations 14.1.3 if the%York is stopped for a period of 60 days through shall commence to tun and any alleged cause of action no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their Shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events agents or employees or any other persons performing portions not later than such date of Substantial Completion; of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the .2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certlfl- Ow n:has perWtc:.dy failed to U011 :he Oc.:,c:'s cbligations Cate for Payment. AS to acts or failures to act occur- und--r the Contract Documents with respect to matters impor- ring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial cant to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certify- seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and the case for Payment,any applicable Statute of limitations Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner shall commence to run and any alleged cause of as provided in Subparagraph 14.1.2. action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE events not later than the date of issuance of the final 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Certificate for'Paymenr, and Contractor: .3 After Final Certificate for Payment As to acts or .1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issu- enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; ante of the final Certificate for Payment, any appli- .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials cable statute of limitations shall commence to run and or labor in accordance with the respective agreements any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; accrued in any and all events not later than the date of .3 persistently disregards laws,ordinances.or rules,reg- any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to ulations or orders of a public authority_ having juris- any warranty provided under Paragraph 3.5,the date diction: or of any correction of the work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Paragraph 12 2.or the 4 othern ise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision date of•actuul commission of am• other act or failure of the Contract Documents to perform wiy duty or Obligation by the Contractor 14.2.2 when anv of the above reasons exist,the Owner.upon or Owner. whichever occurs List. cer:L2c2tion by the Architect that sufficient cause exisu; to jus- AlA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL.CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOL°RTEE.,?H EDITION AIA+ •(V 19M-THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1-35 NEW YORK AvENcE.N.W...WASHINGTON.D C.'txxx, A201-1987 23 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. for commencement of warranties established under Sub- ARTICLE 13 paragraph 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents,anv of the Work is found MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after 13.1 GOVERNING LAW receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the 13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the 12W Of the place Owner has previously given the Contractor a written accep- where the Project is located. tance of such condition. This period of one year shall be extended with respect to Dortion..s of Work first performed after 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substan- 13.2.1 The Owner and Contraaor respectively bind them- tial Completion and the acttlal performance of the Work.This selves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representa- obligation under this Subparagraph 12.2.2 shall survive accep- tives to the Other party hereto and to partners, successors, =cc of the Work under the Contract and termination of the assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect Contract. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after dis- to covenants,agreements and obligations contained in the Con- covery of the condition. tract Documents. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of either pang attempts to make such an assignment without such the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements consent,that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the for all obligations under the Contract. Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. 12.2.4 if the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE within a reasonable time, the Owner ma;• correct it in accor- 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duiv dance with Paragraph 2.4. If the Contractor does not proceed served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of with correction of such nonconforming Work within a reason- the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it able time fixed by written notice from the Architect,the Owner was intended,or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified may remove it and store the salvable materials or equipment at mail to the last business address known to the pam• giving the Contractor's expense. If the Contractor does not pay costs notice. of such removal and storage within ten days after written notice, the Owner may upon ten additional days' written 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES notice sell such materials and equipment at auction or at private sale and shall account for the proceeds thereof,after deducting 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Docu- costs and damages that should have been borne by the Con- menu and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in tractor,including compensation for the Architect's services and addition to and not a limitation of duties,obligations,rights and expenses made necessary thereby. If such proceeds of sale do remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. not cover costs which the Contractor should have borne, the 13.4.2 NO action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contract Sum shall be reduced by the deficiency. If payments Contractor shall constitute a aaiyer of a right or dui} afforded then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover them under the Contract, nor shall such action or fare to act such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the failure approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, Owner. except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 12.2.5 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Cnntr?rror'c rorrection or removal of Work 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Con- Fork required by the Contra Documents or by laws, ordi- tract Documents. nances,Hiles,regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time.unless other- 12.2.6 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.2 shall be con- wise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for strued to establish a period of limitation with respect to other such tests,inspections and approvals with an independent test- obligations which the Contractor might have under the Con- ing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the tract Documents. Establishment of the time period of one year appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of as described in Subparagraph 12.2.2 relates only to the specific tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspec- relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply tions are to be ma ct de so the Archite may observe such proce- with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, dures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced approvals which do not become requirements until after bids- to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Con- are received or negotiations concluded. tractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require addi- tional testing, inspection or approval not included tinder Sub- 12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in paragraph 13.5.1,the Architect will,upon written authorization accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, from the Owner,instruct the Contractor to make arrangements the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and cor- for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity ^` recrion, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections whether or not final payment has been made. are to be made so the Architect may observe such procedures. AIA DOCUMEW A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOL'RTEEN1 H EDITION 22 A201-1987 AIA• -0 198-THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE.NW,WASHINGTON.D.C.20006 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and Is subject to loyal prosecution. 11.3.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner 11.3.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and insures properties. real or personal or both, adjoining or adja- settle a loss with insurers unless one of the panics in interest cent to the site by property insurance under policies separate ;hall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss from those insuring the Project. or if after final payment prop- to the Owner's exercise of this power; if such objection be ern insurance is to be provided on the completed Project made,arbitrators shall be chosen as provided in Paragraph-4.5. through a polic,. or policies other t:an those insuring the Proj- The Owner as fiducian•shall.in that case,make sertlement with ect during the construction period. the Owner shall naive all insurers in accordance with directions of such arbitrators. If rights in accordance with the terms of Subparagraph 1 1.3.7 for distribution of insurance proceeds by arbitration is required, damages caused by fire or other perils covered by this separate the arbitrators will direct such distribution. property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. 11.3.11 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragraph 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company or com- 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall panics providing property, insurance have consented to such file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes Partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The insurance coverages required by this Paragraph 11.3. Each Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, deftni- consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, tions,exclusions and endorsements related to this Project.Each without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation,lapse or cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days"prior writ- reduction of insurance. ten notice has been given to the Contractor. 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 11.3.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor 11.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contrac- tor to famish bonds covering faithful performance of the Con- waive all rights against(1)each other and any of their subcon- taa and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipu- tractors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employees,each of the lated in biddin requirements ors specifically required in the other, and (2) the Architect. Architect's consultants, separate Contract Documents on the date Of execution of the Contract. contractors described in Article 6, if any and any of their sub- contractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, for 11.4.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obliga- property insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph 11.3 or tions arising under the Contract.the Contractor shall promptly other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such famish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made. rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as Fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor,as appropriate. ,,,, shall require of the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate ARTICLE 12 contractors described in Article 6, if any. and the subcontrac- tors.sub-subcontractors,agents and employees of any of them, UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enum- erated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subro- 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the gction by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that per- the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by the son or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification. Architect.he uncovered for the Architect's observation and be contractual or otherwise. did not pay the insurance premium replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity. Contract Time. had an insurable interest in the property damaged. 12.1.2 If a nnnion of nce Work has lent rove-red which the 11.3.8 A loss insured under Owner'; property insurance shall Architect has not specifically requested to observe prior to its be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the being covered,the Architect may request to see such Work and Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncover- clause and of Subparagraph 1 1.3.10. The Contractor shall pay ing and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received charged to the Owner. If such Work is not in accordance with by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such costs where legally required for validit%,shall require Subcontractors unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for manner. payment of such costs. 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 1 T.3.9 If required In writing by a party in interest, the Owner 12,2.1 The Contractor shall prompdy correct Work rejected as fducian• shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss, give by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties.The cost the Contact Documents, whether observed before or after of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated,installed fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a separate account pro- or completed. The Contactor shall bear costs of correcting ceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in actor- such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspee- dance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, tions and compensation for the .architect's services and or in accordance with an arbitration award in which case the expenses made necessary thereby. procedure shall be as provided in Paragraph -t.5. If after such loss no other special agreement is made, replacement of dam- 12.2.2 If.within one year after the date of Substantial Comple- aged property shall be covered by appropriate Change Order. tior,of the Work or designated portion r hereof.or after the date AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GE.;EkAL CONDITIUriS OF TIIh t-U.%TRACT rOR CONSTRUCTION•Fol'RTEE.1,TH EDITION AIAI • I')M-THE A.MERICAX I\s T ITCTE OF ARCHITECTS.i-3$SEW YORK AyENCE,XX,WASHINGTON,D C.'tKXK, A201-1987 21 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. .2 c'.aims for damages because of bodily injury,occupa- other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property tiunal sickness or disease.or death of the Contractor's required by his Paragraph 11.3 to be covered. whichever is c:nolo%-ees: earlier.This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the ` or disc-se.or death of=v person other than the Con- Work• tractor's employees; 11.3.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an all-risk poiicy form claims for damages insured by usual personal injury and shall insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage liability coverage which are sustained(1)by a person and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, false- employment of such person by the Contractor,or(2) work, temporary buildings and debris removal including b,.•another person; demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, requirements, and shall coyer reasonable compensation for because of injury to or destruction of tangible prop- Architect's services and expenses required as a result of such env. including loss of use resulting therefrom; insured loss. Coverage for other perils shall not be required .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury,death of unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. a person or property damage arising out of owner- 11.3.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such prop- ship, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; and erty insurance required by the Contract and with all of the .7 claims involving contractual liability insurance appli- coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so cable to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of 3.18. the Work.The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor,Subcontractors and Sub- 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph i 1.1.1 shall be subcontractors in the Work,and by appropriate Change Order written for not less than limits Of liability specified in the Con- the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. if the Contrac- tract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is for is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to pur- greater. Coverages. whether written on an occurrence or chase or maintain insurance as described above, without so claims-made basis. shall be maintained -without interruption notiffi.ing the Contractor,then the Owner shall bear all reason- from date of commencement of the \X'ork until date of final able costs properly attributable thereto. payment and termination of any coverage required to be main- tained after final payment. 11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires minimum deducti- bles and such deductibles are identified in the Contract Docu- 11.1.3 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall ments, the Contractor shall pay costs not covered because of be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. such deductibles.If the Owner or insurer increases the required These Cenificates and the insurance policies required by this minimum deductibles above the amounts so identified or if the Paragraph 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages Owner elects to purchase this insurance with voluntary deduc- afforded under the policies will not be cancelled or allowed to tible amounts, the Owner shall be responsible for payment of expire until at least 30 da}s•prior written notice has been given the additional costs not covered because of such increased or to the Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are voluntary deductibles. If deductibles are not identified in the required to remain in force after final payment and are reason- Contract Documents. the Owner shall pay costs not covered ably available.an additional certificate evidencing continuation because of deductibles. of such coverage shall be submitted with the final ?application 11,3.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9.10.2. Information ments,this propem} insurance shall cover portions of the Work concerning reduction of coverage shall be furnished by the stored off the site after written approval of the Owner at the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the value established in the approval,and also portions of the Work Corlrrnctor's inform2tion ass± belief in transi(. 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.3.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance. The Owner shall 11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. Optionally, required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall the Owner may purchase and maintain other insurance for self- specifically coyer such insured objects during installation and Protection against claims which may arise from operations until final acceptance by the Owner.this insurance shall include under the Contract. The Contractor shall not be responsible interests of the Owner, Contractor. Subcontractors and Sub- for purchasing and maintaining this optional Owner's liability subcontractors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor insurance unless specifically required by the Contract shall be named insureds. Documents. 11.3.3 Loss of Use Insurance. The Owner, at the Owner's 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will 11.3.1 unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized due to fire or other hazard', however caused. The Owner to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of Use located• property insurance in the amount of the initial Con- of the Owner's property,including consequential losses due to tract Sum as well as subsequent modifications thereto for the fire or other hazards however caused. entire Work at the site on a replacement cost basis without vol- 11.3.4 if the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for untary deductibles. Such property insurance shall be main- risks other than those described herein or for other special haz- tained. unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents arils be included in the property insurance policy. the Owner or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof are heneticiaries of such insurance.until final payment has been shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change made as provided in Paragraph 9.10 or until no person or entity Order. AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRA.CT FOR CONSTRLCTION•FUL'RTEE.1.?H EDITION 20 A201-1987 ALA= • _.1941'THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1'1i NEW YORK AVENLE.N.W.WANHINGTON.D.C.:txx)b WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. ARTICLE 10 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comps• with applicable laws.ordinances,rules,regulations and lawful orders PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS their protection from damage, injury or loss. 10.1.9 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating,main- 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain,as required by twining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reason- connection with the performance of the Contract. able safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating 10.1.2 In the event the Contractor encounters on the site safety regulations and notifying owners and users Of adjacent material reasonably believed to be asbestos or polychlorinated sites and utilities. biphenyl (PCB) which has not been rendered harmless, the 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the area affected materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for and report the condition to the Owner and architect in writing. execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed care and cam on such activities under supervision of properly except by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor if in qualified personnel. fact the material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl(PCB) and has not been rendered harmless.The Work in the affected 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss area shall be resumed in the absence of asbestos or polychlori- (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance nested biphenyl(PCB), or when it has been rendered harmless, required by the Contract Documents)to property referred to in by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor, or in Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the accordance with final determination by the Architect on which Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone arbitration has not been demanded, or by arbitration under directly or indirectly employed by any of them,or by anyone :article 4. for whose acts thev may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10.2.1.2.2nd 10.2.1.3, except 10.1.3 The Contractor shall not be required pursuant to Article damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner to perform without consent any Work relating to asbestos or or architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB). either of them,or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the 10.1.4 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Architect,Archi- addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18. tect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages,losses and expenses,includ 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of ing but not limited to attorneys' fees,arising out of or resulting the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphen vl(PCB)and has superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor not been rendered harmless,provided that such claim,damage, in writing to the Owner and architect. loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disc se 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit an} part of the or death. or to injury to or destruction of tangible property construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. (other than the Work itself) including loss of use resulting 10.3 EMERGENCIES therefrom,but only to the extent caused in whole or in pan by negligent acts or omissions of the Owner, anyone directly or 10.3.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, indirectly employed by the Owner or anyone for whose acts the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor's discretion,to pre- the Owner may be liable, rm-prdicss of whether or not such vent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensa- claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in pan by a party tion or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account indemnified hereunder.Such obligation shall not be construed of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Paragraph to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of 4.3 and Article'. indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Subparagraph 10.1.4. ARTICLE 11 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY INSURANCE AND BONDS 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as be affected thereby; will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorpo- may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations rated therein, whether in storage on or Off the site, under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally under care, custody or control of the Contractor or liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub-subcontrac- Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by R tors; and any of them,or by anyone for whose aces any of them may be .3 other property at the site or adiacenr thereto,such as liable: trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, .1 claims under workers' or workmen's compensation, structures and utilities not designated for removal,relo- disability benefit and other similar employer benefit acts cation or replacement in the course of construction. which are 2ppfic2bie to the Work to be performed; AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONMRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOL'RTEEtiTH EDITION AIA= a 198"THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AvE.`'L•E.N.W.,W.,kSHINGTON.D C Zorm A201-1987 19 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright jaws and Is subject to legal prosecution. noted po~ion thereof is substan..:ially complete. If the such inspection and,when the Architect finds the Work accept- Architect's inspection discloses any item, whether or not able under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully per- " included cn the Contractor's list, which is not in accordance formed, the .architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Contrac- Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, for shall• before issuance of the Certicate of Substantial Com- information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect's pletion,complete or correct such icem upon notification by the observations and inspections, the Work has been completed in Architect. The Contractor shall then submit a request for accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Docu- another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial mints and that the entire balance found to be due the Contrac- Complecien. When the Work or designated portion thereof is for and noted in said final Certificate is due and payable. The substantia!]y complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Sub- representation that conditions listed in Subparagraph 9.10.2 as stantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment Owner and Contractor for security,maintenance,heat,utilities, have been fulfilled. damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained accompanying the Certificate.Warranties required by the Con- percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to tract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial the Architect(1)an affidavit that payrolls,bills for materials and Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Comple- for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be Lion. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be sub- responsible or encumbered(less amounts withheld by Owner) mitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written accep- have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2)a certificate cyidenc- tance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Ing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to 9.8.3 Capon Substantial Completion of the Work or designated remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will portion thereof and upon application by the Contractor and not be cancelled or allowed to aspire until at least 30 days' certification by the architect, the Ow-ncr shall make payment, prior written notice has been given to the Owner,(3)a written reflecting adjustment in retainage.if 2111V.for such Work or por statement [hat the Contractor knows of no substantial reason lion thereof as provided in the Cont:ct Documents. that the insurance will not be renewable to coyer the period required by the Contract Documents, (4)consent of surety, if 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE any, to final payment and(5), if required by the Owner. other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations,such as 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or par- receipts, releases and waivers of liens,claims,security interests cially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and � portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contra- in such form aS may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcon- tor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the tractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the insurer as required under Subparagraph 11.3-11 and authorized Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond Satisfactory to the by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien Partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs assigned to each of them for payments. retainage if any,secu- and reasonable attorneys' fees. rity,maintenance,heat,utilities,damage to the Work and insur- ance,and have agreed in writing concerning the period for cor- 9.10.3 If,after Substantial.Completion of the Work, final com- rection of the Work and commencement of warranties pletion thereof is materially delayed through no fiult of the required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor Conumc:or or b,, °..suarce of Caro Orders zf•`ecti o f^.21 considers a portion Substantially complete,the Contractor shall completion, and the Architect so confines, the Owner shall, prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Subparagraph 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occu- Architect,and without terminating the Contract,make payment panty or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agree- and accepted.If the remaining balance for Work not fully com- ment between the Owner and Contractor or,if no agreement is pieced or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Con- reached, bee decision of the Architect. tract Documents,and if bonds have been furnished,the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that por- 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the tion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submit- Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area red by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and d�,terrnine and record the condition of the Work. conditions governing final payment, except that it Shall nut 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon,partial occupancy constitute a waiver of claims.The making of final payment shall gee po part pancy or use constitute a waiver of claims by the Owner as provided in Sub- of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute accep- paragraph 4.3.5. lance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9.10.4 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Sub- 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT contractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing 9.10.1 Capon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment. Such waivers shall be in addition to Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make the waiver described in Subparagraph 4.3.5. AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRI.'CTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION 18 A201.1987 AIA' •t 198'THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS.1-35 NEW YORK AyEENlE.N.W.-WASHINGTON.D.C.20o06 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.Copyright Iaws and Is subject to legal prosecution. Owner a Certin-cite for Payment. with a copy to the Contrac. 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are +, tor, for Such ar.:ount as the Architect determines is properly removed, certification will be made for amounts previously due. or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the withheld. Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS part as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1. 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a the Owner shall make payment ir, the manner and within the representation by the Architect to the Owner. based on the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notiA, Architect's observations at the site and the data comprising the the.Architect. Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the 9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, point indicated and that, to the best of the Architect's knowl- upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount edge. information and belief, quality of the Work is in accor- paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's por- dance with the Contract Documents.The foregoing represenra- tion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is tion5 are subject to an evaluation of the Fork for conformance entitled,reflecting percentages actually retained from payments with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion,to to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion results of subsequent tests and inspections.to minor deviations of the Work. The Contractor shall. by appropriate agreement from the Contract Documents correctable prior to completion with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The payments to Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the 9.6.3 The architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontrac- amount certified.However,the issuance of a Certificate for Pay- tor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of com- ment will not be a representation that the architect has (1) pletion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action made exhaustive or continuous or-site inspections to check the taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of por- quality or quantity of the Work, (3) reviewed construction tions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) 9,6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner except as may otherwise be required by law. to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment or(4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contrac- 9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner for has used money_ previously paid on account of the Contract similar to that provided in Subparagraphs 9.6.2.9.6.3 and 9.6.4. Sum. 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment. a progress payment,or partial 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Fork not in accordance with the 9.5.1 The .Architect may decide not to certif,• payment and Contract Documents. may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner,if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required 9.7.1 If the architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment. by Subparagraph 9.4? cannot be made. If the Architect is through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after unable to certify payment in the amount of the application,the receipt of the Contractor's Application for Pa}ment, or if the Architect will notif}• the Contractor and Owner as provided in Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the Subparagraph 9A.I. If the Contractor and architect cannot date established in the Contract Documents the amount cer- agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a tified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration.then the Con- Certificate for Pavment for the amount for which the Architect tractor may,upon seven additional days' written notice to the .S able to mike such representations to the Owner. The Archi- Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the tea may also decide not lO eerify payment or, because of amount owing has been received. T'itc Cuiluact Time shall be subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent observations, extended appropriateiv and the Contract Sum shalt be may nullify the whole or a part Of a Certificate for Payment increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the shut-down,delav and star-up,which shall be accomplished as Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because of: provided in Article 7. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION .1 defective Work not remedied. 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the .2 third part claims filed or reasonable evidence indicat- Work when the work or designated portion thereof is suffr- ing probable filing of such claims: ciendv complete in accordance with the Contract Documents .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments prop- so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended erh• to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or use. equipment; .4 equipment; evidence that the work cannot be com 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work,or a por- pleted for the unpaid balance W the Contract Sum; tion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor; to the architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be com- or corrected. The Contractor shall proceed promptly to com- pleted within the Contract Time,and that the unpaid plete and correct items on the list.Failure to include an item on balance would not be adequate to cover actual or such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to liquidated damages for the anticipated delay: or complete all work in accordance with the Contract Docu- .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance ments. Upon receipt of the Contractor's list. the Architect will with the Contract Documents. make an inspection to determine whether the Work or desig- AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GE`ER.AL CONDiTIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEE-NTH EDiTiON - AIAS • 198-THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS.1-35 NEW YORK AyENL'E.NX.W.),SHINGTON.D C.'txx)b A201-1987 17 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK ARTICLE 9 7.4.1 The Architect %•Dl have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the 9.1 CONTRACT SUM intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and,includ- and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written ing authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the orders promptly. Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 8 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 9.2.1 Before the fast Application for Pavmcit, the Contractor TIME shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work,prepared in such form and sup- 8.1 DEFINITIONS ported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided. Contract Time is the period may require.This schedule,unless objected to by the Architect, of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Con- shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applica- tract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. tions for Payment. 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT established in the Agreement.The date shall not be postponed 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date es:.ablishcd for each by the failure to act of the Contractor or of persons or entities progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect far whom the Contractor is responsible. an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data by the Architect in accordance with Paragraph 9.8. substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner 8.1.4 The term"dav"as used in the Contract Documents shall or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from mean calendar day unless other-wise specifically defined. Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting rcminage 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION if provided for else-.here in the Contract Documents. 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the 9.3.1.1 Such applications ma}•include requests for payment on essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Con- account of changes in the Work which have been properly tractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period authorized by Construction Change Directives but not yet for performing the Work. included in Change Orders. 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agree- 9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for pay- ment or instruction of the Owner in writing,prematurely com- mence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective Subcontractor or material supplier because of a dispute or other date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the reason. Contractor.The date of commencement of the Work shall not 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, be changed by the effective date of such insurance. Unless the payments shall be made on account of mate.-:&and equipment date of commencement is established by a notice to proceed delivered and suitabl} scored at the site for subsequent incor given by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in poration in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, writing not less than five days or ocher agreed period before payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages, suitably scored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. rncc.`,anic's Lc,-,5 and other security interests. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or orf the site 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with ade- shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with quate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's the Contract Time. title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and shall include applicable insurance, 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME storage and transportation to the site for such materials and 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress of the equipment stored off the site. Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect,or of an 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor the time Of payment. The Contractor further warrants that disputes,fire,unusual.delay in deliveries,unavoidable casualties upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by delav which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued authorized by the Owner pending arbitration, or by other and payments received from the Owner shall,to the best of the causes which the Architect determines may justify defy, then Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and the Contna Time shall be extended by Change Order for such clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in reasonable time as the Architect may de[crmine. favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors,material suppliers,or 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having applicable provisions of Paragraph 4.3. provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Rork. 8.3.3 This Paragraph 8.3 dots not preclude recovery of dam- 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT ` ages for delay by either party under other provisions of the 9.4.1 The Architect will,within seven days after receipt of the Contract Documents. Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CO1ZTRUCT60.:- ;(XRTEE.%T11 EDITION 16 A201-1987 ALA* •01987 THE AMERICAN INSTITLTE OF ARCHITECTS.1-35 NEW YORK A%VA:E.N.W.,WA.SHINGTQN.D.C.30006 WARNING.Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright hms and is subject to legal prosecution. ARTICLE 7 .3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percent- CHANGES IN THE WORK age fee; or 4 as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.6. 7.9 CHANGES 7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execu- Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the lion of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Fork involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a agreement or disagreement with the method, if anv, provided minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in in the Construction Change Directive for determining the pro- this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. posed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among 7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contrac- the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction Change for indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith,includ- Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and ing adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor;an order for a method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effec- minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. rive immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. 7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under appal- with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the cable provisions of the Contract Documents,and the Contrac- method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Archi- tor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the tea on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a those performing the Work attributable to the change, includ- minor change in the Work. ing, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, a reasonable 7.1.4 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or allowance for overhead and profit.In such case,and also under subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally con- Clause 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such templated arc so changed in a proposed Change Order or Con- form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting struction Change Directive that application of such unit prices together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity provided in the Contract Documents,costs for the purposes of to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be this Subparagraph -3.6 shall be limited to the following: equitably adjusted. .1 costs of labor, including social security, old age and 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the agreement or custom• and workers' or workmen's compensation insurance; Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect, .2 toss of materials, supplies and equipment, includ- stating their agreement upon all of the following: ing cost Of transportation, whether incorporated or .1 a change in the Work; consumed; .2 the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum,if .3 rental costs Of machinery and equipment,exclusive of any; and hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or .3 the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if others; any. .4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance,permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to the 7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract lWork; and Sum may include those listed in Subparagraph 7.3.3. .5 additional costs of supervision and field office person- 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES nei arrectiv attributable to the change. 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order pre- 7,3.7 Pending final determination of cost to the Owner, pared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, amounts not in dispute may be included in Applications for directing a change in the Work and stating a proposed basis for payment. The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contrac- adjustment, if any, in the Comma Sum or Contract Time, or for to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, decease the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as con- without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work firmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits within the general scope of the Contract consisting of addi- covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a lions,deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Con- change,the fated W allowance for overhead and tore shall lx figured tract Time being adjusted accordingly. on the basis of net increase,if any,with respect to that change. 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the 7,3.8 If the Owner and Contractor do not agree with the absence of total agreement on the tams of a Change Order. adjustment in Contract Time or the method for determining it, 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an the adjustment or the method shall be referred to the Architect adjustment to the Contract Sum,the adjustment shall be based for determination. on one of the following methods: 7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the deter- .1 mutual acceptance Of a lump sum properly itemized mination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in ,R and supported by sufficient substantiating data to per- the Contract Sum and Contract Time,or otherwise reach agree- mit evaluation; ment upon the adjustments,such agreement shall be effective .2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or sub- immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execu- sequently agreed upon; tion of an appropriate Change Order. ALA DOMMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION AIAO -Z 1987 THE AMEBIC-a.N INS I I L;I E OF ARCHITECTS.1735 NEW YORK AvENM N.W.,WASHINGTON.D.C.20006 A201-1987 15 WARNING:Unik need photoeopyinp vlolates U.S.copyright laws and Is wbiect to legal pmsemtlon. 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activi- ,, 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement,written where legally required ties of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor for validity, the Contractor shall squire each Subcontractor,to with the Fork of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, them.The Contractor shall participate with other separate con- to be bound to the Contractor by terms Of the Contract Docu- tractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction sched- ments,and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations ules when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any m and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Docu- revisions to the construction schedule and Contract Sum ma s,assumes coward the Oho and Architect.Each s Docu- deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. tract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so Owner until subsequently revised. that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights,and when shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided w Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all when the Owner performs construction or operations related rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the d the Project with the Owner's own forces,the Owner shall be the Contract Documents, has against the deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the Contractor, b}• Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each same rights which apply cl the Contractor under the [hers, Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-sub- bons stated the Contnet, including, without 6 a excluding others, contractors. The Contractor shall make available to each pro- those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12. posed Subcontractor,prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY Subcontractor will be bound,and,upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and condi- 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate con- tions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at tractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors shall their materials and equipment and performance of their activi- similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents ties and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's con- available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. struction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS Documents. 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Worst is 6.2.2 If pan of the Contractor's Work depends for proper assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that: execution or results upon construction or operations by the .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Pan- proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to graph 14.2 and only for chose subcontract agreements the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other which the Owner accepts e. nocontrg the agreements construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper tractor in siting; and execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report 2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or sepa- rate contractors'completed or partially completed construction if any,obligated under bond relating co the Contract. is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work,except as to 5.4.2 If the work has been suspended for more than 30 days, defects not then reasonably discoverable. the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted. 6.2.3 Costs caused by delays or by improperly timed activities or defective construction shall be home by the party responsi- ARTICLE 6 ble therefor. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrong- OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS fully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially com- pleted construction or to property of the Owner or separate 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.2.5 Claims and other disputes and matters in question 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or between the Contractor and a separate contractor shall be sub- operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, ject to the provisions of Paragraph 4.3 provided the separate and to award separate contracts in connection with other por- contractor has reciprocal obligations. tions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially 6.2.6 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the similar to these including those portions related to insurance same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay for the Contractor in Paragraph 3.14. or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner,the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided else- 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP where in the Contract Documents. 6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor,separate con- 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different por- tractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their tions of the Project or other construction or operations on the respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surround- site,the term"Contractor"in the Contract Documents in each ing area free from waste materials and rubbish as described in case shall man the Contractor who executes each sepante Paragraph 3.15. the Owner may clan up and allocate the cost Owner-Contactor Agreement. among those responsible as the Architect determines to be just. AIA DOCUMENT A201 -GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION- FOURTEENTH EDITION 14 A201-1987 AIA: -T 198'THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS.I-35 NEW YORK A%TNI'E.N.W•WA,SHINGTON.D C.20006 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. In 4.5.2 Rules and Notices for Arbitration. Claims between the 4.5.6 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. A party who , Owner and Contractor not resolved under Paragraph 4.4 shall, files a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the if subject to arbitration under Subparagraph -+.5.1, be decided demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitra- by arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industrn• tion is permitted to be demanded.when a pare•fails to include Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association cur- a Claim through oversight, inadvertence or excusable neglect, rently in effect, unless the paries mutually agree Otherwise. or when a Claim has matured or been acquired subsequently, Notice of demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the arbitrator or arbitrators may permit amendment. the other parry to the Agreement between the Owner and Con- tractor and with the American Arbitration Association, and a 4.5.7 Judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the copy shall be filed with the Architect. arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court 4.5.3 Contract Performance During Arbitration.During arbi- having jurisdiction thereof. tration proceedings, the Owner and Contractor shall comply with Subparagraph 4.3.4. 4.5.4 When Arbitration May Be Demanded.Demand for arbi- ARTICLE 5 tration of any Claim may not be made until the earlier of(1)the SUBCONTRACTORS date on which the Architect has rendered a final written deci- 5.1 DEFINMONS sion on the Claim,(2)the tenth day after the parties have pre- sented evidence to the Architect or have been given reasonable 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct opportunity to do so, if the Architect has not rendered a final contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work written decision by that date, or (3) any of the five events at the site.The term"Subcontractor"is referred to throughout described in Subparagraph 4.3.2. the Contract Documents as if singular in number and mans a 4.5.4.1 When a written decision of the Architect states that(1) Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcon- the decision is final but subject to arbitration and(2)a demand tractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a separate for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. made within 30 days after the date on which the party making 5,1.2 A Sub subcontractor is a person or entire who has a the demand receives the final written decision, then failure to direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a demand arbitration within said 30 days" period shatl result in portion of the Work at the site.The term"Sub-subcontractor" the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular Owner and Contractor. If the Architect renders a decision after in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized w arbitration proceedings have been initiated,such decision may representative of the Sub-subcontractor. be entered as evidence,but shalt not supersede arbitration pro- ceedings unless the decision is acceptable to 211 parties 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER concerned. CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 4.5.4.2 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or limits specified in Subparagraphs 4.5.1 and 4.5.4 and Clause the bidding requirements, the Contractor. as soon as prac- 4.5.4.1 as applicable, and in other cases within a reasonable ricable after award of the Contract. shall furnish in writing to time after the Claim has arisen,and in no event shall it be made the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or end- after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings ties(including those who are to furnish materials or equipment based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute fabricated to 2 special design)proposed for each principal por- of limitations as determined pursuant to Paragraph 13.7. lion of the Work.The Architect will promptly reply to the Con- tractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the ArChiiC�t, u`[Ci a�UC liivCjLi u(iil, ia:u iCuJiw`viC vb°:uiGCl LO 4.5.5 Umitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration r arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents shall any such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner or include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner, Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reason- the Architect, the Architect's employees or consultants,except able objection. by written consent containing specific reference to the Agree- 5.2.2 The Contractor shall nor contract with 2 proposed per- ment and signed by the Architect, Owner, Contractor and any son or entiry to whom the Owner or Architect has made rea- other person or entity sought to be joined. No arbitration shall sonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be include, by consolidation or joinder or in any ocher manner, required co contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has parties other than the Owner, Contractor, a separate contras tor as described in Article 6 2nd other persons substantially made reasonable objection. involved in a common question of fact or law whose presence 5.2.3 if the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a is required if complete relief is to be accorded in 2rbitration.No person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor person or entity other than the Owner,Contractor or a separate shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no contractor as described in Article 6 shall be included as an orig- reasonable objection. The Contract Sum shall be increased or in21 third parry or additional third parr to an arbitration whose decreased by the differrlce in cost occasioned by such change interest or responsibility is insubstantial. Consent to arbitration and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued.However,no involving an additional person or ends shall not constitute increase in the Contract Sum shall be allowed for such change consent to arbitration of a dispute not described therein or with unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in w. a person or entity not named or described therein. The fore- submitting names as required. going agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by patties 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor,person to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under appli- or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes cable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. reasonable objection to such change. AIA DOCUMENT A201 -GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CO%TRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION-FOGRTEE\TH EDITION Ain' • 19H"THE AMERICAN tNST1TLTE OF ARCHITECTS.1'35 NEB'YORK AVENGE.N.'r.•W.&SHINGTON.O.C.2mki A201-1987 13 WARNING:Unlicensed photoCOpyhig violates U.S.Copyright IMS aid is subject to legal prosecution. 4.3.4 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final r;so- substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the lution of a Claim including arbitration. unless otherwise agreed period of time and could not have been reasonably anticipated, , in writing the Contractor shall proceed diligently with perfor- and that weather conditions had an adverse effect on the mance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make scheduled construction. payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4.3.9 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either part 4.3.5 Waiver of Claims: Final Payment. The making of final to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner because of an act or omission of the other parry,of any of the a°xcept those arising from: other party's employees or agents, or Of others for whose acts .1 liens, Claims,security interests or encumbrances aris- such parry is legally liable, written notice of such injury or ing out of the Contraa and unsettled; damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after first of the Contract Documents; or observance. The notice shall provide sufficient derail to enable .3 tem-is of special warranties required by the Contract the other parr to investigate the matter. If a Claim for addi- Documents. tional cost or time related to this Claim is to be asserted,it shall be filed as provided in Subparagraphs 4.3.7 or 4.3.8. 4.3.6 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If con- 4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES ditions are encountered at the site which are(1)subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materi- 4.4.1 The Architect will review Claims and take one or more of ally from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) the following preliminary actions within ten days of receipt of unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature,which dif- Claim:(1)request additional supporting data from the claimant, fer materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally (2)submit a schedule to the parties indicating when the Archi- recognized as inhere:., in construction activities of the sect expects to take action,(3) reject the Claim in whole or in charaaer provided for in the Contract Documents,then notice part, stating reasons for rejection, (4) recommend approval of by the observing party shall be given to the other party the Claim by the other parry or(5)suggest a compromise.The promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later Architect may also, but is not obligated to, notify the surety,if than 21 days after first observance of the conditions.The Archi- any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. tect will promptly investigate such conditions and,if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's 4.4.2 If a Claim has been resolved,the Architect will prepare or cost of, or tune required for. performance of any pan of the obtain appropriate documentation. Work,will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract 4.4.3 If a Claim has not been resolved, the parry making the Sum or Contract Time,or both.If the Architect determines that Claim shall, within ten days after the Architect's making the conditions at the site are not materially different from those response,take one or more of the following actions:(1)submit indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the additional supporting data requested by the Architect, (2) terns of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall so notify modify the initial Claim or(3)notify the Architect that the initial the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. Claims by either parr in opposition to such determination Chun stands' must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given 4.4.4 If a Claim has not been resolved after consideration of the notice of the decision. If the Owner and Contractor cannot foregoing and of further evidence presented by the panies or agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, requested by the Architect,the Architect will notify the parties the adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initial deter- in writing that the Architect's decision will be made within mination,subject to further proceedings pursuant to Paragraph seven days, which decision shall be final and binding on the 4.4. parties but subject to arbitration. Upon expiration of such time 4.3.7 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to prod. the Architect will render to the parties the Architea's make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum,written notice written decision renuve to the Ciarrn, including any change in . as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Contract Stun or Contract Time or both. If there is a surety the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an and there appears to be a possibility of a Contractor's de6ult, emergency endangering life or property arising under Para- the Architect may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety and graph 10.3. If the Contractor believes additional cost is request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. involved for reasons including but not limited to(1)a written interpretation from the Architect,(2)an order by the Owner to 4.5 ARBITRATION stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault,(3)a writ- 4.5.1 Controversies and Claims Subject to Arbitration.Any ten order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Archi- controversy or Claim arising out of or related to the Contrxt, tea,(4)failure of payment by the Owner,(5)termination of the or the breach thereof, shall be settled by arbitration in accor- Contna by the Owner, (6) Owner's suspension or(7) other dance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of rite reasonable grounds,Claim shall be filed in accordance with the American Arbitration Association, and judgment upon the procedure established herein. award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators may be entered 4.3.8 Claims for Additional Time in any court having jurisdiction thereof, except controversies 4.3.8.1 If the Contractor wishes to crake Claim for an increase or Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as in the Contract Time,written notice as provided herein shall be provided for in Subparagraph 4.3.5. Such controversies or given.The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate Of cost Claims upon which the Architect has given notice and rendered and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work.In the a decision as provided in Subparagraph 4.4.4 shall be subject to cue of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary. arbitration upon written demand of either parry. Arbitration may be commenced when 45 days have passed after a Claim 4.3.8.2 If adverse weather conditions arc the basis for a Claim has been referred to the Architect as provided in Paragraph 4.3 for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data and no decision has been rendered. AIA DOCUMENT A201 -GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE C&7RACT FOR CONSTRL'•'_TIO!--FOURTEEXTti EDITION 12 A201-1987 ALA' - s 198-THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS.1-35 NEW YORK AVENUE.N vr..IWASHINGTON.D.C.20006 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and In subject to legal prosecution. tractor,Subcontractors,or their agents or employees,or of any out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The duties, other persons performing portions of the Work. responsibilities and limitations Of authority of such project 4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administra- representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorpo- tion. Except as othcrw•se provided in the Contract Documents rated in the Contract Documents. or when direct communications have been specially autho- 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concem- rizcd, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communi- ing performance under. and requirements of the Contract care through the Architect. Communications by and with the Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contrac- Architect's consW=rs shall be through the Architect. Commu- tor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made nications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers with reasonable promptness and within any time limits agreed shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with upon. If no agreement is made concerning the time within separate contractors shall be through the Owner. which interpretations required of the Architect shall be fur- 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's observations and evaluations of nished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2, then delay shall the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the ?architect will not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to fur- review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will nish such interpretations until 15 days after written request is issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. made for them. 4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work which 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be does not conform to the Contact Documents. Whenever the consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Architect considers it necessary or advisable for implementa- Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of tion of the intent of the Contract Documents,the Architect will drawings.When making such interpretations and decisions,the have authority to require additional inspection or testing of the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Work in accordance with Subpangnphs 13.5.2 and 13.53, Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and whether or not such Fork is fabricated,installed or completed, will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so However,neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision rendered in good faith. made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Archi- 4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic tea to the Contractor.Subcontractors,material and equipment effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the suppliers,their agents or employees,or other persons perform- Contract Documents. ing portions of the Work. 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as 4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the the parties seeking,as a matter of right,adjustment or interpre- limited purpose of checking for conformance with information cation of Contract terms,pavment of money,extension of time given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Docu- or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The ments. The Architect's action will be taken with such reason- term "Claim"also includes other disputes and matters in ques- able promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the tion between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relat- activities of the Owner, Contractor or separate contractors, ing to the Contract. Claims must be made by written notice. while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the judgment to permit adequate review.Review of such submittals party making the Claim. is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and 4.3.2 Decision of Architect. Claims, including those alleging quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or an error or omission by the Architect,shad be referred initially perfoenarce of equipment or systems,all of which remain the to the Architect for action as provided in Paragraph 4.4.A deci- responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract sion by the Architect,as provided in Subparagraph 4.4.4,shall Documents.The Architect's review of the Contractor's submit- be required as a condition precedent to arbitration or litigation talc shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under of a Claim between the Contraaor and Owner as to all such Paragraphs 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect's review shall not matters arising prior to the date final payrgcnt is due,regardless constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise of(1)whether such matters relate to execution and progress of specifically stated by the Architect,of any construction means, the Work or(2)the extent to which the Work has been com- methods,techniques,sequences or procedures.The Architect's pleted. The decision by the Architect in response to a Claim approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an shall not be a condition precedent to arbitration or litigation in assembly of which the item is a component, the event(1)the position of Architect is vacant,(2)the Architect 4.2.8 The Architect 96111 prepare Change Orders and Construe- has not received evidence or has failed to resider a decision within agreed time limits, (3) the Architect has failed to take tion Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in action required under Subparagraph 4.4.4 within 30 days after the e Work as provided in Paragraph 7.4, the CLzim is made,(4)45 days have passed after the Claim has 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the been referred to the Architect or (5) the Claim relates to a date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final mechanic's lien. completion, will receive and forward to the Owner for the 4.3.3 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either parry must be Owner s review and records written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the made within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to ,tom Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. the condition giving rise to the Claim,whichever is later.Claims must be made by written notice. An additional Claim made 4.2.10 if the Owner and Architect agree.the Architect will pro- after the initial Claim has been implemented by Change Order vide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying will not be considered unless submitted in a timely manner. AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOU'RTEEN'TH EDITION AIA' 19.9-THE ANJERICAN INSTITLTE OFARCHITECTS.1'35 NEW YORK AVENUE.NW_.WASHINGTON.D.C.2rXXx5 A201-1987 11 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and Is subject to legal pros*Wlon. d Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of tea's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them the Owner and of such separate contractor;such consent shall arising out of(1)the preparation or approval Of maps,drawings, area not be unreasonably withheld.The Contractor shall not unrea- opinions,reports,surveys.Change Orden,designs or specifica- sonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the tions, or (2) the giving of or the failure to give directions or Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. instructions by the Architect, the Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them provided such giving or 3.15 CLEANING UP failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or dx-mage. 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surround- ing area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract.At completion of the ARTICLE 4 Work the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT equipment, machinery and surplus materials. 4.1 ARCHITECT 3.15.2 if the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the 4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the cost architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture iden- thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. tiled as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term 3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect "Architect" means the Architect or the Architect's authorized access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever representative. located. 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the 3.17 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted,modified or extended without written consent of the 3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unra- The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of sonably withheld. patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for 4.1.3 in case of termination of employment of the Architect, such defense or loss when a particular design,process or prod- the Owner shall appoint an architect against whorr. the Con- uct Of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by tractor makes no reasonable objection and whose scans under the Contract Documents. However, if the Contractor has rea- the Contract Documents shall be that of the former architect. son to believe that the required design,process or product is an 4.1.4 Disputes arising under Subparagraphs 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 infringement of a patent,the Contractor shall be responsible for shall be subject to arbitration. such loss unless such information is promptly fumished to the 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION Architect. OF THE CONTRACT 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor as described in the Contract Documents, and will be the shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner,Architect,Archi- Owner's representative (1) during construction, (2) until fuel tea's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from from and against claims,damages, losses and expenses,includ- time to time during the correction period described in Para- ing but not limited to attorneys'fees,arising out of or resulting graph 12.2. The Architect will advise and consult with the from performance of the Work,provided that such claim,dam- Owner.The Architect will have authority tO act on behalf of the age, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of tangible prop- unless otherwise modified by written instrument in accordance erry(other than the Work itself)inciuding loss-of use resulting with other provisions of the Contract. therefrom,but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor,a Subcontractor, 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for the stage of construction to become generally familiar with the whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not progress and quality of the completed Work and to determine such claim,damage,loss or expense is caused in pan by a patty in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indieat- inde mnified hereunder.Such obligation shall not be construed ibg that the Work,when completed,will be in accordance with to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections described in this Paragraph 3.18. to check quality or quantity of the Work. On the basis of on- site observations as an architect, the Architect will keep the 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entiry indemnified Owner informed of progress of the Work,and will endeavor to under this Paragraph 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor,a guard the Owner against defects and deficiendeb in 4he Worit. Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnifies- 4.2.3 The Architect will not have control over or charge of and tion obligation under this Paragraph 3.18 shall not be limited by will not be responsible for construction mans, methods, a limitation on amount or nlpe of damages, compensation or techniques,sequences or procedures,or for safety precautions benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor and programs in connection with the Work, since these are under workers' or workmen's compensation acts, disability solely the Contractor's responsibility as provided in Paragraph benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 3.3• The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's ON*, failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contras 3.18.3 The obligations of the Contractor under this Paragraph Documents.The Architect will not have control over or charge 3.18 shall not extend to the liability of the Architect,the Archi- of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Con- AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUrTION•FOURTEE.VTMI EDITION 10 A201-1987 ALAS •C 198'THE AMERICAN INSTiTLTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1-35%Ew YORK AVENUE.N.W.,WASHINGTON.D.C.20006 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright Iaws and is subject to legal prosecution. .3 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the which submittals are required the way the Contractor proposes site. labor, installation costs. overhead. profit and to conform to the information given and the design concept other expenses contemplated for stated allowance expressed in the Contract Documents. Review by the Architect amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum and is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph 4.2,-. not in the allowances: .4 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review,approve and submit to the the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar Change Order.The amount a the Change Order shall submittals required by the Contract Documents with reason- Chan (1)the difference n between to actual costs and the able promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in allowances under Clause tweet and (2) changes in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate con- Co v,-an Contractor's costs under Clause 3.8.2-3.and ( tractors. Submittals made by the Contractor which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned without 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT action. 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superinten- 3.12.6 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work dent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Project site during performance of the Fork. The superinten- Data,Samples or similar submittals until the respective submit- dent shall represent the Contractor,and communications given W has been approved by the architect.Such Work shall be in to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Con- accordance with approved submittals. tractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writ- ing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on 3.12.7 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product written request in each case. Data,Samples and similar submittals,the Contractor represents 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES that the Contractor has determined and verified materials,Geld measurements and field construction criteria related thereto,or 3.10.1 The Contractor,promptly after being awarded the Con- w ill do so, and has checked and coordinated the information tract,shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's contained within such submittals with the requirements of the information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work. Work and of the Contract Documents. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents,shall be revised at appropriate intervals as 3.12.8 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Con- by the architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, tract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practi- Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has cable execution of the Work. specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and the Architect has given written ►,. 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current,for the approval to the specific deviation.The Contractor shall not be Architect's approval, a schedule of submittals which is coordi- relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Draw- nated with the Contracror's construction schedule and allows ings.Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Archi- the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. tea's approval thereof. 3.10.3 The Contractor shall conform to the most recent 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention,in writing schedules. or on resubmitted Shop Drawings. Product Data. Samples or 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE similar submittals. to revisions other than those requested by 3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner the Architect on previous submittals. one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, addenda, 3.12.10 Informational submittals upon which the Architect is Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in marked currently to record changes and selections made during thr C'nnrrar-t Onnimenrs. construction. and in addition approved Shop Drawings, Prod- 3.12.11 When professional certification of performance criteria uct Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall of materials,systems or equipment is required by the Contract be avat7able to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Archi- Documents, the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the tea for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. accuracy and completeness of such calcul2dons and catifi- 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES cations. 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and 3.13 USE OF SITE other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or 3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer,supplier or areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, per- materials or equipment. formamcc charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or equipment for some portion of the Work. p° g• g or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate fit together properly. materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a rtion by which the Work will be judged. g portion of the Fork or fully or partially completed construction of the 3.12.4 Shop Drawings. Product Data,Samples and similar sub- Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or other- mittais are not Contract Documents. The purpose of their sub- wise altering such construction,or by excavation.The Contrac- mittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for for shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the AIA DOCUMENT A201 % GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONMUCTION-FOURTEENTH EDITION AI.A' - 1�Iva-THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS.1735 NEW YORK AYENCE.N T.WASHINGTON.D.C.21CM6 A201-1987 9 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND 3.5 WARRANTY FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that 3.2.1 The Contractor shall ca c^silo study and compare the materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be Contract Documents with each other and with information of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permit- furnished by the Owner pursta.t to Subparagraph 3?2 and ted by the Contract Documents, that the work %%-ill be free shall at once report to the Arc`:i:cct errors, inconsistencies or from defects not inherent in the qualiq'required or permitted, omissions discovered. The Contactor shall not be liable to the and that the work will conform with the requirements of the Owner or Architect for damage resulting from errors, inconsis- Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these require- tencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the menu, including substitutions not properly approved and Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency or omission authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. If the Con- warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by tractor performs any construction activity knowing it involves abuse,modifications not executed by the Contractor,improper a recognized error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal Documents without such notice to the Architea, the Contrac- wear and tear under normal usage. if required by the Architect, for shall assume appropriate responsibility for such perfor- the Contractor shall famish satisfactory evidence as to the kind mance and shall bear err.2ppropr iate amount of the attributable and quality of materials and equipment. costs for correction. 3.6 TAXES 3.2.2 The Contractor shall take field measurements and verify 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales,consumer,use and similar field conditions and shall carefully compare such field ma- taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by the Con- surements and conditions and ot..er information known to the tractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or Contractor with the Contract Documents before commencing negotiations concluded,whether or not,vet effective or merely activities. Errors, incorustendes or omissions discovered shall scheduled to go into effect. be reported to the Architect at once. 3.2.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES with the Contract Documents and submittals approved pur- 3.7.1 Unless other-wise provided in the Contract Documents, suant to Paragraph 3.13. the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and other permits and governmental fees. licenses and inspections 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES necessary for proper execution and completion of the Mork 3.3.1 The Contractor shall suoervise and direct the Work, which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract using the Contractor's but skill and attention. The Contractor and which are legally required when bids are received or nego- shall be solely responsible for and have control over construe• tiations concluded. tion means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices and for coordinating 211 portions of the Work under the Con- required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful tract, unless Contract Documents give other specific instruc• orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the dons concerning these matters. Work. 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts 3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable and their agents and cmpioyces.and other persons performing laws,statutes,ordinances.building coda.and rules and rcgula- portions of the Work under a contract with the Contractor. tions. However, if the Contractor observes that portions of the 3.3.3 The Contractor shall nor be relieved of obligations to per- Contract Documents are at variance therewith, the Contractor form the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing,and es;hc by activities or dutie< of the architect in the Architect's ecessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate cr` blodihc: don. administration of the Contract, or by tats, inspection or approvals required or performed by persons other than the 3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be con- Contractor. trary to 12WS,statutes,ordinances,building codes,and rules and 3.3.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of por- regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner, tion of Work already performed under this Contract to deter- the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such Work and shall bear the attributable costs. mine that such portions are in proper condition to receive sub Sequent Work. 3.8 ALLOWANCES 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, allowances seated in the Contract Documents. Items covered the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor,materials,equip- by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such ment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, persons or entities as the Owner may direct,but the Contractor heat, utilidCS, transportation, and other facilities and services shall not be required to employ persons or entities against necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, which the Contractor makes reasonable objection. whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorpo- 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents: rated or to be incorporated in the Work. 1 materials and equipment under an allowance shall be 3.4.2 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good selected prompt!,.by the Owner to avoid delay in the order among the Contractor's employees and other persons Fork; Arno carrm ing out the Contact. The Contractor shall not permit .2 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks materials and equipment delivered at the site and all assigned to them. required cases, less applicable trade discounts; AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CO.SDITIONS OF THE CONTPUCT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION 8 A201-1987 ALA* •Z198-THE AMERICAN INSTIT(TE OF ARCHITECTS.1"3i NEW YORK AyENVE.S.W..,WAMINGTO`,D.C.2txxlb WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and is subject to legal lamsecution. Work without the specific written consent of the Owner and ments and charges required for construction.use or occupancy Architect.The Contractor, Subcontractors,Sub-subcontractors of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing and material or equipment suppliers are granted a limited facilities. license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Draw- ings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the 2.2.4 Information or smices under the Owner's control shall Architect appropriate to and for use in the execution of their be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness to Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under avoid delay in orderly progress of the NX'ork. this license shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and ocher documents 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, prepared by the Architect. Submittal or distribution to meet the Contractor will be furnished,free of charge,such topics of official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in con- nection are with this Project is nor to be construed as publication execution of the Work. in derogation of the Architect's copyright or other reserved 2.2.6 The foregoing are in addition to other duties and respon- rights. sibilitics of the Owner enumerated herein and especially those 1.4 CAPITALIZATION in respect to Article 6(Construction by Owner or by Separate 1.4.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include Contractors), Article 9(Payments and Completion)and Article those which arc (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of num- 11 (Insurance and Bonds). bered articles and identified references to Paragraphs,Subpara- 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK graphs and Clauses in the document or(3) the titles of other 2,3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in documents published by the American Institute of Architects, accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents 1.5 INTERPRETATION 25 required by Paragraph 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out 1.5.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents fre- Work in accordance with the Contract Documents,the Owner, quently omit modifying words such as"all"and"any"and arti- by written order signed personally or by an agent specifically so cles such as"the" and"an," but the fact that a modifier or an empowered by the Owner in writing, may order the Conuac- article is absent from one statement and appears in another is for to stop the Work,or any portion thereof,until the cause for not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Con- ARTICLE 2 tractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3. .,, OWNER 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 2.1 DEFINITION 2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails the agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from Documents as if singular in number.The term"Owner"means the Owner to commence and continue correction of such the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative, default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may after such seven-day period give the Contractor a second 2.1.2 The Owner upon reasonable written request shall furnish written notice to correct such deficiencies within a second to the Contractor in writing information which is necessary and seven-dav period. If the Contractor within such second seven- relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or d2v period after receipt of such second notice fails to com- enforce mechanic's lien rights.Such information shall include a mence and continue to correct anv deficiencies, the Owner correct statement of the record legal title to the property on may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may which the Project is iocatcd,usually referred to as the site,and have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate the Owner's interest therein at the time of execution of the Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or Agreement and, within five days after any change,information thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such de& of such change in title, recorded or unrecorded. ciencies, including compensation for the Architect's additional services and expenses made necessary by such default,neglect 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to REQUIRED OF THE OWNER the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Archi- test• If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not 2.2.1 The Owner shall,at the request of the Contractor,prior to execution of the Agreement and promptly from time to time sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. thereafter, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract.[Note. Unless such reasonable ARTICLE 3 evidence were furnished on request prior to the execution of The Agreement, the prospectity contractor would not be CONTRACTOR required to execute the Agreement or to commence the Work.] 2.2.2 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical 3.1 DEFINITION characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such of the Project, and a legal description of the site. in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract 2.2.3 Except for permits and fees which are the responsibility Documents as if singular in number. The term "Contractor" of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized shall secure and pay for necessary approvals,easements,assess- representative. AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRL'CTIOX• FOCRTEE..NTH EDITION AJA'3 •Z 1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS.1735 NEW YORK AyE`CE.N.W.WASHINGTON.D.C.:AM A201-1987 7 WARNING:Unlicenasd photocopying vbiatas U.&copy ftm laws and is subject to legal pmsecutlon. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ARTICLE 1 ment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of re:ated scrvica. GENERAL PROVISIONS 1,1,7 THE PROJECT MANUAL 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS The Project Manual is the volume usually assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements, sample 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS forms, Conditions of the Contract and Specifications. The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between 1.2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT Owner and Contractor(hereinafter the Agreement),Conditions of the Contract(General,Supplementary and other Conditions), 1.2.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner Drawings, Specifications,addenda issued prior to execution of and Contractor as provided in the Agreement. If either the the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications ner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract fications issued after execution of the Contract.A Modifi- Documents, the Architect shall identify such unsigned Docu- ration is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change menu upon request. Directive or(4)a written order for a minor change in the Work 1.2.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a repre- issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the sentation that the Contractor has visited the site,become famil- Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include other iar with local conditions under which the Work is to be per- documents such as bidding requirements (advertisement or formed and correlated personal observations with require- invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the menu of the Contract Documents. Contractor's bid or portions of addenda relating to bidding requirements). 1.2.3 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor.The Contract Documents are comple- The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. mentary,and what is required by one shall be as binding as if The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be between the panics hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Docu- representations or agreements,either written or oral.The Con- menu and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary tract may be amended or modified only by a Modification.The [O produce the intended results. Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contrac rual relationship of any kind(1)between the Architect and Con- 1.2.4 Organization of the Specifications into divisions,sections tractor, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub- and articles,and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the subcontractor or(3)between any persons or entities other than Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. the Owner and Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under 1,2,5 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the words which have well-known technical or construction indus- Architect s duties, try meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accord- 1.1.3 TMS WORK ance with such recognized meanings. The term "Work" means the construction and services 1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF ARCHITECT'S required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or DRAWINGS,SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, DOCUMENTS equipment and services provided or to be provided by the 1.3.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents Contraaor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work prepared by the Architect are instruments of the Architect's may constitute the whole or a pan of the Project. service through which the Work to be executed by the Con- 1.1.4 THE PROJECT tractor is described. The Contractor may retain one contract The Project its the total construction of which the Work per- record set.Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor,Sub- formed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or pan and which may include construction by the Owner or by claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other Separate Contractors. documents prepared by the Architea, and unless otherwise indicated the Architect shall be deemed the author of them and 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS will retain all common law,statutory and other reserved tights, The Drawings arc the graphic and pictorial portions of the Con- in addition to the copyright. All copies of than, except the tract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, Contractor's record set,shall be returned or suitably accounted showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, for to the Architect,on request,upon completion of the Work. generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, sched- The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared tiles and diagrams. by the Architect, and topics thereof furnished to the Contr2c- 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS tor,arc for use solch•with respect to this Project.They are not *' to be used by the Contractor or anv Subcontractor, Sub- The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other proj- Lonsiuirlg of the written requirements for materials, equip- cas or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the ALA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION 6 A201.1987 ALA* •Z 198'THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS.1-35 NEW YORK AvE.1LT-N.W.,WASHINGTON.D.C.20006 WARNING.Unlicensed Photocopying violates u&copyright taws and Is subject to loyal prosecution. Rules and Notices for Arbitration ..................... 4.5.2 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience ............. 14.3 Safety of Persons and Property ............. .......... 10.2 Suspension of the Work ............. 4.3.7,5.4.2,14.1.1.4,14.3 Safety Precautions and Programs ........... 4.2.3.4.2.7,10.1 Suspension or Termination of the Contract ...... 4.3.7,5.4.1.1,14 Samples,Definition of .................... .......... 3.12.3 Taxes ...................................... 3.6,7.3.6.4 Samples,Shop Drawings,Product Data and ... 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 Termination by the Contractor........................ 14.1 Samples at the Site,Documents and ......... ... ....... 3.11 Termination by the Owner for Cause............. 5.4.1.1,14.2 Schedule of Values ...... . ...................... 9.2,9.3.1 Termination of the Architect .......................... 4.1.3 Schedules.Construction ... .. ............... ... ....... 3.10 Termination of the Contractor ........................ 14.2.2 Separate Contracts and Contractors .......... 1.1 A,3.1.1.2,4.2.4, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT ...... 14 4.5.5.6, 11.3.-, 12.1.2. 12.2.5 Tests and Inspections ..... 3.3.3,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2, 12.2.1.13.5 Shop Drawings,Definition of......................... 3.12.1 TIME ............................................... 8 Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples .... 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 Time,Delays and Extensions of .............. 4.3.8,7.2.1,8.3 Site,Use of.............................. 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 Time Limits,Specific ......... 2.1.2,2.2.1,2.4,3.10,3.11,3.15.1, Site Inspections . ..1.2.2,3.3.4.4.2 2.4.2.9,-i.3.6.9.8.2.9.10.1,13.5 4.2.1,4.2.11,4.31 4.4,4.5,5.3,5-4,7.3.5,7.3.9,8.2,9.2,9.3.1, Site Visits.Architcct's ................. 4.2.2.4.2.5,4.2.9,4.3.6, 9.3.3.9.4.1,9.6.1,9.7,9.8.2,9.10.2, 11.1.3. 11.3.6, 11.3.10, 9.4.2,9.5.1.9.8.2.9.9.2.9.10.1, 13.5 11.3.11, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 12.2.6, 13.7, 14 Special Inspections and Testing .............. 4.2.6,12.2.1,13.5 Time Limits on Claims......... 4.3.2,4.3.3,4.3.6.4.3.9,4.4,4.5 Specifications,Definition of the....................... 1.1.6 Title to Work ................................. 9.3.2.9.3.3 Specifications,The ...... .... 1.1.1,1.1.6, 1.1 1.2.4,1.3,3.11 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK .......... 12 Statutes of Limitations.... . ............... -r.5.-1.2.12.2.6.13-7; Uncovering of Work ................................ 12.1 Stopping tie Work. . . . .. . . .... 2.3.4.3---9.-.10.1.2.10.3-14.1 Unforeseen Conditions .. ............ ...... . .0.6.8.3.1.10.1 Stured M3:e-iats ......_ . ... 6.2.1.9.3.2. 10.2.1.2. 11.3.1.4.12.2.-+ Unit Prices................... .......... ..... ..l.-1.-.3.3.2 Subcontr3ciur.Definition of. ............... . .......... 5.1.1 Use of Documents .... . .......... .. SUBCONTRACTORS ........ .......................... 5 Use of Site ...................... ........ 3.13,6.1.1.6.2.1 Subcontractors,Work by.................. 1.2.4,3.3.2,3.12.1, Values,Schedule of ............................. 9.2,9.3.1 4.2.3.5.3.5.4 Waiver of Claims:Final Payment.... ...... 4.3.5,4.5.1.9-10.3 Subcontractual Relations.............. 5.3,5.4.9-3-1.2,9.6.2. Waiver of Claims by the Architect...................... 13.4.2 9.6.3.9.6.-1. 10.2.1. 11.3?, 11.3.8. I f.l.1, 14.2.12, 14.3.2 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor......... 9.10.4,11.3.`%13.4.2 Submittals . . . ... ... 1.3-3.2,3.3.10.3-11.3-12.4.2.-,5.2.1,5.2.3. Waiver of Claims by the Owner.............. 4.3.5.4.5.1.9.9.3. '.3.6.9.2.9.3.1.9.8.2.9.9.1.9.10.3.9.10.3, 10.1.2, 11.1.3 9.10.3. 11.3.3. 11.3.5. 11.3.7. 13.4.2 Subrogation,Waivers of................. 6.1.1,11.3.5.11.3.7 Waiver of Liens...... .............................. 9.10.2 Substantial Completion. ............ .t.2.9.-1-3.5.2.8.1.1.8.1.3. Waivers of Subrogation................... 6.1.1.11.3.5.11.3-7 8.2.3,9.8,9.9.1. 12.2.1, 12.2.2. 13•- Warranty and Warranties......................... 3.5,4.2.9, Substantia'Cumpletion.Definition of......... . .......... 9.8.1 i.3.5.3,9.3:3.9:8.2,9:9.1. 12.2.2. 13.-.1.3 Substitution of Subcontractors ........... ... . ..... 5.2.3.5.2.4 Weather Delays....... ...... .+.3.8.2 Substitution of the.architect................. .......... 4.1.3 When Arbitration May Be Demanded .................. 4.5.4 Substitutions of Materials .. ............ ............... 3.5.1 Work.Definition of ................................. 1.1.3 ...... ........ Sub-subcontractor.Definition of ....................... 5.1.2 Written Consent .............. 1.3.1,3.12.8,3.14.2.4.1.2.4.3.4, Subsurface Conditions ............................... 4.3.6 4.5.5.9.3.2,9.8.2,9.9.1.9.10.2,9.10.3. 10.12, 10.1.3. Su"assorsandlssiyata ............................ 13.2 il.'�.i. 41.3.4.4, 11.x.11, 13.2. 13.4.2 Superintendent ............. 3.9,10 2.6 Written Interpretations ....:.............. 4.2.11. +.2.13.4.3.7 Supervision and Construction Procedures ...... 1.2.4,3.3,3.4, Written Notice ........... 2.3,2.4.3.9,3.12.8,3.12.9.4.3.4.4.4, -12.3.4.3.4.6.1.3.6.2.4, ' 1.3,7.3.4,8 2,8.3.1, 10, 12, 14 4.5.5.2.1.5.3.5.4.1.1,8.2.2,9.4.1,9.3.1,9.7,9.10, 10.1.2, Suret. . .............. 4.4.1,4.4.4,5.4.1.3,9.10.2,9.10.3,14.2.2 102.6, 11.1-3. 11.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4,13.3, 13.52, 14 Suretp,Consent of. . .................. 9.9.1.9.10.2.9-10.3 Written Orders.............................. 2.3.3.9.4.3.7 Surve%'s. .. ............ ...... ................ 2.2.',3.18.3 8.2.2, 11.3.9, 12.1. 12.2, 13.5-2. 14.3.1 r AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CO%DtTIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR COXSTRUCT10%•FOURTEENTH EDITION AI.A' • Iv„"THE A.*IERIC N I%STtTLTE OF ARCHITECTS.1-35 NEW YORK AVENUE.\.W.,WASHINGTON.D.C.20()06 A201-1987 5 WARNING.Unlicensed photocopying violatts U.S.copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. Li iik2tions of Liability . . 2.3,3.2.1.3.5.1.3.'.3.3.12.8,3.12.11, Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to 3.17,3.18, 4.2.6,4.2.',,4.2.12,6.2.2,9.4.2,9.6.4,9.10.4, Award Separate Contracts ......................... 6.1 10.1.4, 10.2.5, 11.1.2, 11.2.1, 11.3.7, 13.4.2. 13.5.2 Owner's Right to Stop the Work................... 2.3,4.3.7 Limitations of Time,Gcncral ........ Owner's Right to Suspend the Work...................... 14.3 2 2.1,2.2.4.3.2.1.3.7.3, � Pm -, 3.8.2, 3.10,3.12.5,3.15.1,4.2.1,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.3.2. Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract ................. 14_ 4.3.3.4.3.4.+•3.6, 4.3.9,4.5.4.2, 5.2.1, 5.2.3.6.2.4,7.3.4,3.2, Ownership and Use of Architect's Drawings,Specifications 8.2. 9.5,9.6.3,9..3 9.9,5.4.2 t 1.1.3. 11.3.1, 11.3.2, 11.3.5, and Other Documents................ 1.1.1,1.3,2.2-5.5.3 11.3.6, 13.2.1, 12.2.3, 2, 1 3.5 Partial Occupancy or Use ................. 9.6.6,9.9, 11.3-11 Patching,Cutting and .......................... 3.14,6._.6 limitations of Time,Specific ......... 2.1.2,2.2.1,2.4,3.10,3.11, Patents,Royalties and .............................. 3.17 3.15.1,4.2.1, 4.2.11, 4.3.4.4,4.5, 5.3. 5.4.7.3.5.7.3.9,8.2, Payment,Applications for ................ 4.2.5,9.2.9.3,9.4. 9.2.9.3.1,9.3.3,9.4.1,9.6.1,9.7,9.8.2,9.10.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 9.5.1,9.8.3,9.10.1,9.10.3,9.10.4, 14.2.4 11.3.10, 11.3.11, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 12.2.6, 13.7, 14 Payment,Certificates for........... 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3.9.4,9.5, Loss of Use Insurance ............................. 11.3.3 9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7.1,9.8.3,9.10.1,9.10.3, 13-77, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Material Suppliers .............. 1.3.1,3.12.1,4.2.4,4.2.6,5.2.1, Payment,Failure of.......................... 4.3.7,9.5.1-3, 9.3.1,9.3.1.2,93.3,9.4.2,9.6.5.9.10.4 9.7,9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Materials,1i12=dous ........................... 10.1,10.2.4 Pavment,Final .. ...... .... 4.2.1,4.2.9.4.3.2,4.3.5.9.10.11.1.2, MZcrials,Labor,Equipment and ..... 1.1.3,1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.5, 12.3.1 3.12.2,3.12.3,3.12.7,3.12.11,3.13,3.15.1,4.2.7,6.2.1, Payment Bond,Performance Bond and .............. 7.3.6.4. 7.3.6,9.3.2,9.3.3, 12.2.4, 14 9.10.3, 11.3.9.11.4 Means.Methods,Techniques,Sequences and Pa\•ments,Progress .... ...................... 4.3.4.9.3.9.6. Procedures of Construction.......... 3.3.1,-1.2.3.4.2.7,9.4.2 9.8.3,9.10.3, 13.6. 14.2.3 Minor Changes in the Work.......... 1.1.1.4.2.8,4.3.7,7.1.7.4 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION .. .. .......... ..... ... 9, 14 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS ............. ........... 13 Payments to Subcontractors .................... 5.4.2.9.5.1.3. diodificuions.Definition of........................... 1.1.1 9.62,9.6.3.9.6.4, 11.3.8, 142.12 Modifications to the Contract ........... 1.1.1. 1.1.2,3.7.3,3.11, PCB...... ......... ............................... 10.1 4.1.2,4.2.1, 5.2.3,7.8.3.1,9.7 Performance Bond and Pavment Bond................. -.3.6.4. Mutual Responsibility ................................ 6.2 9.10.3. 11.3.9, 11.4 Nonconforming Work,Acceptance of .................. 12.3 Permits,Fees and Notices....... 2.2.3.3.7,3.13.7.3.6.1.10.22 Nonconforming Work,Rejection and Correction of ........ 2.3.1, PERSONS AND PROPERTY,PROTECTION OF ............ 10 4.3.5.9.5.2.9.8.2. 12, 13.'.1.3 Polychlorinated Biphenyl .................... ......... 10.1 Notice.......... ... 2.3.2.4.3.2.1.3.2.2.3•'.3.3•-•4.3.9.3.12.8. Product Data.Definition of..... ....................._ 3.12.2 3.12.9. 3.1',4.3.4.4.4.4.5. 5.2.1. 5.3, 5.4.1.1.8.2.2,9.4.1. Product Data and Samples,Shop Drawings .... 3.11.3.12,4.2.- 9.5-1.9.6.1.9.7,9.10, 10.1.2, 10.2.6. 11.1.3. 11.3. 12.2.2. Progress and Completion ................... 4.2.2.4.3.4,8.2 12.2.4. 13.3. 13.5.1. 13.5.2. 14 Progress Payments .. .......................... .0--1.9.3. Notice,Written .. . ............ 2.3.2A.3.9.3•12.8.3.12.9,4.3. 9.6, 9.8.3,9.10.3. 13.6. 1.1.2.3 4.4.4.-1.5. 5.2.1. 5.3, 5.4.1.1,8.2.2.9•-1.1,9.5.1.9.7,9.10. Project,Definition of the. ............ ................ 1.1.4 10.1.2. 10.2.6. 11.1.3. 11.3. 12.2.2. 12.2.4.13.3, 13.5.2, 14 Project Manual,Definition of the ...................... 1.1.7 Notice of Testing and Inspections................ 13-5.1,13.5.2 Proiect Manuals . ................................ ... 2.2.5 Notice to Proceed................................... 8.2.2 Project Representatives ............................. 4.2.10 ):cc=end ...... 2.2-3.3.7,3.13,7.3 4.',10.22 Property insurance ......................... .. 10.2.5.11_3 Observations,Architect's On-Site ................. 4.2.2,4.2-5, PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY...•.......... 10 4.3.6,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1, 13.5 Regulations and Laws ............ 1.3.3.6.3.7.3.13,4.1.1,4.5.5. Observations,Contractors....................... 1.2.2,3.2.2 4.5.7. 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.3. 13.1, 13.4. 13.5.1, 13.5.2. 13.6, 14 Occupancy......................... 9.6.6.9.8.1.9.9,11.3.11 Rejection of Work ......................... 3.5.1,41.6,12-2 On-Site inspections by the Architect .......... .1.2.2,4.2.9.4-3.6. Releases of Waivers and Lies......................... 9.110-2 9.4.2.9.8.2.9.9.2.9.10.1 Representations ......................... 1.2.2.3.5.1,3.13'. On-Site Obscr%-ations bv_ the Architect ......... 4.2.2,4.2.5.4.3.6, 6.22,8.2.1,9.3.3.9.42.9.5.1,9.8.3.9.10.1 9.4.2.9.5.1,9.10.1, 13.5 Representatives................:;...:�..... 2.1.1.3-1.1.'.9. Orden,Written 2.3.3.9,4.3 7.8.2.2,11.3.9,12.1, 4.1.1,4.2.1,4.2.10,5.1.1.5.1._. 13.2.1 12.2, 13.5.2, 14.3.1 Resolution of Claims and Disputes ....... 4.4 4.5 2 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work . 3.32. OWNER............ ................................. 4.2-3.6.1-3.6.2. 10 Owner.Definition of ................................. 2.1 Retainage ............... 9.3-1.9.6-2.9-8.3,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.103 Owner,information and Services Required of the........ 2.1.2. Review of Contract Documents and Field 2.2, 4.3.4.6,9, 10.1.4, 112, 11.3, 13.5.1, 14.1.1.5, 14.1.3 Conditions by Contractor............ 12.2,3.2,3.7•3.3.12.7 Owners Authority ......... 3.8.1,4.1.3,4.2.9,5.2.1.5.2.4,5.4.1. Retiew of Contractor's Submittals by 7.3.1,8.2.2,9.3.1,9.3.2, 11.4.1, 12.2.4. 13.5.2. 14.2, 14.3.1 Ow•nerand Architect ............. 3.10.1,3.10.2,3.11.3.12. Owner's Financial Capability..........:........ 2.2.1.14.1.1.5 4.2.7,43.9.5.2.1,52.3.9.2.9.82 Owner's Liability Insurance .......................... 11.2 Review of Shop Drawings.Product Data Owner's Loss of Use Insurance........................ 11.3.3 and Samples by Contractor........................ 3.12.5 Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors ............... 1.1.2, Rights and Remedies ............. 1.1 2,2.3,2.4,3.5.1,3.15-2. , 52.1, 5.4.1,9.6.4 4.2.6.4.3.6.4.5. 5.3,6.1.6.3,7.3.1,8.3.1,9.5.1.9.7. 102.5. Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work........ 2.-1,12.2.4,14.2.2.2 10.3. 12.2.2, 12.2.4.13.4, 14 Owners Right to Clean Up ............................ 6.3 Royalties and Patents. ........................... ... 3.17 ALA DOCUMENT A201 •GLNERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION-FOL•RTELNTH EDMON 4 A201-1987 AIAe •®198-THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS.1'S5 NEVI'YORK AVENUE,N.W..WASHINGTON.D.C.200u6 WARNING:Unlicensed photoeopying vblates U.S.copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. �;JNTRACTOR . . . . ............ ..... ... ... ............. 3 Emergencies .. . . . . ........................... 4.3.7,10.3 Contractor,Definition of .......... ............. 3.1,6.1.2 Employees,Contractor's .......... 3.3.2,3.4.2,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.1, Contractor's Bid......................... ........... 1.1.1 3.181,42.3,4.2.6,8.1.2, 10.2, 10.3, 11.1.1, 14.2.1.1 Contractor's Construction Schedules ............. 3.10,6.1.3 Equipment,Labor,Materials and.......... 1.1.3,1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1, Conuaaor's Employees ....... 3.3.2,3.4.2,3.8.1,39,3.18,42.3, 3.8.2,3.12.3,3.12.7,3.12.11,3.13,3.15.1,4.2.7, 4.2.6,8.1.2, 10.2, 10.3, 11.1.1, 14.2.1.1 6.2.1,7.3.6,9.3.2,9.3.3, 11.3, 12.2.4, 14 Contractor's Liability Insurance....................... 11.1 Execution and Progress of the Work ....... 1.1.3,1.2.3.3.2,3.4.1, Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors 3.5.1,42.2,42.3,4.3.4,4.3.8,6.2.2,7.1.3, and Owner's Forces ...... 2.2.6,3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,6,12.2.5 7.3.9,8.2,8.3,9.5,9.9.1, 10.2, 14.2, 14.3 Contractor's Relatiorsship with Subcontractors ....... 1.2.4,3.3.2, Execution, Correlation and Intent of the 3.18.1,3.18.2, 51,53,5.4,9.6.2, 11.3.7, 11.3.8, 14.2.1.2 Contract Documents .......................... 1.2.3.7.1 Contractor's Relationship with the Architea .... 1.1.2,3.2.1,3.2.2, Extensions of Time ............. 4.3.1,4.3.8,7.2.1.3,8.3,10.3.1 3.3.3,3.5.1, 3.7.3,3.11,3.12.8 3.16,3.18,4.2.3,4.2.4,4.2.6, Failure of Payment by Contractor.............. 9.5.1.3,14.2.1.2 4.2.12, 5.2,62.2,7.3.4,9.82, 11.3.7, 12.1, 13.5 Failure of Payment by Owner ................ 4.3.7,9.7,14.1.3 Contractor's Representation.. 1.2.2,3.5.1,3.12.7,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3 Faulty Work(See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Contractor's Responsibility for Those Final Completion and Final Payment ........ 4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2, Performing the Work ................ . 3.3.2.3-18,4.2-3,10 4.3.5,9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3. 11.3.5, 12.3.1, 13.7 Contractor's Review of Contract Documents.. . ... 1.2.2,3.2,3.7.3 Financial Arrangements,Owner's....................... 2.2.1 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work ...................... 9.7 Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance ................... 11.3 Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract .............. 14.1 Contractor's Submittals ....... 3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3, GENERAL PROVISIONS................................ 1 -.3.6.9.2,9.3.1.9.8.2,9.9.1,9.10.2, Governing Law . . . .. ............................... 13.1 9.10.3, 10.1.2, 11.4.2, 11.4.3 Guarantees(See Warranty and Warranties) Contractor's Superintendent .............. ........ 3.9,10.2.6 Hn-rdous Materials. . .......................... 10.1,10.2.4 Contractor's Supervision and Construction Procedures...... 1.2.4, Identification of Contract Documents ................... 1.2.1 3.3,3.4. 4.2.3,8.2.2,8.2.3, 10 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers............. 5.2.1 Contractual Liability Insurance................. 11.1.1.7,11.2.1 Indemnification....... 3.17,3.18,9.10.2,10.1.4,11.3.1.2,11.3.7 Coordination and Correlation ............. .. 1.2.2,1.2.4.3-3-1. Information and Services Required of the Owner..... 2.1 2,2.2, 3.10, 3.12.7,6.1.3,6.2.1 4.3.4, 6.1.3,6.1.4,6.2.6,9.3.2.9.6.1,9.6.4,9.8.3.9.9.2, Copies Fumished of Drawings and Specifications ... 1.3,22.5,3.11 9.10.3, 10.1.4, 11.2, 11.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2 Correction of Work ..................... 2.3,2.4,42.1,9.8.2. Injury or Damage to Person or Property ................ 4.3.9 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2, 13.7.1.3 I nspections..... . ................... 3.3.3.3.3.4,3.'.1.4.2.2. Cost,Definition of .................... . . ...... 7.3.6,14.3.5 4.2.6.4.2.9.4.3.6,9.42,9.8.2,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5 Costs .... 2.4.3.2.1,3.7.4,3.8.2,3.15.2.4-3.6,4.3.7.4.3.8.1,5.2.3, Instructions to Bidders............................... 1.1.1 6.1.1,6.2.3.6.3,%.3.3.3.7.3.6.7.3.7,9.-.9.8.2.9.10.2,11.3.1.2. Instructions to the Contractor.... 3.8.1,4.2.8,5.2.1.'.12.1.13.5.2 11.3.1.3. 11.3-4.1 1.3.9,12.1,12.2.1. 12.2.4,12.2.5,13.5. 14 Insurance....... 4.3.9.6.1.1,'7.3.6-4,9.3.2,9.8.2.9.9.1.9.10.2,11 Cutting and Patching................ . . .. ....... 3.14,6.2.6 Insurance,Boiler and Machinery ................. ... 11.3.2 Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors 3.14.2, Insurance,Contractor's Liability ...................... 11.1 6.2.4,9.5.1.5, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.3, 11.1, 11.3, 12.2.5 Insurance,Effective Date of ..................... 8.2.2,t 1.1.2 Damage to the Work ..... 3.14.2,9.9.1,10.2.1.2,10.2-5,10.3,11.3 Insurance,Loss of Use............................. 11.3.3 Damages,Claims for .. 3.18,4.3.9,6.1.t,6.2.5,8.3.2,9.5.1.2,10.1.4 Insurance,Owner's Liability............... ........... 11.2 Damages for Delay....... 6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1.6.9.7 Insurance,Property,... ...................... 10.2.5,11.3 Date of Commencement of the Work,Definition of......... 8.1.2 Insurance,Stored Materials .................... 9.3.2,11.3.1.4 Date of Substantial Completion,Definition of.............. 8.1.3 INSURANCE AND BONDS ............................. 11 Day,Definition of................................... 8.1.4 insurance Compuues,Consent to Pavan Occupancy..9.9-1,11-3.11 Decisions of the Architect...... 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13, Insurance Companies,Settlement with................. 11.3.10 4.32,4.3.6,4.4.1,4.4.4,4.5,6.3.7.3.6, 7.3.8,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2, Intent of the Contract Documents ................ 1.2-3,3.12.4, 9.4,9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.1, 10.1.2, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.12,4.2.13,7.4 Decisions to Withhold Certification .......... 9.5,9.7,14.1.1.3 Interest............ ... 13.6 Defective or Nonconforming Work,Acceptance, ;:'''''''''''''''''''''' Rejection and Correction of............ 2.3,2.4,3.5.1,4.2.1, Interpretation. .. ... .. 1._5,1.4,1.5,4.1.1,4.3.1,5.1,6.1.2,8.1.4 4.2.6,4.3.5,9.5.2,9.8.2,9.9.1, 10.2.5, 12, 13.7.1.3 Interpretations,Written .................. 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.7 Defective Work,Definition of ......................... 3.5.1 Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required ............. 4.5.6 Definitions...... 1.1,2.1.1,3.1,3.5.1,3.12.1,3.12.2,3.12.3,4.1.1, Judgment on Final Award ................ 4.5.1,4.5.4.1,4.5.7 4.3.1,5.1,6.1.2,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.3.6,8.1,9.1,9.8.1 Labor and Materials,Equipment.... 1.1.3,1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.82, Delays and Extensions of Time........... 4.3.1,4.3.8.1,4.3.82, 3.12.2,3.12.3,3.12.7,3.12.11,3.13,3.15.1, 6.1.1,6.2.3,7.2.1,7.3.1.7.3.4,7.3.5,7.3.8, 4.2.7,6.2.1,7.3.6,9.3.2,9.3.3, 12.2.4, 14 1.3.9.8.1.1,8.3, 10.3.1, 14.1.1.4 Labor Disputes ..................................... 8.3.1 Disputes ...... ...... 4.1.4,4.3,4.4,.4.5.6.2.5,6.3,7.3.8,9.3.12 Laws and Regulations ....... 1.3,3.6,3.7,3.13,4.1.1,4.5.5,4.5.7, Documents and Samples at the Site ......... ............. 3.11 9.9.1. 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6 Drawings,Definition of .............................. 1.1.5 Licns......... . ........ 2.1.2,4.32,4.3.5.1,8.2.2,9.3.3.9.10.2 Drawings and Specifications,Use and Ownership of..... 1.1.1,13. Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder ................ 4.5.5 2.2.5,3.11, 5.3 Limitations.Statutes of ................... 4.5.4.2,12.2.6,13.7 Dury to Review Contra Documents and Field Conditions..... 32 Limitations of Authority.................... 3.3.1,4.1.2,4.2.1, Effective Date of insurance...................... 8.2.2,11.1.2 4.2.3.4.2.7,4.2.10,5.2.2, 5.2.4, 7.4, 11.3.10 AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRICTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA6 •01987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS.1735 NEW YORK AvF-NUF,N.R..WASHINGTON.D.C.20006 A201-1987 3 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.Copyright WM and Is Subject to legal Prosecution, INDEX Acceptance of Nonconforming Work ......... 9.6.6,9.9.3,12.3 Building Permit . ................. ....... ........... 3.7.1 Acceptance of Work ........... 9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3.9-10.1,9.10.3 Capitalization.. .. ................................... 1.4 Access to Work... ..................... ... 3.16,6.2.1,12.1 Certificate of Substantial Completion . ................... 9.8.2 Accident Prevention.............................. 4.2.3,10 Certificates for Payment....... 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3.9.4,9.5.9.6.1, Acts and Omissions ... 3.2.1.3.2.2,3.3.2,3.12.8,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.2, 9.6.6,9.7.1,9.8.3,9.10.1,9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 142.4 4.3.9,8.3.1, 10.1.4, 10.2.5, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1 Certificates of Inspection,Testing or Approval ..... 3.12.11.13-5.4 Addenda ..................... ................ 1.1-1,3.11 Certificates of Insurance .................. 9.3-2.9.10.2,11.1.3 Additional Cost,Claims for..... .... 4.3.6,4.3.7,4.3.9,6.1.1,10.3 Change Orders.. .... 1.1.1,2.4.1,3.8.2.4,3.11,4.2.8,4.3.3.5.2.3, Additional Inspections and Testing....... 4.2.6,9.8.2,12.2.1,13.5 7.1,7.2, 7.3.2,8.3.1,9.3.1.1,9.10.3. 11.3.1.2, Additional Time,Claims for............. 4.3.6,4-3.8,4.3-9,8.3.2 11.3.4, 11.3.9, 12.1.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT ....... 3.3-3,4,9.4,9.5 Change Orders,Definition of....... ................... 7.2.1 Advertisement or Invitation to Bid ...................... 1.1.1 Changes........................................... 7.1 Aesthetic Effect.... ........................... 4.2.13.4.5.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK .... 3.11,4.2.8,7,8.3.1,9.3-1.1,10-1.3 Allowances ...... .................................. 3.8 Claim,Definition of................................. 4.3.1 All-risk Iruurancc... .............................. 11.3.1.1 Claims and Disputes ................ 4.3,4.4,4.5,6.2.5.8.3.2, Applications for Payment .. 4.2-5,7.3.7.9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5.1,9.6-3, 9.3.1.2,9.3.3,9.10.4, 10.1.4 9.8.3,9.10.1,9.10.3.9.10.4, 11.1.3, 14.2.4 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims ................ 4.5.6 Approvals .... 2.4,3.3.3.3-5.3-10.2,3.12.4 through 3.12.8,3.18.3, Claims for Additional Cost........ 4.3.6,4.3.7,4.3.9,6.1.1,10.3 4.2.7,9.3.2, 11.3.1.4, 13.4.2, 13.5 Claims for Additional Time............ 4.3.6,4.3.8,4.3-9,8.3.2 Arbitration ....... .............. 4.1.4,4.3.2,4.3.4,4.4.4,4.5, Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions........... 4.3.6 8.3.1. 10.1.2, 11.3.9, 11-3.10 Claims for Damages. ..3.18,4.3.9.6.1.1,6.2.5,8.3.2,9.5.1.2, 10.1.4 Architect ........ . .. ..... .. . . . .. .. ........ ......... 4.1 Claims Subject to Arbitration................. 4.3.2,4.4.4,4-5.1 Architect.Definition of......... .. ........ ..... ....... 4.1.1 Cleaning Up ...... ..................... ........ 3.15,6.3 Architect,Extent of Authority... ..... 2.4,3.12.6,4.2.4.3.2,4.3.6, Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period ...... .... 13.7 4.4.5.2.6.3, 7.1.2,7.2.1,7.3.6. 7.4,9.2,9.3.1, Commencement of the Work,Conditions Relating to....... 2.1.2. 9.4,9.5,9.6.3.9.8.2.9.8.3,9.10.1,9.10.3. 12.1, 12.2.1, 2.2.1, 3.2.1,3.2.2,3.7.1,3.10.1,3.12.6,4.3.7,5.2.11 13.5.1, 13.5.2. 14.2.2. 14.2.4 6.2.2,8.1.2,8.2.2,9.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.4.1 Architect,Limitations of Authoriry and Responsibility. 3.3.3,3.12.8, Commencement of the Work,Definition of............... 8.1.2 3.12.11,4.1.2.4.2.1,4.2.2,4.2.3,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.10,4.2.12, Communications Facilitating Contract 4.2.13.4.3.2, 52.1,7.4,9.4.2,9.6.4,9.6.6 Administration ........................ 3.9-1,4.2.4,5.2.1 Architects Additional Sc,-%ices and Expenses .......... 2.4,9.8.2, Completion,Conditions Relating to ....... 3.11,3.15,4.2.2,42.9, 11.3.1.1. 12.2.1, 132.4. 13.5.2. 13.5.3, 142.4 4.3.2.9.4.2.9.8,9.9.1,9.10, 11.3.5, 12.2.2, 13.7.1 Architect's Administration of the Contract.......... 4.2,4.3.6. COMPLETION,PAYMENTS AND..... ....... ............. 9 4.3.7,4.4,9.4,9.5 Completion,Substantial......... 4.2.9.4.3-5.2.8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3, Architects Approvals 2.4.3-5-1.3-10.2.3-12.6.3-12.8,3.18.3,4.2.7 9.8.9.9.1, 12.2.2. 13.7 Architect's Authority to Reject Work. ... 3.5.1,4.2.6,12.1.2,12.2.1 Compliance with Laps...... 1.3,3.6,3.7,3.13,4.1.1,10.2.2,11.1, Architect's Copyright ................................. 1.3 11.3, 13.1. 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14.1.1, 142.1.3 Architect's Decisions.......... 4.2.6,4.2.7.4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13, Concealed or Unknown Conditions..................... 4.3.6 4.3.2,4.3.6,4.4.1,4.4.4,4.5.6.3.7.3.6,7.3.8,8.1.3,8.3.1, Conditions of the Contract .................. 1.1.1, 1.1.7,6.1.1 9.2,9.4,9.5.1.9.8.2.9.9.1, 10.1.2, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Consent,written .................. 1.3.1,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.12, Architect's Inspections .. ........ 4.2.2,4.2.9.4.3.6.9.4.2,9.8.2. 4.3.4,4.5.5.9.3.2,9.8.2,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3.10.1.2. 10.1.3. 9.92.9.10.1, 13.5 - _-_. 11.3.1, 11.3.1.4, 11.3.11, 13.2. 13.42 Architect's Instructi ons.. 42.6,4.2.7,42.8.4.3.7,7.4.1,12.1,13.5.2 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE Architect's Interpretations................. 4.2.11.4.2.12,4.3.7 CONTRACTORS . 1.1.4.6 Architect's On-Site Observations ........ 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.3.6,9.4.2, Construction Change Directive,Definition of.............. 7.3.1 9.5.1,9.10.1, 13.5 Construction Change Directives .... 1.1.1,4.2.8,7.1,7.3,9.3.1.1 Architect's Project Representative ..................... 4.2.10 Construction Schedules,Contractor's ............... 3.10,6.1.3 Architect's Relationship with Contractor ....... 1.1.2.3-2-1.3-2.2. Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts ................ 5.4 3.3.3.3.5.1,3.7.3,3.11,3.12.8,3.12.11,3.16,3.18,4.2.3.4.2.4, Continuing Contract Performance .................... 4.3.4 4.2.6, 4.2.12,52,6.2.2,7.3.4,9.8.2, 11.3.7, 12.1, 13.5 Contract,Definition of............................... 1.1.2 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors.... 1.1.2,4.2-3,4.2.4, CONTRACT,TERMINATION OR 4.2.6,9.6.3,9.6.4, 11.3.7 SUSPENSION OF THE .................. 4.3.7,5.4.1.1,14 Architect's Representations................. 9.42,9.5-1.9-10.1 Contract Administration ..................... 3.3-3,4.9.4.9.5 Architect's Site visits........ 4.22.42.5,4.2.9,4.3.6,9.4.2,9.5.1, Contract Award and Execution,Conditions Relating to...... 3.7.1, 9.8.2,9.91,9.10.1, 13.5 3.10,5.2,9.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.6,11.4.1 Asbestos .......................................... 10.1 Contract Documents,The ........................ 1.1,13,7 Attomcvs'Fees ........................ 3.18.1,9.10.2,10.1.4 Contract Documents,Copies Furnished and Use of... 1.3.2.2.5.5.3 Award of Separate Contracts........................... 6.1.1 Contract Documents.Definition of ..................... 1.1.1 Award of Subcontracts and Other ConVacts for Contract Performance During Arbitration............ 4.3.4.4.5.3 Portions of the Work .............................. 5.2 Contract Sum..... .............. 3.8.4.3.6,4.3.7,4.4.4,52.3. Basic Definitions.. ........... ....................... 1.1 6.1.3,7.2.7.3.9.1,9.7. 11.3.1, 122.4, 12.3. 142.4 Bidding Requirements......... ....... 1.1.1,1.1.7,5.2.1,11.4.1 Contract Sum,Definition of............................ 9.1 Boller and Machinery Insurance .............. ....... 11.3.2 Contract Time ................. 4.3.6,4.3.8,4.4.4,7.2.1.3.7.3, Bonds.Lien ............................... ....... 9.10.2 8.2.1.8.3.1,9.7. 12.1.1 Bonds,Performance and Payment.. ... 7.3.6.4.9-10.3,11-3.9,11.4 Contract Time.Definition of............... ........... 8.1.1 AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRICTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION 2 A201-1 987 AIAe •01987 THE AMERICAN INSTITL rE OF ARCHITECTS.1735 NEw YORK AYE`M N.W.,WASHINGTON,D-C-20006 WARIANG:Unlicensed photocopying violates I.L.E.copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. T H E A M E R I C A N I N S T I T U T E 0 is A R C H I T E C T S ALA Document A201 General Conditions of the Contract for. Construction THIS DOCUifF-VT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES; CONSULTATION W ITH eLV ATTORNEY IS.ExCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS MODIFICA TION 1987 EDITION TABLE OF ARTICLES I. GENERAL PROVISIONS 8. TIME 2. O%XrNER 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 3• CONTRACTOR 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 11. INSURANCE AND BONDS 5. SUBCONTRACTORS 12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY 13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 7. CHANGES IN THE WORK CONTRACT This document has been approved 2nd endorsed by the Associzted General Contmaors of America. Copyright 1911, 1915.1918, 1925,1937.1951, 1958, 1961, 1963,1966,1967,1970,1976,01987 by The American Institute of Architects,1735 New York Avenue.N.W.,Washington,D.C.,20006.Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA Violates the copyright lams of the United States and%ill be subject to legal prosecutions. I t CAUTION: You should use an original AIA document which has this caution printed In red. An original assures that changes will not be obscured as may occur when documents are reproduced. AIA DOMM W A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE r oNTRACT FOR CONSTRtTCTION•FOURIIMN-TH EDITION _ ALA* •019117 THE AMERICAN I.Nl7TM"rE OF ARCHITECTS.1735 NEW YORK AVENUE.V.W.,WASHNNGTON,D.G.20006 A201.1987 1 WARNING:UnlloensW photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton,MA -1 Title Sheet L-1 Site Survey FP-1 Fire Protection Basement Floor Plan FP-2 Fire Protection First Floor Plan A-1 Basement Plan FP-3 Fire Protection Second Floor Plan A-2 First Floor Plan FP-4 Fire Protection Third Floor Plan A-3 Second Floor Plan FP-5 Fire Protection Attic Floor Plan A-4 Third and Fourth Floor Plans FP-6 Fire Protection Details A-5 Roof Plan A-6 Exterior Elevation P-1 Plumbing Basement Floor Plan A-7 Exterior Elevation P-2 Plumbing First Floor Plan A-8 Exterior Elevation At Courtyard P-3 Plumbing Second Floor Plan A-9 Basement & 1st Floor Door Schedules P Plumbing Third Floor Plan A-10 Second Floor Door Schedules P-5 Plumbing Attic Floor Plan A-11 Third Floor Door Schedules P-6 Existing & New Plumbing Plans A-12 4th Floor Door Schedule & Details P-7 Plumbing Details A-13 Basement & First Floor Finish Schedule t x44 Second Floor Finish Schedule H-1 HVAC, Basement Floor Plan A-15 Third and Fourth Floor Finish Schedule H-2 HVAC First Floor Plan A-16 Large Scale Plans - Basement, Toilet Rms H-3 HVAC Second Floor Plan A-17 Reflected Ceiling Plans - Basement, Toilet Rms H-4 HVAC Third Floor Plan A-18 Interior Elevations H-5 HVAC Attic Floor Plan A-19 Interior Elevations H-6 HVAC Enlarged Bathroom Plans A-20 Interior Elevations and Details H-7 HVAC Details A-21 Sections at Elevator Shaft H-8 HVAC Schedules & Details A-22 Door Details & Entry Details A-22A Exterior Stairs and Ramps, Sections & Details E-1 Electrical Basement Floor Plan A-23 Detail Sheet E-2 Electrical First Floor Plan E-3 Electrical First Floor Plan S-1 Basement Plan Structural Modifications E-4 Electrical Second Floor Plan S-2 First Floor Plan Structural Modifications E-5 Electrical Third Floor Plan S-3 Second Floor Plan Structural Modifications E-6 Electrical Attic Floor Plan S-4 Third Floor Plan Structural Modifications E-7 Enlarged Electrical Plans S-5 Roof Plan Structural Repairs E-8 Electrical Riser Diagrams & Schedules S-6 Structural Details: New Elevations E-9 Electrical Schedules & Details S-7 Structural Details: Roof and Attic Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110........Steel Doors and Frames............................................................... .............................. 6 08212........Wood Doors ............................................................................... .............................. 4 08710........Door Hardware........................................................................... .............................. 11 DIVISION 9-FINISHES 09255........Gypsum Board Assemblies......................................................... .............................. 11 09310........Ceramic Tile............................................................................... .............................. 8 09511 ........Acoustical Panel Ceilings............................................ ................ .............................. 09550........Wood Floor Refinishing.............................................................. .............................. 2 09551 ........Wood Flooring............................................................................ .............................. 2 09654........Linoleum Floor Coverings.......................................................... .............................. 7 09660........Resilient Tile Flooring................................................................ .............................. 6 09666........Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings....................................................... .............................. 5 09680........Carpet......................................................................................... .............................. 6 09950........Wall Coverings........................................................................... . DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES 10155 ........Toilet Compartments................................................................... . 10800........Toilet And Bath Accessories....................................................... .............................. 5 DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT DIVISION 12-FURNISHINGS 12372........Kitchen Casework................................... 12500........Shades * ►+, ........................................................................................ .............................. 2 DIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION DIVISION 14-CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14240........Hydraulic Elevators.................................................................... .............................. 8 DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL 15300........Fire Protection............................................................................ ..............................24 15400........Plumbing.................................................................................... .............................. 19 15600........Heating,Ventilating and Air Conditioning.................................. ..............................49 DIVISION 16-ELECTRICAL 16100........Electrical .................................................................................... ..............................20 AW Table of Contents Page 2 Renovations to Comstock-Wilder April 15,2000 Smith College,Northampton, MA Table of Content ivision....Section Title............................................................................... ..............................Pa REFERENCE ..................Table of Contents........................................................................ .............................. 2 ..................List of Drawings......................................................................... .............................. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A201-1987 AIA Document-General Conditions of the Contract for Construction........................24 Supplementary General Conditions................................................................ .............................. 3 DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010........Summary Of Work(with Construction Manager's Summary attached)...................... 4 01027........Applications For Payment........................................................... . 01040........Coordination............................................................................... .............................. 3 01045........Cutting And Patching.................................................................. .............................. 3 01200........Project Meetings......................................................................... .............................. 3 01300........Submittals................... ................................................................ .............................. 01600........Materials And Equipment........................................................... .............................. 3 01700........Contract Closeout....................................................................... .............................. 5 DIVISION 2-SITE CONSTRUCTION 02070........Selective Demolition................................................................... . 02200........Earthwork................................................................................... .............................. 6 DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE 03300........Cast-in-place Concrete................................................................ .............................. 8 DIVISION 4-MASONRY 04525........Clay Masonry Restoration And Cleaning..................................... .............................. 9 04810........Unit Masonry Assemblies........................................................... .............................. 7 DIVISION 5-METALS 05500........Metal Fabrications ...................................................................... .............................. 8 DIVISION 6-WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100........Rough Carpentry......................................................................... .............................. 10 06401 ........Exterior Architectural Woodwork............................................... .............................. 5 06402........Interior Architectural Woodwork................................................ .............................. 7 DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07315........Slate Shingles............................................................................. .............................. 9 07533 ........Single Ply Membrane Roofing.................................................... .............................. 6 07620........Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim................................................... .............................. 07920........Joint Sealants.............................................................................. .............................. Table of Contents Page 1 VGA' too Allf s K I xr � C 3hPAY 3 0 i0 ( Project Manual DEPT of BW Project NU 11-AM�fLo M1 0,G60NS For COMSTOCK-WILDER DORMITORY RENOVATIONS Smith College Northampton, Massachusetts Architect Juster Pope Frazier LLP 9 Ashfield Street Shelburne Falls, MA 01370 413-625-2572 R fit'\+V F/p No 3441 y AMHERST. MASS. Oyu. Co>astraction Managers Structural Engineers A Joint Venture Gibble Norden Champion PO Box 656 Texas Rd. 130 Ehn Street, PO Box 802 Northampton, MA 01060 Old Saybrook, CT 06475 Mechanical&Electrical E JnMrs Civil Engineers Lindgren&Sharples,PC Heritage Surveys,Inc. 96 Industry Ave. College Highway Springfield, MA 01104 Southampton, MA 01073